precautions before operation

◆◆◆

PRECAUTIONS BEFORE OPERATION◆◆◆

Cautions for high voltage

High voltages from hundreds volts to tens of thousands volts are to be applied to the electronic equipment such radio and radar devices. You do not face any danger during normal operation, but sufficient cares are required for maintenance, inspection and adjustment of their internal components. (Maintenance, check-up and adjustment of the inside of the equipment are prohibited except by maintenance specialists.)

High voltages of tens of thousands volts are so dangerous as to bring an instantaneous death from electric shock, but even voltages of hundred volts may sometimes lead to a death from electric shock. To prevent such an accident, make it a rule to turn off the power switch, discharge capacitors with a wire surely earthed on an end make sure that internal parts are no longer charged before you touch any parts inside these devices. At the time, wearing dry cotton gloves ensures you further to prevent such danger. It is also a necessary caution to put one of your hands in the pocket and not to use your both hands at the same time.

It is also important to select a stable foothold always to prevent additional injuries once you were shocked by electricity. If you were injured from electric shock, disinfect the burn sufficiently and get it taken care of promptly.

What to do in case of electric shock

When finding a victim of electric shock, turn off the power source and earth the circuit immediately.

If it is impossible to turn off the circuit, move the victim away promptly using insulators such as dry wood plate and cloth without touching the victim directly.

In case of electric shock, breathing may stop suddenly if current flows to the respiration center in the brain. If the shock is not so strong, artificial respiration may recover breathing. When shocked by electricity, the victim will come to look very bad with weak pulse or without beating, resulting in unconsciousness and rigidity. In this case, it is necessary to perform an emergency measure immediately.

◆◆◆

FIRST-AID TREATMENTS◆◆◆

First-aid treatments

As far as the victim of electric shock is not in dangerous condition, do not move him and practice artificial respiration on him immediately. Once started, it should be continued rhythmically.

(1) Do not touch the victim confusedly as a result of the accident, but the rescuer may also get an electric shock.

(2) Turn off the power source calmly and move the victim away quietly from the electric line.

(3) Call a physician or ambulance immediately or ask someone to call a doctor.

(4) Lay the victim on this back and loosen his necktie, clothes, belt, etc.

(5) a. Examine the victim’s pulse. b. Examine his heartbeat bringing your ear close to his heart. c. Examine his breathing bringing the back of your hand or your face close to his face. d. Check the size of the pupils of his eyes.

(6) Open the victim’s mouth and take out artificial teeth, cigarette or chewing gum if any. Keep his mouth open, stretch his tongue and insert a towel or the like in his mouth to prevent the tongue from suffocating. (If it is hard to open his mouth due to set teeth, open it with a screwdriver and insert a towel in this mouth.)

(7) Then, wipe his mouth so that foaming mucus does not accumulate inside.

When pulse is beating but breathing has stopped

(Mouth-to-mouth respiration) Fig. 1

(1) Tilt the victim’s head back as far as this face looks back. (A pillow may be inserted his neck.)

(2) Push his jaw upward to open his throat wide (to spread his airway).

(3) Pinch the victim’s nostrils and take a deep breath, block his mouth completely with yours and blow into his mouth strongly. Take a deep breath again and blow into his mouth.

Continue this 10 to 15 times a minutes (blocking his nostrils).

(4) Carefully watch that he has recovered his natural breathing and atop practicing artificial respiration.

(5) If it is difficult to open the victim’s mouth, insert a rubber or vinyl tube into one of his nostrils and blow into it blocking the other nostril and his mouth completely.

(6) When the victim recovers consciousness, he may try to stand up suddenly, but let him lie calmly and serve him with a cup of hot coffee or tea and keep him warm and quiet. (Never give him alcoholic drinks.)

Method of mouth-to-mouth respiration by raising head

(1) Raise the victim’s head. Support his forehead with one of your hand and his neck with the other hand.

→1

When you tilt his head backward, the victim, in most cases, opens his mouth to the air. This makes mouth-to mouth respiration easy.

(2) Cover his mouth as widely as possible with yours and press your cheek against his nose

→2 or, pinch his nostrils with your fingers to prevent air from leaking.

→3

(3) Blow into his lungs. Continue blowing into his mouth until his breast swells.

Blow into his mouth as quickly as possible for the first 10 times.

Fig. 1 Mouth-to mouth respiration

When both pulse and breathing have stopped

Perform the (Cardiac massage) Fig. 2 and (Mouth-to-mouth respiration) Fig. 1

When no pulse has come not to be felt, his pupils are open and no heartbeat is heard, cardiac arrest is supposed to have occurred and artificial respiration must be performed.

(1) Place your both hands, one hand on the other, on the lower one third area of his breastbone and compress his breast with your elbows applying your weight on his breast so that it is dented about 2cm (Repeat compressing his breast 50 times or so a minutes). (Cardiac massage)

(2) In case of one rescuer,

Repeat cardiac massages about 15 times and blow into his mouth 2 times quickly, and repeat this combination.

In case of two rescuers,

One person repeats cardiac massages 15 times while the other person blow into his mouth twice, and they shall repeat this combination. (Perform the cardiac massage and mouth-to-mouth respiration)

(3) Examine his pupils and his pulse sometimes. When the both have returned to normal, stop the artificial respiration, serve him with a cup of hot coffee or tea and keep him warm and calm while watching him carefully. Commit the victim to a medical specialist depending on his condition. (Never give him alcoholic drinks.) To let him recover from the mental shock, it is necessary for persons concerned to understand his situations and the necessary treatment.

Fig. 2 Cardiac massage

PREFACE

Thank you very much for purchasing the JRC marine radar equipment, JMA-5200M2 series.

This equipment is a marine radar equipment designed to obtain safe operation of marine ships.

This equipment consists of a radar signal transmitter-receiver unit, a LCD display unit and a scanner unit as its main units.

● Before operating the equipment, be sure to read this instruction manual carefully for correct operation.

Maintain this instruction manual so that operators can refer to it at anytime.

Refer to this manual when any inconvenience or defect occurs.

- i -

Before Operation●

Pictorial Indication

Various pictorial indications are included in this manual and are shown on these equipment so that you can operate them safety and correctly and prevent any danger to you and/or to other persons and any damage to your property during operation. Such indications and their meanings are as follows.

Please understand them before you read this manual:

DANGER

This indication is shown where incorrect equipment operation due to negligence may cause death or serious injuries.

WARNING

This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be in danger of being killed or seriously injured if this indication is neglected and these equipment are not operated correctly.

CAUTION

This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be injured or any property damage is supposed to occur if this indication is neglected and these equipment are not operated correctly.

Examples of Pictorial Indication

Electric Shock

The U mark represents CAUTION (including DANGER and WARNING).

Detailed contents of CAUTION (“Electric Shock” in the example on the left.) is shown in the mark.

Disassembling

Prohibited

Prohibited

The ; mark represents prohibition.

Detailed contents of the prohibited action (“Disassembling Prohibited” in the example on the left.) is shown in the mark.

Disconnect the power plug

Instruction

The z mark represents instruction.

Detailed contents of the instruction (“Disconnect the power plug “ in the example on the left.) is shown in the mark.

Warning Label

There is a warning label on the top cover of the equipment.

Do not try to remove, break or modify the label.

- ii -

PRECAUTIONS●

DANGER

Never conduct inspection or repair work of equipment components.

Inspection or repair work by uncertified personnel may result in fire hazard or electrocution.

For inspection and repair work of equipment components, consult with our branch office, branch shop, sales office, or our distributor in your district.

When conducting maintenance, make sure to turn the main power off.

Failure to comply may result in electrocution.

Turn off the main power before cleaning the equipment.

Especially when a rectifier is used, make sure to turn it off since voltage is still outputted from the rectifier even after the indicator and the radar are turned off. Failure to comply may result in equipment failure, or death or serious injury due to electric shock.

When conducting maintenance work on the antenna, make sure to turn its main power off.

Failure to comply may result in electrocution or injuries.

Make sure to turn off the antenna operation switch.

Failure to comply may result in injuries caused by physical contact with the rotating antenna.

- iii -

WARNING

Never directly touch the internal components of the antenna, receiver/transceiver, or indicator. Direct contact with these high-voltage components may cause electrocution. For maintenance, inspection, or adjustment of equipment components, consult with our branch office, branch shop, sales office, or our distributor in your district.

Do not get close to the radiant section of the antenna. It is a rotating part, and it may cause injuries if it suddenly starts rotating and consequently hits the body. It is recommended that the radiant section be installed at a high place such as on the roof of the wheelhouse, on the flying bridge, on the trestle, or on the radar mast so that no one can get close to it. When any work must be done on the antenna, make sure to turn the antenna switch off.

Microwave radiation level of the antenna

Make sure to stay away from the microwave-radiating antenna during transmission at least by the distances indicated below. If the distance between you and the front-center of the antenna is shorter than the distances indicated below, exposure to microwave may result in physical injuries (damage to the eye in particular).

NKE-2103 ( radio-density : 10 W/m

2

): 0.6 m

NKE-2254 ( radio-density : 10 W/m

2

): 0.6 m

Make sure to install the antenna at a place higher than human height.

Direct exposure to electromagnetic waves at close range will have adverse effects on the human body.

- iv -

WARNING

Direct exposure to electromagnetic waves at close range will have adverse effects on the human body. When it is necessary to get close to the antenna for maintenance or inspection purposes, make sure to turn the indicator power switch to "OFF" or "STBY."

Direct exposure to electromagnetic waves at close range will have adverse effects on the human body.

Before staring maintenance work, make sure to completely shut off the electrical supply to the equipment by turning off the equipment power and shutting down the breaker for the indicator processor.

Some equipment components can carry electrical current even after the power switch is turned off, and conducting maintenance work without unplugging the power connector may result in electrocution, equipment failure, or accidents.

When cleaning the display screen, do not wipe it too strongly with a dry cloth. Also, do not use gasoline or thinner to clean the screen. Failure to comply will result in damage to the screen surface.

Do not change MBS Level/Area unless absolutely necessary.

Incorrect adjustment will result in deletion of nearby target images and thus collisions may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.

When disposing of used lithium batteries, be sure to insulate the batteries by attaching a piece of adhesive tape on the

and { terminals. Failure to comply may

cause heat generation, explosion, or fire when the batteries get shorted out.

- v -

WARNING

Do not change this adjusted level carelessly.

Incorrect adjustment may erase targets in point-blank range and cause collision, resulting in death or serious injury.

Do not touch the radiator. Even if the power is turned off, the radiator may be rotated by the wind.

- vi -

CAUTION

Use the radar only as a navigation aid. The final navigation decision must always be made by the operator him/herself. Making the final navigation decision based only on the radar display may cause accidents such as collisions or running aground.

Use the target tracking function (TT) only as a navigation aid. The final navigation decision must always be made by the operator him/herself. Making the final navigation decision based only on the target tracking function (TT) information may cause accidents.

The target tracking function (TT) information such as vector, target numerical data, and alarms may contain some errors. Also, targets that are not detected by the radar cannot be acquired or tracked.

Making the final navigation decision based only on the radar display may cause accidents such as collisions or

running aground.

A malfunction may occur if the power in the ship is instantaneously interrupted during operation of the radar.

In this case, the power should be turned on again.

When using the [AUTO SEA] function, never set the suppression level too high canceling out all image noises from the sea surface at close range.

Detection of not only echoes from waves but also targets such as other ships or dangerous objects will become inhibited.

When using the [AUTO SEA] function, make sure to choose the most appropriate image noise suppression

level.

- vii -

CAUTION

When using the [AUTO RAIN] function, never set the suppression level too high canceling out all image noises from the rain or snow at close range.

Detection of not only echoes from the rain or snow but also targets such as other ships or dangerous objects will become inhibited.

When using the [AUTO RAIN] function, make sure to choose the most appropriate image noise suppression

level.

When setting a automatic acquisition zone, make sure to properly adjust gain, sea-surface reflection suppression level, and rain/snow reflection suppression level so that the optimal target images are always on the radar screen.

The automatic acquisition zone alarm will not be activated for targets undetected by the radar, and it may result in accidents such as collisions.

The simulation function is used exclusively for deciding whether or not the target tracking function (TT) is properly operating. Therefore, never use this function unless you wish to check the target tracking function (TT) operations.

Note especially that, if this function is used during actual navigation, simulated targets are displayed and may become confused with other actual targets. Therefore, never use this function during actual navigation.

Optimal values have been set for VD LEVEL and

CONSTANT; therefore, never change their values unless absolutely necessary. Failure to comply may result in accidents that would lower the target tracking function

(TT) performance.

Make sure to shut off the main power before replacing parts. Failure to comply may result in electrocution or

equipment failure.

- viii -

CAUTION

When replacing magnetrons, make sure to shut off the main power and let the equipment stand for more than 5 minutes to discharge the high-voltage circuit. Failure to

comply may result in electrocution.

Make sure to take off your watch when your hand must get close to the magnetron.

Failure to comply may result in damage to the watch

since the magnetron is a strong magnet.

Make sure that two or more staff member work together when replacing the LCD. If only one person attempts to

replace the LCD, he/she may drop it and become injured.

Do not directly touch the inverter circuit of the LCD display with a bare hand since high voltage temporarily remains in the circuit even after the main power is shut off.

Failure to comply may result in electrocution.

Any adjustments must be made by specialized service personnel.

Incorrect settings may result in unstable operation.

Do not make any adjustments during navigation. Failure to comply may result in adverse effects on the radar function which may lead to accidents or equipment failure.

Any adjustments must be made by specialized service personnel.

Failure to comply may result in accidents or equipment failure.

- ix -

CAUTION

Do not change the quantization level settings unless absolutely necessary. If set at an inappropriate value, the acquisition or tracking function of the target tracking function (TT) deteriorates, and this may lead to accidents.

Always use the automatic tuning mode.

Use the manual tuning mode only when the automatic tuning mode does not provide the best tuning state due

to deterioration of magnetron for example.

If sensitivity is set too high, unnecessary signals such as noises in the receiver and false echoes increase to lower target visibility.

At the same time, if sensitivity is set too low, detection of targets such as ships and dangerous objects may be hindered.

Therefore, sensitivity must always be set to an optimal

level.

When the chart position is corrected, the display will be shifted away from the actual position. With this in mind, navigate your ship with attention to the surroundings.

Otherwise, this may cause accidents.

Compact Flash Cards can be used with this system. The following shows the recommendations in use. However they do not guarantee that CF cards may properly work with this system. Depending on the hardware or software, the cards will not work correctly.

Any damage including loss of data caused by using the data created on this system is out of warranty.

Important files should be backed up therefore.

- x -

CAUTION

When a large value is set as an association condition, a tracked target near an AIS target is identified as the AIS target and may thus disappear from the display.

For example, when a pilot vessel equipped with the AIS function (a small target which is not a tracked target) goes near a cargo vessel which is a tracked target without the AIS function, the tracked target symbol for the

cargo vessel may disappear.

When a small value is set as a hysteresis condition, a tracked target near an AIS target is identified as the AIS target and may thus disappear from the display.

For example, when a pilot vessel equipped with the AIS function (a small target which is not a tracked target) goes near a cargo vessel which is a tracked target without the AIS function, the tracked target symbol for the

cargo vessel may disappear.

Since these alarms may include some errors depending on the target tracking conditions, the navigation officer himself should make the final decision for ship operations such as collision avoidance.

Making the final navigation decision based only on the

alarm may cause accidents such as collisions.

- xi -

EQUIPMENT APPEARANCE

Scanner Unit Type NKE-2103-4 (4 feet)

Scanner Unit Type NKE-2103-6 (6 feet)

Scanner Unit Type NKE-2254-7 (7 feet)

Scanner Unit Type NKE-2254-9 (9 feet)

- xii -

NDC-1460 Processor Unit (Desktop Type)

NWZ-164 Display Unit (Desktop Type)

NCE-7699A Operation Unit (Desktop Type)

NCD-4380 Display Unit (Desktop Type)

- xiii -

CONTENTS

PREFACE................................................................................................................i

BEFORE OPERATION ...........................................................................................ii

PRECAUTIONS..................................................................................................... iii

EQUIPMENT APPEARANCE ............................................................................... xii

GLOSSARY ........................................................................................................ xxii

1. GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION

1.1 FUNCTIONS........................................................................................... 1-1

1.1.1 Function This System ................................................................... 1-1

1.2 FEATURES ............................................................................................. 1-2

1.3 CONFIGURATION .................................................................................. 1-4

2. SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION PANEL

2.1 EXAMPLE DISPLAY ......................................................................... 2-1

2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS...................... 2-2

2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS.............................................. 2-7

2.3.1 Software Buttons for Area 1

(Top-Left Corner of the Radar Display) ............................................. 2-8

2.3.2 Software Buttons for Area 2

(Bottom-Left Corner of the Radar Display) ....................................... 2-9

2.3.3 Software Buttons for Area 3

(Top-Right Corner of the Radar Display)......................................... 2-10

2.3.4 Software Buttons for Area 4

(Bottom-Right Corner of the Radar Display) ................................... 2-12

2.3.5 Software Buttons for Area 5 (Own Ship Information Area)

(Right Side of the Radar Display) ................................................... 2-13

2.3.6 Software Buttons for Area 6 (Other Ship Information Area)

(Right Side of the Radar Display) ................................................... 2-14

2.3.7 Software Buttons for Area 7 (Panel Display Area)

- xiv -

(Right Side of the Radar Display).................................................... 2-16

2.3.8 Software Buttons for Area 7 (Panel Display Area)

(Right Side of the Radar Display).................................................... 2-17

2.3.9 Software Buttons for Area 8 (Operation and Message Area)

(Right Side of the Radar Display).................................................... 2-18

3. BASIC

3.1.1 Power ON and Start the System .......................................................3-2

3.1.4 End the Operation and Stop the System...........................................3-4

3.2.1 Overview Menu Structure..............................................................3-5

3.3 PREPARATION .......................................................................................3-8

3.3.3 Adjust Operation Panel Brilliance [PANEL] .......................................3-9

3.3.5 Adjust Brilliance of Information on Radar Display

(Brilliance Setting)...........................................................................3-10

3.3.6 Adjust Sound Volume (Buzzer Volume) .......................................... 3-11

3.4.3 Change Range (Observation Range Scale) [RANGE+/-]................ 3-14

3.4.4 Tune................................................................................................ 3-15

3.4.6 Suppress Sea Clutter [AUTO-SEA]................................................. 3-17

3.4.8 Reject Radar Interference [IR] ........................................................ 3-21

3.4.10 Hide Ship’s Heading Line (HL OFF)................................................ 3-22

3.4.11 Hide Graphics Information on Radar Display (Graphic Display) ..... 3-23

3.5.1 Move Cross Cursor Mark by Trackball ............................................ 3-24

- xv -

3.5.2 Use EBLs (Electronic Bearing Lines) [EBL1/2] ............................... 3-25

3.5.3 Set EBL Operation (EBL1 /2 Setting).............................................. 3-28

3.5.4 Display Variable Range Markers [VRM1/VRM2]............................. 3-31

3.5.5 Display Parallel Cursors (Parallel Cursor) ...................................... 3-34

3.5.7 Switch Bearing Display Mode [AZI MODE]..................................... 3-48

3.5.9 Move Own Ship's Display Position [OFF CENT]............................. 3-50

3.5.10 Display Other Ships’ Trails [TRAILS] .............................................. 3-51

3.5.14 Zoom .............................................................................................. 3-57

3.5.17 Operate EBL Maneuver Function (EBL Maneuver)......................... 3-60

3.5.19 Operate User Key Switches [User Key 1/2] .................................... 3-64

3.6 USE OWN SHIP’S TRACK DATA ......................................................... 3-74

3.6.1 Display Own Ship’s Track (Display Own Track) .............................. 3-74

3.6.2 Set Own Ship’s Track Data Storage Interval (Own Track Interval).. 3-76

3.6.3 Cancel Storing of Own Ship’s Track Data (Own Track Memory)..... 3-77

3.6.4 Clear Own Ship’s Track Data (Clear Own Track)............................ 3-78

3.7.1 Insert/Remove a Card..................................................................... 3-79

3.7.2 Display Coastline ROM Card Produced by JRC............................. 3-81

(NAV INFORMATION DISPLAY)........................................................... 3-84

3.8.1 Display Waypoint Marks (Waypoint Display) .................................. 3-84

3.8.2 Display Navigation Information (NAV Display Setting).................... 3-85

3.8.3 Create/Edit Navigation Information (Edit User Map)....................... 3-86

3.8.4 Set Navigation Information (User Map Setting) .............................. 3-92

3.8.5 Set and Display Geodetic System .................................................. 3-99

3.9.1 Set Radar Signal Processing (Process Setting) ........................... 3-101

- xvi -

3.9.2 Set Radar Trails (RADAR Trails Setting)....................................... 3-104

3.9.5 Set Scanner (TXRX Setting) ......................................................... 3-115

3.9.7 Set LORAN C (LORAN C Correction) ...........................................3-128

3.10.3 Overview of Function Operations.................................................. 3-131

3.10.4 Overview of Stored Function Setting Data .................................... 3-134

3.11.1 Save in and Transfer to Card (MEM CAPA/Copy)......................... 3-139

3.11.2 Erase/Initialize Card Memory (CLR MEM/INIT Card).................... 3-145

4. MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING

4.1 MEASUREMENT USING THE CURSOR WITH THE TRACKBALL........4-1

4.2 MEASUREMENT RANGE RINGS.....................................................4-2

4.3 MEASUREMENT EBLS AND VRMS .................................................4-3

5. OPERATION OF TT AND AIS

5.1 PREPARATION .......................................................................................5-2

5.1.5 Setting Collision Decision Criteria (CPA/TCPA Limit) ...................... 5-14

5.1.6 Setting CPA Ring (CPA Ring) ..........................................................5-15

5.1.8 Setting the GPS antenna location ...................................................5-17

5.2.4 Displaying Target ID No. (Target Number Display).......................... 5-24

- xvii -

5.2.5 Input of target information (TT Individual Setting) ........................... 5-25

5.3.1 Restrictions..................................................................................... 5-35

5.3.3 Setting AIS Display Function (AIS Function)................................... 5-38

5.3.6 Displaying Numeric Data of AIS Targets (TGT DATA)..................... 5-41

5.3.7 Displaying Target ID No. (Target Number Display) ......................... 5-46

5.3.8 Setting AIS Filter (AIS Filter Setting)............................................... 5-47

5.3.9 Conditions for Deciding AIS Target to be Lost ................................ 5-51

5.3.10 Setting AIS Alarm (AIS Alarm Setting) ............................................ 5-52

5.4 TARGET ASSOCIATION ASSESSMENT (ASSOCIATION SETTING) . 5-53

5.4.2 Priority ............................................................................................ 5-54

5.4.3 Azimuth........................................................................................... 5-55

5.4.4 Distance.......................................................................................... 5-56

5.4.5 Course ............................................................................................ 5-57

5.4.6 Speed ............................................................................................. 5-58

5.4.7 Hysteresis....................................................................................... 5-59

5.4.8 Non-Hysteresis ............................................................................... 5-60

6. TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY

6.1 RADAR WAVE WITH THE HORIZON .................................................... 6-2

6.2 STRENGTH OF REFLECTION FROM THE TARGET............................ 6-4

- xviii -

7. SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION

7.1 SETTINGS INSTALLATION ...............................................................7-1

7.1.1 How to open the Adjust Menu ...........................................................7-2

7.1.5 Antenna Height Setting (Antenna Hight) ...........................................7-8

7.1.6 Setting of CCRP/Antenna/GPS Antenna Position (CCRP Setting) ...7-9

7.2.1 Ship Heading Equipment Setting (Heading Equipment).................. 7-14

7.2.3 True Bearing Value Setting (Set GYRO) ......................................... 7-17

7.2.6 Manual Speed Setting (Manual Speed)...........................................7-20

7.3 SETTINGS ............................................................................................ 7-23

7.3.1 Communication Port Setting (COM Port Setting) ............................ 7-23

7.3.2 Sector Blank Setting (Sector Blank)................................................ 7-30

7.3.4 Bearing Pulse Output Adjustment (Output Pulse) ........................... 7-33

7.3.6 Date/Time Display Setting (Date/Time Setting)............................... 7-35

7.4 ADJUSTMENT ......................................................................................7-36

7.4.2 Adjustment Target Tracking Function (TT) .................................. 7-39

7.4.4 Adjustment of Performance Monitor (NJU-85) ................................ 7-45

7.5 MAINTENANCE MENU......................................................................... 7-47

7.5.1 Scanner Safety Switch Setting (Safety Switch)............................... 7-48

7.5.2 Initialization of Memory Area (Area Initial)....................................... 7-49

7.5.3 Save of Internal Memory Data (Card2) ........................................... 7-50

7.5.4 Update of Character String Data (String Data Update).................... 7-52

- xix -

8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK ...................................................................... 8-6

8.3.1.1 Self-diagnosis function .............................................................. 8-8

8.3.1.2 Monitor Test............................................................................. 8-10

8.3.1.6 System INFO........................................................................... 8-17

8.3.1.7 MAGI ....................................................................................... 8-18

8.3.3 GPS Reception Status Display (GPS Status) ................................. 8-21

8.4 REPLACEMENT MAJOR PARTS ................................................... 8-23

8.4.1 Parts Required for Periodic Replacement....................................... 8-24

8.4.4 Replacement of Diode Limiter (A303) (JMA-5212-4/6, 5222-7/9)... 8-36

9. TROUBLESHOOTING

9.1.1 List and other Indications.................................................. 9-1

9.2.1 Spares .............................................................................................. 9-5

9.3.1 Keeping period of maintenance parts ............................................... 9-8

9.3.2 When you Request for Repair .......................................................... 9-8

- xx -

10. DISPOSAL

10.2 DISPOSAL OF USED BATTERIES ....................................................... 10-2

10.3 DISPOSAL OF USED MAGNETRON ................................................... 10-3

11. SPECIFICATIONS

11.8 AIS UNIT (NQA-2155)........................................................................... 11-9

11.15 EQUIPMENT DISTANCE BETWEEN OTHER INSTRUMENTS ......... 11-15

- xxi -

GLOSSARY

This section describes the main terms used for this equipment and general related maritime terms.

AZ

Activated target

A

Acquisition/Activation zone

A zone set up by the operator in which the system should automatically acquire radar targets and activate reported AIS targets when entering the zone.

AIS

A target representing the automatic or manual activation of a sleeping target for the display of additional information.

Automatic Identification System

A system which enables ships and shore stations to obtain identifying and navigation information about other ships at sea, using an automated transponder.

Anti-clutter rain

Anti-clutter sea

Associated target

AZI

BCR/BCT

Rain/snow clutter suppression.

Sea clutter suppression.

A target simultaneously representing a tracked target and a reported AIS target having similar parameters (position, course, speed) which comply with an association algorithm.

AZImuth stabilization mode

B

Bow Crossing Range and Bow Crossing Time

C

C up

CCRP

Course up

Own ship’s course is pointed to the top center of the radar display.

Clutter

COG

The Consistent Common Reference Point

A location on own ship, to which all horizontal measurements such as target range, bearing, relative course, relative speed, CPA or TCPA are referenced, typically the conning position of the bridge.

Unwanted reflections on a radar screen, from sea surface, rain or snow.

Course Over Ground

The direction of the ship's movement relative to the earth, measured on board the ship, expressed in angular units from true north

- xxii -

CORREL

CPA/TCPA

CTW

DRIFT

EBL

ENH

ETA

Ground stabilization

HDG

HL

HSC

H up

IMO

Interswitch Unit

IR

CORRELation

The distance to the Closest Point of Approach and Time to the Closest

Point of Approach. Limits are set by the operator and are related to own ship.

Course Through Water

The direction of the ship's movement through the water

D

The current velocity for manual correction or the current speed on the horizontal axis of the 2-axis log is displayed.

E

Electronic Bearing Line

An electronic bearing line originated from own ship’s position.

Enhance

Estimated Time of Arrival

G

A display mode in which speed and course information are referred to the ground, using ground track input data.

H

Heading

The horizontal direction that the bow of a ship is pointing at any instant, expressed in angular units from a reference direction .

Heading line

A graphic line on a radar presentation drawn from the consistent common reference point to the bearing scale to indicate the heading of the ship

Vessels which comply with the definition in SOLAS for high speed craft

Head up

Own ship’s heading line is always pointed to the top center of the radar display.

I

International Maritime Organization

A device to switch over two or more radar display units and two or more scanners. radar Interference Rejecter

- xxiii -

ISW

InterSWitch

L

Lost AIS target

A target symbol representing the last valid position of an AIS target before the reception of its data was lost, or its last dead-reckoned position.

Lost tracked target One for which target information is no longer available due to poor, lost or obscured signals.

LP

Long Pulse

M

MMSI

MOB

MON

MP

Maritime Mobile Service Identity

Man OverBoard

Performance monitor

Medium Pulse

N

nm

NSK

N up

1nm=1852m

North Stabilization Kit

North up

The north is always pointed to the top center of the radar display.

O

Own track

Display function of own ship’s track

P

PI

Past positions

POSN

PRF

PROC

Parallel Index line

Equally time-spaced past position marks of a tracked or AIS target and own ship.

POSitioN

Pulse Repetition Frequency

The number of radar pulses transmitted each second.

PROCess

Radar signal processing function

R

Radar beacon

A navigation aid which responds to the radar transmission by generating a radar signal to identify its position and identity

- xxiv -

Radar cross-section Radar cross-section of a target determines the power density returned to the radar for a particular power density incident on the target

Range Rings

Reference target

A set of concentric circles labeled by distance from CCRP.

A symbol indicating that the associated tracked stationary target is used as a speed reference for the ground stabilization

Relative course

Relative speed

Relative vector

RM

The direction of motion of a target relative to own ship motion

The speed of a target relative to own ship’s speed data

A predicted movement of a target relative to own ship’s motion

Relative Motion

A display on which the position of own ship remains fixed, and all targets move relative to own ship.

RM(R)

RM(T)

ROT

Route

RR

Relative Motion. Relative Trails.

Relative Motion. True Trails.

Rate Of Turn

Change of heading per time unit.

A set of waypoints.

Range Rings

S

SART

Sea stabilization

Sea state

Search And Rescue Transponder

Radar transponder capable of operating in the 9GHz band

A display mode in which speed and course information are referred to the sea.

Status of the sea condition due to the weather environment, expressed as a sea state 0 for flat conditions with minimal wind, to sea state 8 for very rough sea conditions.

SET

Sleeping AIS target A target indicating the presence and orientation of a vessel equipped with AIS in a certain location.

The current direction for manual correction or the current speed on the horizontal axis of the 2-axis log is displayed.

- xxv -

SOG

SP

STAB

STW

TCPA

Test target

TM

Trails

Trial maneuver

True course

True speed

True vector

TT

TTG

TXRX

UTC

Speed Over the Ground

The speed of the ship relative to the earth, measured on board of the ship.

Short Pulse

STABilization

Speed Through Water

The speed of the ship relative to the water surface.

T

Time to Closest Point of Approach to own ship

Radar target of known characteristics used for test requirement

True Motion

A display across which own ship moves with its own true motion.

Tracks displayed by the radar echoes of targets in the form of an afterglow.

A graphical simulation facility used to assist the operator to perform a proposed maneuver for navigation and collision avoidance purposes.

The direction of motion relative to ground or to sea, of a target expressed as an angular displacement from north

The speed of a target relative to ground, or to sea

A vector representing the predicted true motion of a target, showing course and speed with reference to the ground or sea

Target Tracking.

A computer process of observing the sequential changes in the position of a radar target in order to establish its motion. Such a target is a

Tracked Target.

Time To Go.

Time to next waypoint.

Transceiver Unit

U

Universal Time Coordinated.

The international standard of time, kept by atomic clocks around the world.

- xxvi -

VRM

Waypoint

V

Variable Range Marker

An adjustable range ring used to measure the distance to a target.

W

A geographical location on a route indicating a event.

- xxvii -

- xxviii -

GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION

SCREEN DISPLAY AND OPERATION PANEL

BASIC OPERATION

MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING

OPERATION OF TT AND AIS

TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY

SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION

MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

TROUBLESHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE

10

DISPOSAL

11

SPECIFICATION

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

9

10

11

- xxix -

- xxx -

SECTION 1

GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT

COMPOSITION

1.1 FUNCTIONS ................................................. 1-1

1.1.1 Function This System..................... 1-1

1.2 FEATURES ................................................... 1-2

1.3 CONFIGURATION ........................................ 1-4

DRAWINGS............................... 1-5

1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS .............. 1-14

1.1

FUNCTIONS

This equipment is a high-performance radar equipment consisting of a scanner unit, a transmitter-receiver unit and a high resolution color LCD display unit.

1.1.1 Function of This System

The JMA-5200M2 series is a color radar system designed to comply with the international standards of the IMO.

The main functions include:

• sensitivity adjustment

• sea clutter and rain/snow clutter suppression

• interference rejecter

• bearing and range measurement using a cursor, fixed/variable range markers, and electronic bearing line

• own track display

• NAV line and marker displays

• TM (True Motion) presentation

• self-diagnostic facilities

• radar performance monitoring (Performance Monitor)

• TT functions (manual/automatic, target acquisition and tracking, vector and trail displays and alarm displays) (option)

• simple plotter functions (marker and line display, destination/route setting) (option)

1─1

1.2 FEATURES y

1.2

FEATURES

Realization of Easy-to-see Screen with High Resolution

The 15-inch color LCD with high resolution of 1024

× 768 pixels can display radar images of 180 mm or more in diameter. Even short-range targets can also be displayed as high-resolution images.

Target Detection by Latest Signal Processing Technology

The system employs the latest digital signal processing technology to eliminate undesired clutter from the radar video signals that are obtained from the receiver with a wide dynamic range, thus improving the target detection.

Advanced Technology Based TT Functions (Option)

The TT target acquisition and tracking performance is enhanced by the use of the fastest DSP and tracking algorithm. So stable operation in target tracking under clutter is ensured.

• Acquisition and tracking of 30 targets.

• Hazardous conditions are represented by shapes and colors of symbols as well as sounds.

• Tracks of up to 20 target ships can be stored with a maximum of 1,500 points for each of them, and displayed distinguished by using seven different colors.

Overlay of Radar Images, Coastlines, and Own Ship's Track

As well as operator-created NAV lines, the data of coastlines, objects such as buoys, and own ship's tracks/TT tracks/AIS tracks, which is stored on the memory card can be superimpose-displayed with radar images and radar trails in all display modes including the head-up mode.

Use of the optional plotter function enables the creation/display of marks and lines and the settings of waypoints/courses.

Easy Operation with GUI

All the radar functions can be easily controlled by simply using the trackball and two switches to operate the buttons shown on the radar display.

1

1─2

Improved Day/Night Mode

Two types of background colors are available in each Day/Dusk/Night mode (total 4 background colors).

Each background color can be reproduced to be suited for the user’s operating environment by simple key operation. The radar echoes and a variety of graphics can also be represented in different colors, ensuring easy-to-see displays.

Self-diagnostic Program Incorporated

The Self-diagnostic program always monitors all the functions of the system. If any function deteriorates, an alarm message will appear on the radar display and an alarm sounds at the same time. Even when the system is operating, the functionality test can be carried out. (except on some functions)

Performance Monitor (Option)

The radar performance (transmitted output power and receiving sensitivity) can appear on the radar display.

* The PM unit (NJU-85) is needed separately.

Simplified Inter-switch Operation (Option)

If an simplified inter-switch unit (option) is installed, up to two JMA-5200M2 radars can be switched over by performing simple operation.

* An simplified inter-switch connection cable (optional) CFQ-5251 (5m) is required separately.

Various Functions

• RADAR TRAILS (Other ship’s track display)

• TM (True Motion) display

• Head-up/North-up/Course-up display

• Own ship’s track display

• Automatic acquisition and activation area setting function

1─3

1.3 CONFIGURATION

1.3

CONFIGURATION

Scanners and Transmitted Output Powers

SCANNER TYPE

TRANSMITTED

OUTPUT POWER

JMA-5212-4 4 FT SLOT ANTENNA

JMA-5212-6 6 FT SLOT ANTENNA

JMA-5222-7 7 FT SLOT ANTENNA

JMA-5222-9 9 FT SLOT ANTENNA

10 KW

10 KW

25 KW

25 KW

Radar Configuration and Ship’s Mains

BAND

X

X

X

X

RADAR

MODEL

SCANNER

UNIT

PERFORMANCE

MONITOR UNIT

DISPLAY UNIT SHIP’S MAINS

JMA-5212-4 NKE-2103-4 NJU-85 NCD-4380 24

JMA-5212-6 NKE-2103-6 NJU-85 NCD-4380 24

JMA-5222-7 NKE-2254-7 NJU-85 NCD-4380 24

JMA-5222-9 NKE-2254-9 NJU-85 NCD-4380 24

Notes:

1. An optional rectifier NBA-5111 is necessary for using Ship's Mains 100/110/115/200/220/230 VAC.

2. The display system NCD-4380 has a separate structure consisting of the following:

Monitor unit NWZ-164

Processor unit

Keyboard unit

NDC-1460

NCE-7699A

3. The ship with radar of IMO conformity must mount a PM unit. y

1

1─4

1.4

EXTERIOR

Fig. 1.1 Exterior Drawing of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-2103-4

Fig. 1.2 Exterior Drawing of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-2103-6

Fig. 1.3 Exterior Drawing of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-2254-7

Fig. 1.4 Exterior Drawing of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-2254-9

Fig. 1.5 Exterior Drawing of Monitor Unit, Type NWZ-164

Fig. 1.6 Exterior Drawing of Processor Unit, Type NDC-1460

Fig. 1.7 Exterior Drawing of Keyboard Unit, Type NCE-7699A

Fig. 1.8 Exterior Drawing of NSK Unit, Type NCT-4106A

1─5

1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS y

1

Fig. 1.1 Exterior Drawing of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-2103-4

1─6

Fig. 1.2 Exterior Drawing of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-2103-6

1─7

1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS y

1

Fig. 1.3 Exterior Drawing of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-2254-7

1─8

Fig. 1.4 Exterior Drawing of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-2254-9

1─9

1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS y

1

Fig. 1.5 Exterior Drawing of Monitor Unit, Type NWZ-164

1─10

Fig. 1.6 Exterior Drawing of Processor Unit, Type NDC-1460

1─11

1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS y

1

Fig. 1.7 Exterior Drawing of Keyboard Unit, Type NCE-7699A

1─12

Fig. 1.8 Exterior Drawing of NSK Unit, Type NCT-4106A

1─13

1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS

1.5

GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS

Fig. 1.9 General System Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-5212-4/6

Fig. 1.10 General System Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-5222-7/9 y

1

1─14

Fig. 1.9 General System Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-5212-4/6

Note: Install the radar cable as far as from the cables of other radio equipment in order to prevent other radio equipment from interfering with the radar operations. In particular, do not install the antenna cable parallel to the cables of other radio equipment.

1─15

1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS y

J10

J11

NMEA input

AIS/DLog etc.

GPS

JLR-10:CFQ-6934 (Option)

JLR-20/30:CFQ-5469 (Option)

Compass

(NMEA input)

Gyro-Compass (sync/step)

Log (pulse)

DC24V

DC24V

Ship's Main

J9

AUX

(Option)

J2

SCANNER

J3 GPS

VIDEO

J7

KEY-BOARD J4

J5

J1

COMPASS

POWER

AIS

J6

NMEA

(RS-232C)

J8

CFQ-5350

(Option)

NMEA input

AIS/Dlog etc.

PC Plotter

RGB/VDR

AC100/110/115V 50/60Hz

AC200/220/230V 50/60Hz

Fig. 1.10 General System Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-5222-7/9

Note: Install the radar cable as far as from the cables of other radio equipment in order to prevent other radio equipment from interfering with the radar operations. In particular, do not install the antenna cable parallel to the cables of other radio equipment.

1

1─16

1─17

SECTION 2

SCREEN DISPLAY

AND OPERATION PANEL

2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS ....................................... 2-2

2.3 FUNCTIONS SOFTWARE BUTTONS................................................................. 2-7

2.3.1 Software Buttons for Area 1 (Top-Left Corner of the Radar Display) .......... 2-8

2.3.2 Software Buttons for Area 2 (Bottom-Left Corner of the Radar Display).... 2-9

2.3.3 Software Buttons for Area 3 (Top-Right Corner of the Radar Display) ..... 2-10

2.3.4 Software Buttons for Area 4 (Bottom-Right Corner of the Radar Display) 2-12

2.3.5 Software Buttons for Area 5 (Own Ship Information Area)

(Right Side of the Radar Display).................................................................. 2-13

2.3.6 Software Buttons for Area 6 (Other Ship Information Area)

(Right Side of the Radar Display).................................................................. 2-14

2.3.7 Software Buttons for Area 7 (Panel Display Area)

(Right Side of the Radar Display).................................................................. 2-16

2.3.8 Software Buttons for Area 7 (Panel Display Area)

(Right Side of the Radar Display).................................................................. 2-17

2.3.9 Software Buttons for Area 8 (Operation and Message Area)

(Right Side of the Radar Display).................................................................. 2-18

2.1

EXAMPLE OF DISPLAY

2─1

2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS y y

2.2

NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL

PANEL KEYS

2

The following page describe name of buttons.

2─2

Trackball

Use this trackball to move the cursor mark to an arbitrary point. The trackball can be used for setting in each mode.

For example, use it to specify the center of a floating EBL or the off-center position.

→For setting cursor, see section 3.9.3.

[EBL] (Electric Bearing Line) Control

Rotates the bearing of an EBL.

The selected EBL status switches back and forth between “center fixed” and “floating” each time the control is pressed.

→See section 3.5.2.

[VRM] (Variable Range Marker) Control

Changes the range of a VRM.

→See section 3.5.4.

[MULTI] (Multi-function) Control

An item to switch to is shown put in parentheses in the lower left area of the screen. Give a long press of the control to open the setup screen for registering items. Give a long press of the control button again to close this setup screen.

→See section 3.5.18.

Each time you press this control, you can change items registered in the multi-function control function.

[AUTO-RAIN] (Rain/Snow Clutter Suppression) Control

Suppresses the clutter echo from rain or snow.

To heighten a suppressing effect, turn the control clockwise.

The clutter suppression mode switches back and forth between MANUAL and AUTO each time the control is pressed.

→See section 3.4.7.

[AUTO-SEA] (Sea Clutter Suppression) Control

Suppresses the clutter echo from the sea surface.

To heighten a suppressing effect, turn the control clockwise.

The clutter suppression mode switches back and forth between MANUAL and AUTO each time the control is pressed.

→See section 3.4.6.

[GAIN/PL] Sensitivity/Pulse Width) Control

Controls the radar’s receiving sensitivity.

To get higher sensitivity, turn the control clockwise.

To change the transmitter pulse width, press the control.

→For sensitivity, see section 3.4.5.

→For pulse width, see section 3.5.11.

[STBY] (Standby) Key

Use this key to change the power-off state to the power-on state, or the transmission state to the standby state.

To turn off the power, press the

→See section 3.4.2.

[STBY]

key and

[TX/PRF]

key together.

[TX/PRF]

PREHEAT at the upper left of the radar display changes to STANDBY about three minutes after the power is turned on.

Then, press this key to start transmission.

To fine-tune the transmitting repetition frequency, press the key during transmission.

2─3

2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS y y

Use of this function with the interference rejection function heightens an interference suppressing effect.

→See section 3.4.1.

[EBL1] (Electric Bearing Line 1) Key

Use this key to display and select EBL1.

Holding down the key for two seconds or more displays the menu for EBL1 setting.

→See section 3.5.2.

→For EBL1 setting, see section 3.5.3.

[EBL2] (Electric Bearing Line 2) Key

Use this key to display and select EBL2.

Holding down the key for two seconds or more displays the menu for EBL2 setting.

→See section 3.5.2.

→For EBL2 setting, see section 3.5.3.

[ALARM ACK] (Alarm Acknowledgment) Key

Use this key to acknowledge a failure, target’s approach, or collision alarm.

Press the key to stop an audible alarm.

If more than one alarm has occurred, the key needs to be pressed the number of times equivalent to the number of alarms.

→See section 3.3.7.

[PANEL] (Operation Panel Brilliance) Key

Controls the brilliance for the controls and Keys on the operation panel.

The brilliance changes cyclically each time the key is pressed.

→See section 3.3.3.

[MOB] (Marker) Key

A marker is set to the latitude and longitude of the own ship’s position at the point of pressing this key.

For example, use the key to store the own ship’s position at the moment when somebody falls from the ship.

Holding down the key for two seconds or more erases the marker.

→See section 3.5.15.

[ACQ] (Manual Acquisition) Key

Enables the manual TT acquisition mode for the target on which the cursor sits.

→See section 5.2.1.

[TGT CNCL] (Tracking Target Cancel) Key

Cancels the symbol and vector of a target under tracking, and stops tracking the target.

Holding down the key for two seconds or more erases all the acquisitions of TT.

→See section 5.2.2.

[TGT DATA] (Target Data Setup) Key

Use this key to view the numeric data of the TT under tracking or the currently displayed AIS.

→See section 5.2.3.

2

2─4

[FUNC] (Function Call) Key

Calls predefined signal processing setting when pressed.

The selection changes in the following sequence each time the key is pressed:

Function Off

→ Function 1 → Function 2 → Function 3 → Function 4 →

Function Off

Holding down the key for two seconds or more displays the function setting menu.

→See section 3.10.

[USER KEY1] (User Registration 1) Key

Directly displays a pre-registered menu position when pressed.

→See section 3.5.19.

[USER KEY2] (User Registration 2) Key

21

22

23

24

25

26

Directly displays a pre-registered menu position when pressed.

→See section 3.5.19.

[AZI MODE] [1] (Bearing Mode Select/1) Key

Selects the North-up (true bearing), Head-up (relative bearing), or Course-up bearing display mode.

This key serves as the numeric key

→See section 3.5.7.

[1]

during menu operation.

[MAP] [2] (Map Display/2) Key

Selects whether to display charts, shorelines or depth contours on the radar map.

This key serves as the numeric key

[2]

→For displaying charts, see section 3.7.

during menu operation.

[VECT R/T] [3] (Vector Mode/3) Control

Selects the TT vector display mode (true/relative).

This key serves as the numeric key

→See section 5.1.7.

[3]

during menu operation.

[TM/RM] [4] (True Motion/Relative Motion) Key

Switches back and forth between the TM display mode and RM display mode.

This key serves as the numeric key

→See section 3.5.8.

[4]

during menu operation.

[OFF CENT] [5] (Off Center/5) Key

Shifts the own ship’s position within a desired direction (within 66% of the scope’s radius) from the scope’s center to expand the display portion.

This key serves as the numeric key

→See section 3.5.9.

[5]

during menu operation.

[MARK] [6] (Mark/6) Key

Displays a mark at an arbitrary position or erases the mark on the display.

This key serves as the numeric key

→See section 3.5.16.

[6]

during menu operation.

27

[DAY/NIGHT]

Selects a preset color and brilliance of the display screen.

This key serves as the numeric key

→See section 3.3.4.

[7]

during menu operation.

2─5

2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS y y

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

[RR/HL] [8] (Fixed Range Marker/Heading Line Off/8) Key

The ship’s HL (heading line) is erased while this key is held down.

The fixed range marker display switches back and forth between display and non-display each time the key is pressed.

This key serves as the numeric key

[8]

during menu operation.

→For displaying Fixed Range Marker, see section 3.4.9

→For Heading Line Off, see section 3.4.10.

[AZ ALARM] [9] (Guard Zone/9) Key

Sets a guard zone on the radar display.

This key serves as the numeric key

[9]

→See section 3.5.20 and section 3.5.21.

during menu operation.

[TRAILS] [0] (Radar Trails/0) Key

The radar trails time length is switched each time the key is pressed.

This key serves as the numeric key

→See section 3.5.10.

[0]

during menu operation.

[RADAR MENU] (Radar Menu) Key

Displays the radar menu when pressed.

[TT MENU] (TT Menu) Key

Displays the TT menu when pressed.

[RANGE+] (Range Scale +) Key

Expands the observation range scale when pressed.

→See section 3.4.3.

[RANGE-] (Range Scale -) Key

Shrinks the observation range scale when pressed.

→See section 3.4.3.

[VRM1] (Variable Range Marker 1) Key

Use this key to display and select VRM1.

36

Holding down the key for two seconds or more displays the menu for VRM1 setting.

→See section 3.5.4.

[VRM2] (Variable Range Marker 2) Key

Use this key to display and select VRM2.

Holding down the key for two seconds or more displays the menu for VRM2 setting.

→See section 3.5.4.

37

[ENT] (Enter) Key

Use this key to determine menu selection or value input.

Pressing the key has the same effect as left-clicking the trackball.

38

(Clear/Information)

Use this key to cancel menu selection or value input.

Pressing the key has the same effect as right-clicking the trackball

2

2─6

2.3

FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS

This radar provides the software buttons on the display which can be used to set several important functions directly and swiftly from the display without opening the corresponding menu.

The names of buttons are described on the following pages.

By positioning the arrow cursor to a button in the figure above and then clicking the left button of the trackball, the setting can be changed as shown below.

Area 1

(Top-left corner of the radar display)

Area 3

Area 5

(Own ship’s information)

(Other ship’s information)

(Top-right corner of the radar display)

Area 6

Area 2

(Bottom-left corner of the radar display)

Area 4

(Bottom-right corner of the radar display)

Area 7

(Panel display)

Area 8

(Operation/message)

2─7

2.2 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS y y

2.3.1 Software Buttons for Area 1 (Top-Left Corner of the Radar

Display)

-

6

+

Rings 1NM

RM(R) H UP

Off Center

Transmit

X-BAND

Master

320

GND

MP

330

310

①:

Range scale switching

To increase the observation range scale

(maximum 96NM), click + and to reduce the range (minimum 0.125NM), click - .

②:

Range rings display On / Off

The display of range rings are set to On / Off whenever this button is clicked.

When the display is set to On, the interval of the fixed range marker is displayed.

③:

Motion mode true / relative switching

The screen motion mode is switched whenever the button is clicked.

TM (true motion)

⇒ RM (relative motion)

⇒ TM

RM(R) indicates that the radar trails is a relative trail.

RM(T) indicates that the radar trails is a true trail.

④:

Off center switching

If this button is clicked, the cursor is moved, and the [ENT] key is pressed, the ship's position can be moved to the cursor position. The moving range is within 66% of the radius.

If the button is clicked for 2 seconds, the off-center is set to Off and the ship's position is returned to the center of the screen.

⑤:

Transmission / standby switching

At expiration of the pre-heat time after the power is turned on, Preheat changes to Standby .

Standby : Indicates a standby state. If this button is clicked in this state, the equipment is set to a transmission state.

HDG

Compass

340

350

000.0

000

010

Transmit : Indicates a transmission state. If this button is clicked in this state, the equipment is set to a standby state.

⑥:

Interswitch connection change

This button is displayed when the interswitch is connected. This button indicates the connection status of the scanner unit that is connected to the indicator.

If the button is clicked in the transmission standby state, the menu for changing the connection state between the scanner unit and the indicator is displayed. The connection state of the scanner unit and indicator cannot be changed unless the master indicator is in a standby state.

→ Refer to the Interswitch (Optional)

Instruction Manual that is attached for the setting method. This button is not displayed if the interswitch is not connected.

⑦:

Transmission pulse length switching

The transmission pulse length is switched whenever this button is clicked. Three types of pulses are available, short pulse (SP), middle pulse (MP), and long pulse (LP). The pulse length and repetition frequency vary even for the same short pulse, according to the range that is used and it is displayed as SP1 , SP2 .

⑧:

Azimuth display mode switching

The azimuth display is switched whenever this button is clicked.

H Up (Head Up)

⇒ N Up (North Up) ⇒

C Up (Course Up)

⇒ H Up

If the button is clicked for 2 seconds, the GYTO

Setting menu is displayed.

2

2─8

⑨:

Tuning state gauge

⑩:

Stabilization mode display

The tuning state is indicated.

Increased gauge means better tuning, and high quality images will be displayed.

Sea : Stabilization with respect to the water

GND : Stabilization with respect to the ground

2.3.2 Software Buttons for Area 2 (Bottom-Left Corner of the Radar

Display)

x2

IR Low

ENH Level1

PROC Off

FUNC Off

Gain

Sea

Rain

TUNE

230

220

MAN

MAN

Auto

210

Multi

200

(

190

TGT Num

)

1

①:

Double zoom switching

Use this function to enlarge to double the size the display screen of the position specified by the cursor. If this button is clicked, the zoom mode is set. When the cursor is moved to the radar screen and the [ENT] key is pressed, the screen is enlarged to double the size so that the middle of the cursor and the own ship's position is set to the center of the screen. This function cannot be used when the range is 0.125NM.

②:

Interference rejection (IR) mode switching

The interference rejection mode is switched whenever this button is clicked.

IR Off

⇒ IR Low ⇒ IR Medium ⇒

IR High

⇒ IR Off

③:

Target enhance (ENH) mode switching

The target enhance mode is switched whenever this button is clicked.

ENH Off

⇒ ENH Level1 ⇒

ENH Level2

⇒ ENH Level3 ⇒

ENH Off

④:

Radar video processing (PROC) mode switching

The radar video processing mode is switched whenever this button is clicked.

PROC Off

⇒ 3Scan COREL ⇒

4Scan COREL

⇒ 5Scan COREL ⇒

Remain

⇒ Peak Hold ⇒ PROC Off

⑤:

Function (FUNC) mode switching

The function mode is switched whenever this button is clicked.

FUNC Off

⇒ Coast ⇒

Deep Sea

⇒ Fishnet ⇒ Storm ⇒

FUNC Off

If the button is clicked for 2 seconds, the function registration menu (User Function Setting) is opened.

⑥, ⑦, ⑧,

and ⑨:Gain, Sea clutter

suppression (Sea), Rain / snow clutter suppression (Rain), Tune adjustment

Adjust the gain, sea clutter suppression, rain and snow clutter suppression and tune using the track ball.

If the button is clicked on, the adjustment value is shown at the upper-right of the cursor. Make adjustments by moving the track ball to the left and right. Determine the adjustment by pressing the [ENT] key.

2─9

2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS y y

⑩, ⑪, and ⑫:Sea clutter suppression ⑬:

Multi-dial mode switching

(Sea) mode, Rain / snow clutter suppression (Rain) mode, and

Tune mode switching

Use these functions to switch to the manual or automatic mode of sea clutter suppression, rain / snow clutter suppression and tune. The bar on the left side indicates the position of the dial.

The mode is switched to MAN (manual) /

The function that is registered in the multi-dial is switched whenever the button is clicked.

Vector

⇒ Trails ⇒ TGT No. ⇒

Course

⇒ Track ⇒ Mark ⇒

⇒ Tune ⇒ Vector

The switched function is displayed in ( ).

If the button is clicked for 2 seconds, the Multi

Dial Setting menu is opened. If this button is clicked again for 2 seconds, this setting menu is closed.

AUTO (automatic) whenever the button is clicked. If rain / snow clutter suppression is switched to an automatic mode, sea clutter suppression is switched to an automatic mode also.

⑭:

Multi-dial mode

The currently selected multi-dial mode described in ⑬ is displayed.

2.3.3 Software Buttons for Area 3 (Top-Right Corner of the Radar

Display)

② ③

10

Cursor

(

True 089.6

020

030

040

Off

)

35 33.037'

5.37 NM

EBL1

T

140 01.597'E

VRM1

EBL2 T

VRM2

050

045.0

3.00

135.0

6.00

PC

C

N

NM

NM

C

CCRP1

①:

Cursor mode switching

The mode of the function that uses the cursor is switched whenever this button is pressed.

AUTO

⇒ ACQ TT ⇒ ACT AIS ⇒

TGT DATA

⇒ CNCL TT ⇒

DEACT AIS

⇒ CNCL Data ⇒

□ (Mark)

⇒ -------- (Line) ⇒

Property

⇒ AUTO

②:

Cursor mode: mark font / line pattern switching

The currently selected cursor mode is indicated.

When the cursor is in the mark or line mode, use this button to change the mark font pattern or line pattern. If this button is clicked while the cursor mode is □ (mark) or -------- (line), the mark font / line pattern is changed.

③:

Mark color / line color switching

This function switches a mark color / line color. If this button is clicked while the cursor mode is

□ (mark) or -------- (line), the mark color / line color is changed.

④:

Cursor bearing numeric value display true / relative switching

The bearing numeric value display T (true bearing) / R (relative bearing) of the cursor is switched whenever this button is clicked.

⑤, ⑥, ⑦,

and ⑧:EBL1 / 2 and VRM1 /

2 adjustment

These functions set the EBL1 , VRM1 ,

EBL2 , and VRM2 displays to On / Off and acquire the operation right.

If the button is clicked on, the operation right is

2

2─10

acquired. Make adjustments by moving the track ball to the left and right Determine the adjustment by pressing the [ENT] key.

and ⑩:EBL1, EBL2 numeric value

true / relative switching

The EBL1 / 2 bearing numeric value display T

(true bearing) / R (relative bearing) is switched whenever the button is clicked.

If the button is clicked for 2 seconds, the EBL /

Cursor Setting menu is displayed.

and ⑫:EBL1 / EBL2 starting point

mode switching

The EBL starting point is set to CCRP or any position on the radar screen whenever this button is clicked.

⇒ C ⇒ D ⇒

: Center :The starting point is fixed to the CCRP position.

C : Screen Fix :The starting point is set to the cursor position. If the [ENT] key is pressed subsequently, the starting position is fixed to the cursor position.

D : L/L Fix :The starting point is set to the cursor position. If [ENT] key is pressed subsequently, the starting position is fixed to the latitude / longitude of the cursor. (Connection of a navigator is necessary.)

If the starting point is moved outside of the screen, the operation is reset automatically and the starting point returns to the CCRP position.

* D is enabled only when a navigator is connected.

⑬:

Parallel index line setting

This function sets the parallel index line display to

On / Off and acquires the operation right.

If this button is clicked, the operation right is acquired and the menu is opened. After setting, determine the setting by pressing the [ENT] key.

⑭:

Parallel index line starting point mode switching

The parallel index line starting point is set to

CCRP or any position on the radar screen whenever this button is clicked.

In the same way as for the EBL starting point, three options are available, : Center, C :

Screen Fix, and D : L/L Fix.

and ⑯:Distance unit switching for

VRM1 and VRM2

Press the button to change the unit of distance in the order of:

NM → km → sm → NM

2─11

2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS y y

2.3.4 Software Buttons for Area 4 (Bottom-Right Corner of the Radar

Display)

140

Map

Data

Off

MRK 1

MOB

2 3

TRK 30 sec

HL

Off

Shift

CPA

Ring

②:

Own ship's track interval switching

The own ship's track interval is switched whenever this button is clicked.

③:

Own ship's track interval unit switching

The unit of the own ship's track interval is switched whenever this button is clicked.

sec

⇒ min ⇒ NM ⇒ sec

①:

Mark color switching

The color of the mark is switched whenever this button is clicked.

If the button is clicked for 2 seconds, the Mark

Setting menu is opened.

⑥ ⑦

⑦:

CPA ring display On / Off

The CPA ring display is switched to On / Off whenever the button is clicked.

When the target vector display mode is T

(true vector), the CPA ring cannot be set to On.

⑧:

Event mark input

When the event mark button is pressed, an event mark is displayed on the current location of the own ship.

To delete the event mark, set the cursor to the mark mode, move the cursor to the event mark, and press the Delete / Information key.

⑨:

Marker

④:

Map display On / Off

The map display is set to On / Off whenever this button is clicked.

Map information must be inserted in the card slot of the radar process unit in advance.

If the button is clicked for 2 seconds, the Map

Setting menu is opened.

Press the Marker button to place a marker at the current lat/long coordinates of the own ship.

The marker function is used to quickly memorize the location of the own ship when for example someone falls from the ship. The marker will be deleted when the button is held down for 2 seconds.

⑩:

Screenshot function

⑤:

Graphic display Off

While the button is clicked, the graphic display other than VRM, EBL, HL, a cursor, and range rings on the radar screen is cleared temporarily.

When this button is pressed, an image of the current screen can be saved as a bitmap data in the memory card.

Note: The system becomes slower while the screenshot function is in use.

⑥:

Ship's heading line Off

The ship's heading line (HL) display is set to Off while this button is clicked.

Since the ship's heading line is cleared while the button is clicked, the target in the ship's heading bearing can be clearly seen.

⑪:

Map location correction On / Off

Map location correction is activated or deactivated every time this button is pressed.

⑫:

Memory intervals for own ship’s track display

Selects track data memory intervals for own ship.

The setting changes each time the button is pressed.

2

2─12

2.3.5 Software Buttons for Area 5 (Own Ship Information Area) (Right

Side of the Radar Display)

HDG

SPD

COG

SOG

CMPS

GPS

000.0

0.0kn

000.0

0.0

GPS

WGS84

kn

UTC 2007-12-07 05:10

35 33.000'N

139 55.000'E

①:

Speed sensor switching

The speed sensor is switched whenever the button is clicked.

MAN (Manual)

⇒ LOG (Single-axis log) ⇒

2AXW (Double-axes to water)

2AXG (Double-axes to ground)

GPS

⇒ MAN

②:

Time display mode switching

The time display mode UTC (universal time clock) / LMT (local mean time) is switched whenever this button is clicked.

③:

Manual own ship's speed setting

When selection of the speed sensor is set to

MAN , enter the own ship's speed manually.

If this button is clicked, the numeric value input screen is opened. After setting a value, determine the entry by clicking ENT .

2─13

2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS y y

2.3.6 Software Buttons for Area 6 (Other Ship Information Area)

(Right Side of the Radar Display)

③ ⑤ ④ ① ②

Vector

Limit 0.1

PAST POSN

NM

R

R 0.1

9 min

1 min

NM

AIS

Filter

Association

Range

Trails R 10min 09:52

①:

Target vector display true / relative

⑥:

Past position display interval switching

The past position display interval is switched whenever the button is clicked.

switching

The tracked target / AIS target vector display is switched to T (true vector) / R (relative vector) whenever this button is clicked.

This setting is switched together with the past position display true / relative switching.

②:

Target vector length setting

Set a vector length of the tracked target / AIS target.

If this button is clicked, the numeric value input screen is opened. After setting the length, determine the setting by clicking ENT .

③:

CPA limit setting

Set a CPA limit.

If this button is clicked, the numeric value input screen is opened. After setting the limit, determine the setting by clicking ENT .

④:

TCPA limit setting

Set a TCPA limit.

If this button is clicked, the numeric value input screen is opened. After setting the limit, determine the setting by clicking ENT .

⑤:

Past position display true / relative switching

The tracked target / AIS target past position display is switched to T (true past position) /

R (relative past position) whenever the button is clicked.

This setting is switched together with the target vector display true / relative switching.

⑦:

Past position display interval unit switching

The past position display interval unit is switched whenever the button is clicked.

min

⇒ NM ⇒ min

⑧:

AIS On / Off

The AIS display is switched to On / Off whenever the button is clicked.

⑨:

Tracked target symbol display On /

Off

The tracked target symbol display is switched to

On / Off whenever the button is clicked. Use this function to avoid confusion with the AIS symbol.

⑩:

AIS target symbol display On / Off

The AIS target symbol display is switched to On /

Off whenever the button is clicked. Use this function to avoid confusion with the tracked target symbol.

⑪:

Association On / Off

The tracked target / AIS target association is switched to On / Off whenever the button is clicked.

⑫:

AIS filter mode switching

The AIS filter is switched whenever the button is clicked.

Range

⇒ Sector ⇒ Zone ⇒ Range

2

2─14

⑬:

Radar trails display true / relative switching

Radar trails are switched to T (true motion trail) / R (relative motion trail) whenever this button is clicked.

This setting is restricted by the radar display motion mode.

In relative motion display mode (RM), switching to T / R is possible.

In true motion display mode (TM), only T can be set.

⑭:

Radar trails display time switching

The radar trails display time is switched whenever the button is clicked.

If the time does not reach the radar trails time that was set, the remaining time is displayed on the right-hand side.

If the button is clicked for 2 seconds, the RADAR

Trails Setting menu is opened.

2─15

2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS y y

2.3.7 Software Buttons for Area 7 (Panel Display Area) (Right Side of the Radar Display)

AIS ID

DEST

2

ETA

POSN

EPFS

RAIM

POSN Accuracy

AIS ID

BRG

Range

COG

SOG

CPA

TCPA

HDG

ROT

NM kn

NM min

/min

AIS ID

Name

Call SIGN

MMSI

IMO Number

NAV Status

AIS ID

AtoN Real/Virtual

AtoN Type

AIS target information

Information of the selected AIS target can be shown in numerical values.

Only one ship can be selected as an AIS target.

4-page AIS target information is provided.

2─16

2.3.8 Software Buttons for Area 7 (Panel Display Area) (Right Side of the Radar Display)

TT ID

BRG

Range

Cource

Speed

CPA

TCPA

BCR

BCT

BCR

BCT

NM

Tracked target information

Information of the selected tracked target can be shown in numerical values.

Two ships can be selected as tracked targets.

kn

NM min

NM min

NM min

2─17

2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS y y

2.3.9 Software Buttons for Area 8 (Operation and Message Area)

(Right Side of the Radar Display)

< Brilliance

Panel VID TT

<

Target

Plot

Menu

RADAR

Test

No Alarm

①:

Exit button

Click this button to exit the menu screen.

②:

Main menu / Radar menu

Single-click this button to call up Main Menu.

Double-click this button to call up Radar Menu.

③:

TT menu (target menu)

Click this button to call up TT Menu.

④:

Plotter menu

Click this button to call up Plot (Plotter) Menu.

⑤:

Map menu

Click this button to call up Map Setting.

⑥:

Test menu

Click this button to call up Test Menu.

⑦:

Screen switch

Click this button to switch the screen between the brilliance adjustment screen and the screen information setting screen.

⑧:

Panel brightness setting

Brightness of the operation panel can be changed.

Click this button to adjust brightness. It can be set in 5 levels.

⑨:

Radar image brightness setting

Brightness of the radar image (echo) can be adjusted.

Click this button to change brightness. It can be set in 4 levels.

Day1

>

TT

Display

>

⑩:

Tracked target / AIS target brightness setting

Brightness of the tracked target / AIS target can be adjusted.

Click this button to adjust brightness. It can be set in 5 levels.

⑪:

Day/Night mode switch

Click this button to change the day/night mode in the following order:

Day1 ⇒ Day2 ⇒ Dusk ⇒ Night ⇒ Day1

⑫:

User map menu

Click this button to call up a menu screen for loading a map created by a user.

⑬:

User setting menu

Click this button to call up a menu screen for loading the user setting.

⑭:

Alarm display

Click this button to stop the alarm buzzer and the flashing of the alarm display.

When multiple alarms go off simultaneously, the alarm that must be acknowledged first is indicated.

The top line shows an alarm to be acknowledged by clicking.

The bottom line shows the current alarms one by one.

2

2─18

2─19

SECTION 3

BASIC OPERATION

3.1.1 Power ON and Start the System ...................................................... 3-2

3.1.2 Observe

3.1.3

3.1.4

Acquire and Measure Data ............................................................... 3-3

End the Operation and Stop the System......................................... 3-4

3.2.1

3.2.2

Overview of Menu Structure ............................................................ 3-5

Basic Menu Operation ...................................................................... 3-6

3.3 PREPARATION ............................................................................................. 3-8

3.3.1 Adjust Display Brilliance [BRILL] .................................................... 3-8

3.3.3

3.3.4

3.3.5

3.3.6

3.3.7

3.3.8

Adjust Operation Panel Brilliance [PANEL] .................................... 3-9

Switch Day/Night Mode [DAY/NIGHT].............................................. 3-9

Adjust Brilliance of Information on Radar Display (Brilliance

Setting)............................................................................................. 3-10

Adjust Sound Volume (Buzzer Volume) ........................................ 3-11

Reset Alarm Buzzer [ALARM ACK]................................................ 3-11

Set Display Color ............................................................................ 3-12

3.4.1

3.4.2

Start Transmission [TX/PRF].......................................................... 3-14

Stop Transmission [STBY] ............................................................. 3-14

3.4.3 Change Range (Observation Range Scale) [RANGE+/-].............. 3-14

3.4.4 Tune.................................................................................................. 3-15

3.4.6

3.4.7

3.4.8

3.4.9

Suppress Sea Clutter [AUTO-SEA]................................................ 3-17

Suppress Rain/Snow Clutter [AUTO-RAIN] .................................. 3-19

Reject Radar Interference [IR]........................................................ 3-21

Hide/Display Range Rings (RINGS)............................................... 3-22

3.4.10 Hide Ship’s Heading Line (HL OFF)............................................... 3-22

3.4.11 Hide Graphics Information on Radar Display (Graphic Display) 3-23

3.5.1

3.5.2

3.5.3

3.5.4

3.5.5

3.5.6

3.5.7

3.5.8

3.5.9

Move Cross Cursor Mark by Trackball .......................................... 3-24

Use EBLs (Electronic Bearing Lines) [EBL1/2] ............................ 3-25

Set EBL Operation (EBL1 /2 Setting)............................................. 3-28

Display Variable Range Markers [VRM1/VRM2]............................ 3-31

Display Parallel Cursors (Parallel Cursor) .................................... 3-34

Display Parallel Index Lines (Parallel Index Line) ........................ 3-41

Switch Bearing Display Mode [AZI MODE] ................................... 3-48

Switch True/Relative Motion Display Mode [TM/RM] ................... 3-49

Move Own Ship's Display Position [OFF CENT] .......................... 3-50

3.5.10 Display Other Ships’ Trails [TRAILS]............................................. 3-51

3.5.11 Switch Pulse Length (GAIN/PL) ..................................................... 3-54

3.5.12 Expand Targets (Target Enhance).................................................. 3-55

3.5.13 Use Video Process (Process) ........................................................ 3-56

3.5.14 Zoom................................................................................................ 3-57

3.5.15 Use Marker [MOB]........................................................................... 3-58

[MARK].............................................................................. 3-59

3.5.17 Operate EBL Maneuver Function (EBL Maneuver) ...................... 3-60

3.5.19 Operate User Key Switches [User Key 1/2] .................................. 3-64

3.5.20 Automatic

3.5.21 Radar

3.6 USE OWN SHIP’S TRACK DATA............................................................... 3-74

3.6.1 Display Own Ship’s Track (Display Own Track) ........................... 3-74

3.6.2

3.6.3

3.6.4

Set Own Ship’s Track Data Storage Interval (Own Track Interval)3-76

Cancel Storing of Own Ship’s Track Data (Own Track Memory). 3-77

Clear Own Ship’s Track Data (Clear Own Track).......................... 3-78

3.7.1

3.7.2

3.7.3

3.7.4

Insert/Remove a Card..................................................................... 3-79

Display Coastline ROM Card Produced by JRC........................... 3-81

Display ERC Card ........................................................................... 3-82

Fill Charts (Fill Land Area) ............................................................. 3-83

3.8 DISPLAY NAVIGATION INFORMATION (NAV INFORMATION DISPLAY) 3-84

3.8.1 Display Waypoint Marks (Waypoint Display)................................ 3-84

3.8.2

3.8.3

3.8.4

3.8.5

Display Navigation Information (NAV Display Setting) ............... 3-85

Create/Edit Navigation Information (Edit User Map).................... 3-86

Set Navigation Information (User Map Setting) ........................... 3-92

Set and Display Geodetic System ................................................. 3-99

3.9.1

3.9.2

3.9.3

3.9.4

3.9.5

Set Radar Signal Processing (Process Setting) ........................ 3-101

Set Radar Trails (RADAR Trails Setting)..................................... 3-104

Set Cursor (Cursor Setting) ......................................................... 3-108

Set Screen(Screen Setting).......................................................... 3-109

Set Scanner (TXRX Setting)......................................................... 3-115

3.9.6 Set Chart Display (Map Setting) .................................................. 3-117

3.9.7

3.10 USE

Set LORAN C (LORAN C Correction) .......................................... 3-128

3.10.3

3.11.1

Overview of Function Operations ............................................... 3-131

3.10.4 Overview of Stored Function Setting Data ................................. 3-134

3.10.5 Personal Information (PIN Setting) ............................................. 3-135

Save in and Transfer to Card (MEM CAPA/Copy)....................... 3-139

3.1

FLOW

Attention z

Do not put anything on the operation panel.

If you put anything hot on it, it may be deformed.

z

Do not give any impact to the operation panel,

trackball, or controls.

Otherwise, any failure or damage may result.

POWER ON AND

START THE SYSTEM

OBSERVE AND

ADJUST VIDEO

ACQUIRE AND

MEASURE DATA

Each operation is described in detail below.

END THE OPERATION AND

STOP THE SYSTEM

3─1

3.1 FLOW OPERATION y y y

3.1.1 Power ON and Start the System

Caution

A malfunction may occur if the power in the ship is instantaneously interrupted during operation of the radar. In this case, the power should be turned on again.

Attention z Wait for about 2 seconds before turning on the

power again.

z Immediately after the radar is installed, at start of the

system after it has not been used for a long time, or after the magnetron is replaced, preheat the equipment in the standby state for 20 to 30 minutes before setting it into the transmit state.

z If the preheating time is short, the magnetron

causes sparks, resulting in its unstable oscillation.

Start transmission on a short-pulse range and change the range to the longer pulse ranges in turn.

If the transmission is unstable in the meantime, immediately place the system back into the standby state and maintain it in the standby state for 5 to 10 minutes before restarting the operation.

Repeat these steps until the operation is stabilized.

3

3─2

Procedure 1 Check that the ship’s mains are turned on.

2 Press [STBY] key.

The system is turned on, and the preheating time is displayed.

PREHEAT is indicated at the upper left of the radar display.

3 Wait until the preheating time is over.

When the preheating time is over, the preheating time screen disappears, and PREHEAT at the upper left of the radar display changes to STANDBY .

4 Press [TX/PRF] key.

The radar will start transmission and the antenna will start rotating.

STANDBY at the upper left of the radar display changes to TRANSMIT .

Note: The radar does not start transmission if you press [TX/PRF] key while PREHEAT is indicated.

3.1.2 Observe and Adjust Video

Procedure 1 Press [RANGE+] key or [RANGE-] key to set the range to the scale required for target observation.

2 Turn the controls [AUTO-GAIN], [AUTO-SEA], and [RAIN] to obtain the clearest targets.

Refer to

[GAIN]→Section 3.4.5 “Control Sensitivity [GAIN/PL]”

[SEA]→Section 3.4.6 “Suppress Sea Clutter [AUTO-SEA]”

[RAIN]→Section 3.4.7 “Suppress Rain/Snow Clutter [AUTO-RAIN]” for how to use each control.

3.1.3 Acquire and Measure Data

For details on data acquisition and measurement, refer to Section 3.4 “BASIC OPERATIONS” and Section 4

“MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING.”

3─3

3.1 FLOW OPERATION y y y

3.1.4 End the Operation and Stop the System

Exit 1 Press [STBY] key.

The radar will stop transmission and the antenna will stop rotating.

TRANSMIT at the upper left of the radar display changes to STANDBY .

Maintain the standby state if radar observation is restarted in a relatively short time.

Only pressing the [TX/PRF] key starts observation.

2 Press the [STBY] key and the [TX/PRF] key together.

The system will be turned off.

Warning

3

Before staring maintenance work, make sure to completely shut off the electrical supply to the equipment by turning off the equipment power and shutting down the breaker for the indicator processor.

Some equipment components can carry electrical current even after the power switch is turned off, and conducting maintenance work without unplugging the power connector may result in electrocution, equipment failure, or accidents.

3─4

3.2

MENU

The Menu system of this radar equipment consists of the main menu and the submenus up to the lower 2 levels.

You can jump to each menu by pressing the menu button at the lower right of the radar display or the switch on the operation panel.

3.2.1 Overview of Menu Structure

Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [RADAR MENU] key or [9]. Press [8].

Use the RADAR Menu to change the settings of signal processing functions, use the Main Menu to change the settings of other detailed information, and use the Radar Submenus to change the less frequently used settings or run the system’s self-diagnostic program.

3─5

3.2 MENU COMPOSITION y y y

3.2.2 Basic Menu Operation

To open the menu:

Press [RADAR MENU] key.

To close the menu:

Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Alternatively, hold down [0] key until the menu closes.

* Software button ② located at the operation/message area in Section 2.3.9 also available to switch between ON and OFF.

To move to a lower level of the menu:

The menu is in hierarchical structure. Press the numeric keys [1]-[9] corresponding to the desired menu item number. Control will move to the lower level.

Alternatively, place the cursor over the item and then press [ENT] key.

> is shown at the right end of a menu item having a lower level.

To move to a higher level of the menu:

Press [0] key while the menu is open. Control will return to the higher level from the lower level.

Alternatively, place the cursor over the 0.EXIT item and then press [ENT] key.

To determine an item:

Press the numeric keys [1]-[9] corresponding to the desired item number. The selected item will be displayed. Alternatively, place the cursor over the item you want to change, and then press [ENT] key.

To determine the selected item:

Press the numeric keys [1]-[9] corresponding to the selected item number. Alternatively, place the cursor over the selected item and then press [ENT] key. If you do not change the setting of the selected item, press [CLR/INFO] key.

3

3─6

Menu Operation with the Trackball

The menu items are software buttons that can be operated with the trackball.

An item can be selected by pointing the trackball cursor to the item and pressing [ENT] key, instead of using the numeric key.

Example of menu display

Item number

Software button

The selected item is displayed by pressing the corresponding numeric key.

An item can be selected by pressing the corresponding numeric key.

An item can also be selected by the trackball and by pressing [ENT] key.

An item can also be selected by pointing the trackball cursor to the item and pressing [ENT] key.

Press [8] key to move to the lower level. Movement to the lower level can also be done by pointing the trackball cursor to the item and pressing [ENT] key.

Press [0] key move to the higher level.

Movement to the higher level can also be done by pointing the trackball cursor to 0.EXIT and pressing [ENT] key.

3─7

3.3 PREPARATION y y y

3.3

PREPARATION

3.3.1 Adjust Display Brilliance [BRILL]

Procedure 1 Obtain the best-to-see display with optimum brilliance by turning the

[BRILL] control at the lower right of the display unit.

Turning the [BRILL] control clockwise increases the brilliance of the entire display.

Conversely, turning the [BRILL] control counterclockwise decreases the brilliance of the entire display.

In consideration of the ambient brightness, adjust display brilliance that is high enough to easily observe the radar display but does not glare.

3.3.2 Adjust Contrast

Adjust the contrast of the radar video display.

Procedure

1 Point the trackball to the VID button (software button located at

the operation/message area in Section 2.3.9) at the lower right of the radar display, press [ENT] key, and then make adjustment to obtain the best-to-see video.

Point the trackball to the VID button at the lower right of the radar display and then press [ENT] key to adjust the contrast of the radar video display at four levels.

Each time the VID button is clicked, the contrast level changes in the following sequence:

Adjust the VID button to obtain the best-to-see video with optimum contrast.

3

3─8

3.3.3 Adjust Operation Panel Brilliance [PANEL]

Brilliance of the operational panel can be adjusted in accordance with the ambient illuminance conditions.

Procedure 1 Press [PANEL] key to adjust the brilliance of the operation panel light.

Brilliance increases as the [PANEL] key is pressed. When it reaches the highest level, it returns to the lowest level.

In consideration of the ambient brightness, adjust panel brilliance that is high enough to read the characters on the operation panel but does not glare.

The [PANEL] key lamp lights up irrespective of panel brilliance adjustment.

* Software button ⑧ located at the operation/message area in Section 2.3.9 is also available for switching.

3.3.4 Switch Day/Night Mode [DAY/NIGHT]

Display color arrangement can be easily changed using combinations of colors and brilliance in accordance with the ambient illuminance conditions.

The day/night mode changes in the following sequence each time the [DAY/NIGHT] key is pressed:

DAY1

→ DAY2 → DUSK → NIGHT

The current mode is indicated at the lower right of the radar display.

The brilliance level in accordance with the selected mode is saved. For brilliance adjustment, refer to next page. For day/night mode switching, refer to Section 3.3.8 “Set Display Color.”

* Software button ⑪ located at the operation/message area in Section 2.3.9 is also available for switching.

3─9

3.3 PREPARATION y y y

3.3.5 Adjust Brilliance of Information on Radar Display

(Brilliance Setting)

Brilliance can be adjusted for each item of information on the radar display by operating the menu.

RADAR Video

Adjusts the brilliance of radar echoes.

RADAR Trails

TT/AIS

Adjusts the brilliance of radar trails.

Adjusts the brilliance of TT symbols and AIS symbols.

FIX Marker

EBL/VRM

Adjusts the brilliance of fixed range markers.

Adjusts the brilliance of variable range markers (VRM1 and VRM2) and electronic bearing lines (EBL1 and EBL2).

Character

Panel

Adjusts the brilliance of characters.

Adjusts the brilliance of operation panel.

Own Ship

Adjusts the brilliance of the own ship symbol.

Procedure

Exit

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [4] key.

Press [2] key.

The Brilliance Setting Menu will appear.

2 Select the item for which brilliance is to be adjusted, pressing the numeric keys

[1] to [8].

The pull-down menu will appear showing the

3 Select the brilliance level number to be set, pressing the numeric key.

brilliance levels.

The selected brilliance level will be set.

To change the setting of another item, repeat steps 2 and 3.

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The menu will be closed.

Note: The brilliance levels set here are saved in accordance with the day/night mode.

3

3─10

3.3.6 Adjust Sound Volume (Buzzer Volume)

When an alarm goes off, the operation panel of the equipment produces a sound to notify users of state changes.

Adjust the sound volume as follows:

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key twice.

Press [8] key.

The RADAR Sub Menu will appear.

Exit

2 Press [5] key to select Buzzer Volume.

The pull-down menu will appear showing the volume levels.

3 Select the volume level number to be set, pressing the numeric keys [1] to

[5].

The selected volume level will be set.

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The menu will be closed.

3.3.7 Reset Alarm Buzzer [ALARM ACK]

When an audible alarm is issued, use ALARM ACK to acknowledge the alarm information, stop the alarm buzzing, and stop the alarm lamp flashing. (If more than one alarm has occurred, press the switch for each alarm indication.) The alarm stops buzzing, but the alarm indication does not disappear.

Procedure 1 Press [ALARM ACK] key.

The alarm will stop buzzing.

* Software button ⑭ located at the operation/message area in Section 2.3.9 is also available to stop buzzing the alarm.

3─11

3.3 PREPARATION y y y

3.3.8 Set Display Color

For each day/night mode, set the colors of the background outside the bearing scale, the background inside the bearing scale, characters, radar echoes, and radar trails.

Color Adjustment by Menu Operation

Day/Night

Own Ship

Outer PPI

Inner PPI

Registers the switching of a day/night mode.

Adjust the colors of the ship's heading marker, own ship symbol, and a vector of the own ship.

Adjusts the background color outside the bearing scale.

Adjusts the background color inside the bearing scale.

Character

RADAR Echo

Adjusts the colors of characters and bearing scales.

Adjusts the colors of radar echoes.

RADAR Trails

TT/AIS

Adjusts the colors of radar trails.

Time:

Display interval time is selected.

All:

Continuous display

Adjusts the colors of TT symbols, AIS symbols.

Selecting a Day/Night Mode (Day/Night)

Procedure

Select the mode for which color setting is to be changed.

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [4] key.

Press [1] key.

The Display Color Setting Menu will appear.

2 Press [1] key.

The Day/Night mode selection screen will appear.

3 Select the mode number for color adjustment, pressing the numeric keys

[1] to [4].

The mode will be selected.

3

3─12

Setting Colors of Items

Set the display color of each item.

Procedure 1 While the Display Color Setting Menu is open, select the item number for color setting, pressing the numeric keys [3] to [9].

The color selection screen will appear.

2. Own Ship:

Adjust the colors of the ship's heading marker, own ship symbol, and a vector of the own ship.

3. Outer PPI:

Adjusts the background color outside the bearing scale.

4. Inner PPI:

5. Character:

Adjusts the background color inside the bearing scale.

Adjusts the colors of characters and bearing scales.

6. RADAR Echo:

Adjusts the colors of radar echoes.

7. 8. RADAR Trails:

Adjusts the colors of radar trails.

Time:

Display interval time is selected.

All:

Continuous display

9. TT/AIS:

Exit

Adjusts the colors of TT, and AIS.

2 Select the color number to be set, pressing the numeric key.

The selected color will be set.

To set more than one color, repeat steps 1 and 2.

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The menu will be closed.

3─13

3.4 BASIC OPERATIONS y y y

3.4

BASIC

3.4.1 Start Transmission [TX/PRF]

Procedure 1 Press [TX/PRF] key.

The radar will start transmission and the antenna will start rotating.

The indication STANDBY at the upper left of the radar display changes to

TRANSMIT .

Note: The radar does not start transmission if you press [TX/PRF] key while PREHEAT is indicated.

3.4.2 Stop Transmission [STBY]

Procedure 1 Press [STBY] key.

The radar will stop transmission and the antenna will stop rotating.

The indication TRANSMIT at the upper left of the radar display changes to

STANDBY .

* Software button ⑤ located at the top left corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.1 is also available to start/stop transmission.

3.4.3 Change Range (Observation Range Scale) [RANGE+/-]

Procedure 1 Press the [RANGE +] key to expand the observation range.

A larger observation range allows observation of a wider area.

However, objects are shown smaller as the range expands, and objects near own ship are less likely to be detected. Therefore, use a lower-level observation range to observe the area around own ship.

2 Press the [RANGE -] key to reduce the observation range.

Area around own ship can be observed in detail as the observation range is reduced.

Note, however, distant images cannot be displayed.

* Software button ① located at the top left corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.1 is also available to switch the range.

3

3─14

3.4.4 Tune

Caution

Always use the automatic tuning mode.

Use the manual tuning mode only when the automatic tuning mode does not provide the best tuning state due to deterioration of magnetron for example.

There are automatic tuning mode and manual tuning mode. In the automatic tuning mode, transmission and receiving frequencies are tuned and adjusted automatically. In the manual tuning mode, tuning is carried out using the dial on the operation panel. The currently selected mode is indicated on the tune mode button

(software button ⑫ located at the bottom left corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.2).

Using the automatic tuning mode

Procedure

1 Move the cursor to the Tune mode button (software button located at

the bottom left corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.2) and press the [ENT] key.

Automatic tuning mode is activated, and AUTO is displayed on the Tune mode button.

The equipment carries out tuning automatically. Tuning is adjusted when transmission starts, the observation range is changed, or when the pulse width is changed. Tuning takes only a few seconds.

Using the manual tuning mode

Procedure

1 Move the cursor to the Tune mode button (software button located at

the bottom left corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.2), press the [ENT] key, and set the mode to the manual tuning mode.

Automatic tuning mode is cancelled, and MAN is displayed on the Tune mode button.

2 Turn the [MULTI] dial to set the dial mode to (Tune) .

The multi-dial mode button (⑭ located at the bottom left corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.2) shows (Tune) .

3 Turn the [MULTI] dial to adjust tuning.

Turn the dial until the tuning state gauge (⑨ located at the top left corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.1) reaches maximum.

3─15

3.4 BASIC OPERATIONS y y y

3.4.5 Control Sensitivity [GAIN/PL]

Procedure

Caution

If sensitivity is set too high, unnecessary signals such as noises in the receiver and false echoes increase to lower target visibility.

At the same time, if sensitivity is set too low, detection of targets such as ships and dangerous objects may be hindered.

Therefore, sensitivity must always be set to an optimal level.

1 Control noise on the radar display by turning the [GAIN/PL] control until targets can be easily observed.

Turning [GAIN/PL] control clockwise increases sensitivity.

Turning [GAIN/PL] control counterclockwise decreases sensitivity.

Turning the [GAIN/PL] control clockwise increases receiving sensitivity and extends the radar observation range. If the sensitivity is too high, the receiver noise increases reducing the contrast between the targets and the background video. As a result, the targets become obscure on the radar display.

To observe densely crowded targets or short-range targets, turn the [GAIN/PL] control counterclockwise to reduce the sensitivity so that the targets are easy to observe. However, be careful not to overlook important small targets.

3

3─16

3.4.6 Suppress Sea Clutter [AUTO-SEA]

Caution

When using the [AUTO SEA] function, never set the suppression level too high canceling out all image noises from the sea surface at close range.

Detection of not only echoes from waves but also targets such as other ships or dangerous objects will become inhibited.

When using the [AUTO SEA] function, make sure to choose the most appropriate image noise suppression level.

When using the manual sea clutter suppression function

Procedure 1 Control the sea clutter returns on the radar display by turning the

[AUTO-SEA] control until targets can be easily observed.

Turning [AUTO-SEA] control clockwise suppresses sea clutter returns.

Turning [AUTO-SEA] control counterclockwise intensifies sea clutter returns.

The sea clutter suppression function suppresses sea clutter returns by decreasing the receiving sensitivity on a short range.

Turning the [AUTO-SEA] control clockwise heightens the effect of sea clutter suppression.

However, be careful that excessive suppression causes low signal-strength targets such as buoys and boats to disappear from the radar display.

Using AUTO SEA (automatic sea clutter suppression function)

Sea clutter suppression can be performed in accordance with the level of sea clutter. Use this

Procedure

function when the clutter level changes with the direction.

1 Press the [AUTO-SEA] control.

AUTO SEA is selected, and SEA AUTO is indicated at the lower left of the radar display. If AUTO SEA is selected, rotating the AUTO RAIN control and AUTO SEA control can make fine adjustments manually.

Note: When AUTO SEA is selected, AUTO RAIN is switched to the manual mode.

AUTO SEA and AUTO RAIN cannot be selected at the same time.

Use the AUTO RAIN mode to set both the AUTO SEA and AUTO RAIN to automatic mode simultaneously.

3─17

3.4 BASIC OPERATIONS y y y

Cancellation 1 Press the [AUTO-SEA] control.

AUTO SEA is deselected, SEA AUTO at the lower left of the radar display changes to

SEA MAN , and AUTO SEA is cancelled.

* Software button ⑩ located at the bottom left corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.2 is also available to switch AUTO/MANUAL.

3

3─18

3.4.7 Suppress Rain/Snow Clutter [AUTO-RAIN]

Caution

When using the [AUTO RAIN] function, never set the suppression level too high canceling out all image noises from the rain or snow at the close range.

Detection of not only echoes from the rain or snow but also targets such as other ships or dangerous objects will become inhibited.

When using the [AUTO RAIN] function, make sure to choose the most appropriate image noise suppression level.

When using the manual rain/snow clutter suppression function

Procedure 1 Control the rain/snow clutter returns on the radar display by turning the

[AUTO-RAIN] control until targets can be easily observed.

Turning [AUTO-RAIN] control clockwise suppresses rain/snow clutter returns.

Turning [AUTO-RAIN] control counterclockwise intensifies rain/snow clutter returns.

When the [AUTO-RAIN] control is turned clockwise, the rain/snow clutter suppression function suppresses rain/snow clutter returns and gets targets hidden by rain/snow clutter returns to appear on the radar display. However, be careful that excessive suppression may cause small targets to be overlooked. Since the rain/snow clutter suppression function also has the effect of suppressing sea clutter, the suppression efficiency improves when the

[AUTO-RAIN] control is used with the [AUTO-SEA] control. In general, turn the

[AUTO-RAIN] control fully to the left.

Using AUTO RAIN (automatic rain/snow clutter suppression function):

Procedure

Rain/snow clutter suppression can be performed in accordance with the level of rain/snow clutter. Use this function when the clutter level changes with the direction.

1 Press the [AUTO-RAIN] control.

AUTO RAIN is selected, and RAIN AUTO is indicated at the lower left of the radar display. Rotating the AUTO RAIN control and AUTO SEA control can make fine adjustments manually.

Note: When AUTO RAIN is selected, AUTO SEA is switched to the manual mode.

AUTO SEA and AUTO RAIN cannot be selected at the same time.

Use the AUTO RAIN mode to set both the AUTO SEA and AUTO RAIN to automatic mode simultaneously.

3─19

3.4 BASIC OPERATIONS y y y

Cancellation 1

the [AUTO-RAIN] control.

AUTO RAIN is deselected, RAIN AUTO at the lower left of the radar display changes to RAIN MAN , and AUTO RAIN is cancelled.

* Software button ⑪ located at the bottom left corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.2 is also available to switch AUTO/MANUAL.

3

3─20

3.4.8 Reject Radar Interference [IR]

Use this function to eliminate interference waves from other radars. z When viewing a radar beacon or SART signal, select

Attention

IR OFF (Interference Rejector OFF) because IR processing suppresses the video.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key twice.

Radar Menu will appear.

2 Press [1] key.

The IR Menu will appear.

3 Select the level number to be set, pressing the numeric keys [1] to [4].

The selected level will be set.

Rejection levels of the interference rejector

IR OFF:

IR LOW:

Interference rejector off

Interference rejection level - low

IR MEDIUM: Interference rejection level - moderate

IR HIGH: Interference rejection level - high

When a high interference rejection level is selected, the radar’s ability of detecting small targets such as buoys and small boats lowers.

In general, [IR LOW] should be selected.

* Software button ① located at the bottom left corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.2 is also available to switch IR settings.

3─21

3.4 BASIC OPERATIONS y y y

3.4.9 Hide/Display Range Rings (RINGS)

Procedure 1 Press [RR/HL] key.

The range rings display switches back and forth between display and non-display each time [RR/HL] key is pressed.

The scale unit is shown on the Range rings display On / Off button (software button ② located at the top left corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.1).

Assess the distance to the target based on the location of the target on the range ring scale.

Refer to Section 3.3.5 “Adjust Brilliance of Information on Radar Display (Brilliance

Setting)” for how to change the brilliance of range rings.

* Software button ② located at the top left corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.1 is also available to switch between ON and OFF.

3.4.10 Hide Ship’s Heading Line (HL OFF)

Procedure 1 Hold down [RR/HL] key.

The ship’s heading line is hidden while [RR/HL] key is held down.

The ship’s heading line (HL) that presents the course of own ship is always shown on the radar display. The heading line is hidden while [RR/HL] key is held down, so the targets on the heading line can be easily observed.

* Software button ② located at the top left corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.1 is also available to switch between ON and OFF.

3

3─22

3.4.11 Hide Graphics Information on Radar Display (Graphic Display)

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The Main Menu will appear.

2 Press [8] key.

The setting of Graphic Display will be changed to ON .

Graphics information other than VRMs, EBLs, HL, cross cursor mark, and range rings on the radar display is temporarily hidden.

Cancellation 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The Main Menu will appear.

2 Press [8] key.

The setting of Graphic Display will be changed back to OFF .

Temporarily hidden graphics information is displayed again.

Various graphics information such as TT/AIS symbols, NAV lines, and MAP information is shown on the radar display of this system, and may make it difficult to view the radar video.

In this case, use this function to temporarily hide unnecessary graphics information.

3─23

3.5 GENERAL OPERATIONS y y y

3.5

GENERAL

3.5.1 Move Cross Cursor Mark by Trackball

The cross cursor mark + is used for position designation and other purposes in various operating procedures. The cross cursor mark + moves in coupling with the trackball. If the trackball is rotated up and down or right and left, the cross cursor mark follows the move of the trackball.

Operators must be familiar with trackball operation before running the system.

Operation inside Radar Video PPI

The cross cursor mark as shown at right is displayed inside the radar video PPI.

1) The distance and bearing between own ship and the cross cursor mark + , and the degrees of latitude and longitude are indicated at the upper right of the radar display.

2) When moving the current center position, use the cross cursor mark to designate a new center position.

3) Use the cross cursor mark to create marks and lines.

4) When the TT function is installed as an option, use the cross cursor mark to acquire targets in manual mode.

Operation outside Radar Video PPI

As shown at right, the cursor mark changes into the pointer outside the radar video PPI.

1) Use the pointer to operate software buttons.

2) Use the pointer to select menu items.

* The EBL/VRL dial is available for operating the cursor mark. Pressing the EBL dial for two seconds can perform switching to the trackball operation. For details, refer to Section 3.9.3 “Set Cursor (Cursor

Setting).”

3

3─24

3.5.2 Use EBLs (Electronic Bearing Lines) [EBL1/2]

EBLs (Electronic Bearing Lines) are indispensable to the measurement of bearings.

Operators must be familiar with the operation of EBLs beforehand.

EBL1 Operation

If EBL2 is selected or EBL1 is not displayed, press [EBL1] key to select EBL1 before starting operation.

(The currently selected EBL is shown in reverse video at the lower right of the radar display.)

Procedure 1 Press [EBL1] key.

EBL1 at the lower right of the radar display will be shown in reverse video, and EBL1 becomes operable.

2 Press [EBL1] key again.

The EBL1 display will disappear.

* Software button ⑤ located at the top right corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.3 is also available to switch EBL1 between ON and OFF.

EBL2 Operation

If EBL1 is selected or EBL2 is not displayed, press [EBL2] key to select EBL2 before starting operation.

(The currently selected EBL is shown in reverse video at the lower right of the radar display.)

Procedure 1 Press [EBL2] key.

2 Press [EBL2] key again.

EBL2 at the lower right of the radar display will be shown in reverse video, and EBL2 becomes operable.

The EBL2 display will disappear.

* Software button ⑦ located at the top right corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.3 is also available to switch EBL2 between ON and OFF.

Operation procedures are described on the following pages. For how to measure distance and bearing, see Section 4.

3─25

3.5 GENERAL OPERATIONS y y y

EBL Bearing Display

The bearing values of EBL1 and EBL2 currently displayed on the PPI are indicated at the upper right of the radar display.

The currently operable EBL1 or EBL2 is shown in reverse video beside the bearing value.

Starting Point of EBL

The starting point of the currently operating EBL can be switched from the center of the radar display

(Floating Off) to any floating position.

Note: The floating position of the EBL’s starting point can be fixed on the radar display or at specific latitude and longitude. (For details, refer to Section 3.5.3 [III] “Setting the mode to move the starting point of EBL1 (EBL1 Floating).”)

[I] Floating the starting point of EBL1 while EBL1 is operating:

Procedure 1 Press the [EBL] control.

The indicator on the right hand side of the EBL value at the top right corner of the screen shows C , and the EBL starting point is fixed on the screen (Screen Fix).

* If the indicator does not show C , press the [EBL] control repeatedly such that the indication changes as follows:

→ C → D → …

* EBL1 floating mode can be changed with software button ⑪ located at the top right corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.3.

* EBL2 floating mode can be changed with software button ⑫ located at the top right corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.3.

2 Move the starting point of EBL1 with the trackball.

3 Press [ENT] key at the starting point of EBL1 you want to move.

The starting point of EBL1 will be determined.

If EBL2 is operating, the starting point of EBL2 is floating.

EBL modes

: Floating Off mode

EBL with the own ship position as the starting point is displayed.

C : Screen Fix mode

EBL with the specified floating point as the starting point is displayed.

The floating point is set relative to the own ship position and changes as own ship travels.

D : LL fix (Dropped) mode

EBL with the specified floating point as the starting point is displayed.

The floating point is set as an LL position irrespective of the own ship position, and does not change even though own ship travels.

Note: The floating function will not work even though the [EBL] control is pressed unless the EBL control mode is set to the Floating EBL mode.

Set the EBL control mode to Floating EBL before pressing the [EBL] control to change the mode to the Floating mode.

3

3─26

[II] Moving the starting point of EBL1 to the own ship’s position while EBL1 is operating:

Procedure 1 Press the [EBL] control twice.

The letter on the right hand side of the EBL value at the top right corner of the screen disappears.

* If the letter on the right hand side of the EBL value does not disappear, press the [EBL] control repeatedly such that the indication changes as follows:

→ C → D → …

* EBL1 starting point can be changed with software button ⑪ located at the top right corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.3.

* EBL2 starting point can be changed with software button ⑫ located at the top right corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.3.

If EBL2 is operating, the starting point of EBL2 moves to the own ship’s position.

3─27

3.5 GENERAL OPERATIONS y y y

3.5.3 Set EBL Operation (EBL1 /2 Setting)

[I] Setting the bearing display mode of EBL1 (EBL1 Bearing REF)

Determine whether to display EBLs (Electronic Bearing Lines) in true bearing mode or relative bearing mode.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [3] key

Press [1] key.

The EBL1 Setting Menu will appear.

2 Press [1] key.

The setting of EBL1 Bearing REF will be switched between TRUE and RELATIVE .

TRUE : EBL1 is displayed in true bearing mode.

RELATIVE : EBL2 is displayed in relative bearing mode.

* Software button ⑨ located at the top right corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.3 is also available to switch the display mode of EBL1.

[II] Setting the bearing display mode of EBL2 (EBL2 Bearing REF)

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [3] key.

Press [2] key.

The EBL2 Setting Menu will appear.

Subsequently, set the bearing display mode of EBL2 performing the same operation as explained in [I].

* Software button ⑩ located at the top right corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.3 is also available to switch the display mode of EBL2.

3

3─28

[III] Setting the mode to move the starting point of EBL1 (EBL1 Floating)

When this function is set to L/L FIX and the starting point of an EBL is moved to a position, the starting point can be fixed at the latitude and longitude of that position. The function is effective when the bearing from a certain point is repeatedly measured.

When the function is set to SCREEN FIX , the starting point of an EBL is fixed on the radar display.

The starting point is always indicated at the same position on the radar display even when the own ship has moved.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [3] key

Press [1] key.

The EBL1 Setting Menu will appear.

2 Press [2] key.

The EBL1 Floating Setting Menu will appear.

3 Select the mode number to be set, pressing the numeric keys [1] to [3].

The selected mode will be set.

OFF: Floating

SCREEN FIX: The starting point of EBL1 is fixed on the radar display.

L/L FIX: The starting point of EBL1 is fixed at specific latitude and longitude.

* Software button ⑪ located at the top right corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.3 is also available to switch the Screen Fix and L/L Fix of EBL1.

[IV] Setting the mode to move the starting point of EBL2 (EBL2 Floating)

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [3] key.

Press [2] key.

The EBL2 Setting Menu will appear.

Subsequently, set the EBL2’s starting point move mode performing the same operation as explained in [III].

* Software button ⑫ located at the top right corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.3 is also available to switch the Screen Fix and L/L Fix of EBL2.

Notes:

• The course data and the own ship’s latitude and longitude data are required for activating the L/L Fix mode.

• While the L/L Fix mode is active, the starting point of an EBL will be returned to the center if it disappears from the radar display when moved.

3─29

3.5 GENERAL OPERATIONS y y y

[V] Setting the EBL1 bearing fix mode (EBL1 Bearing FIX)

While this function is set to ANGLE , an EBL is fixed to the preset bearing. For example, if the true bearing 020

° is preset, the EBL is fixed to the true bearing 020° even when the own ship turns.

While the function is set to SCREEN , the EBL is fixed on the radar display.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [3] key

Press [1] key.

The EBL1 Setting Menu will appear.

2 Press [3] key.

The setting of EBL1 Bearing Fix will be switched between ANGLE and SCREEN .

ANGLE : EBL1 bearing is fixed to the preset value.

SCREEN : EBL1 bearing is fixed on the radar display.

[VI] Setting the EBL2 bearing fix mode (EBL2 Bearing Fix)

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [3] key.

Press [2] key.

The EBL2 Setting Menu will appear.

Subsequently, set the EBL2 bearing fix mode performing the same operation as explained in

[V].

Note: The course data is required for activating this function.

3

3─30

3.5.4 Display Variable Range Markers [VRM1/VRM2]

This function is to display and select variable range markers (VRMs). Two VRMs are available: VRM1 is represented as a broken line, and VRM2 as a dotted line. When EBL1 is displayed, VRM1 marker appears on the EBL1. When EBL2 is displayed, VRM2 marker appears on the EBL2. If the starting point of an EBL is offset, the center of a VRM marker is positioned at the starting point of the EBL.

VRM markers displayed on EBL1/EBL2

mark: VRM1

● mark: VRM2

VRM1 Operation

If VRM2 is selected or VRM1 is not displayed, press [VRM1] to select VRM1 before starting operation.

(The currently selected VRM is shown in reverse video at the upper right of the radar display.)

Procedure 1 Press [VRM1] key.

VRM1 at the upper right of the radar display will be shown in reverse video, and VRM1 becomes operable.

2 Press [VRM1] key again.

The VRM1 display will disappear.

* Software button ⑥ located at the top right corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.3 is also available to switch VRM1 between ON and OFF.

VRM Operations

The variable range markers are displayed centering around own ship. Turning the [VRM] control clockwise makes the VRM larger. Turning the [VRM] control counterclockwise makes the VRM smaller.

3─31

3.5 GENERAL OPERATIONS y y y

VRM2 Operation

If VRM1 is selected or VRM2 is not displayed, press [VRM2] key to select VRM2 before starting operation.

(The currently selected VRM is shown in reverse video at the upper right of the radar display.)

Procedure 1 Press [VRM2] key.

2 Press [VRM2] key again.

VRM2 at the upper right of the radar display will be shown in reverse video, and VRM2 becomes operable.

The VRM2 display will disappear.

* Software button ⑧ located at the top right corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.3 is also available to switch VRM2 between ON and OFF.

VRM Range Display (VRM 1/2 Range Unit)

The values of VRM1 and VRM2 currently displayed on the PPI are indicated at the upper right of the radar display.

The currently operable VRM1 or VRM2 is shown in reverse video beside the range value.

VRM1 Range Unit

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [3] key.

The Marker Setting Menu will appear.

2 Press [3] key.

The VRM1 Range Unit Setting Menu will appear.

3 Select the unit number to be set, pressing the numeric keys [1] to [3].

The selected unit will be set.

* Software button ⑮ located at the top right corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.3 is also available to switch VRM1 range unit.

3

3─32

VRM2 range unit

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [3] key.

The Marker Setting Menu will appear.

2 Press [4] key.

The VRM2 Range Unit Setting Menu will appear.

3 Select the item you want to set, pressing the numeric keys [1] to [3].

The selected item will be set.

* Software button ⑯ located at the top right corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.3 is also available to switch the

VRM2 range unit.

3─33

3.5 GENERAL OPERATIONS y y y

3.5.5 Display Parallel Cursors (Parallel Cursor)

Parallel cursors can be displayed.

Procedure 1 Press the [VRM] control.

Press the [VRM] control to select the Parallel

Cursor mode.

The Parallel Cursor menu opens.

To change the direction of parallel cursors, turn the [EBL] control.

To change the line intervals, turn the [VRM] control.

The bearing and interval of parallel cursors are displayed in the menu area.

2 Press the [VRM] control again.

Cancellation 1 Press the [VRM] control again.

The parallel cursor will be fixed.

The parallel cursors display will disappear.

Note: Parallel cursors can be operated only while the parallel cursor menu is open. After the menu closes, the parallel cursors display remains, but the settings of the bearing and interval cannot be adjusted any more. To adjust the bearing or interval in this case, press the [VRM] control twice to open the parallel cursor menu.

Parallel Cursor menu will not open even though the [VRM] control is pressed unless the VRM control mode is set to Parallel cursor.

Set the VRM control mode to Parallel cursor before pressing the [VRM] control to open parallel cursor menu.

* Software button ⑬ located at the top right corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.3 is also available to switch the parallel cursors between ON and OFF.

3

3─34

Operation of Parallel Cursors

Parallel cursors rotate in the same direction as you turn the [EBL] control.

(①, ②)

The intervals of parallel cursors narrow when you turn the [VRM] control counterclockwise (③), and widen when you turn the [VRM] control clockwise (④).

Display of Parallel Cursors

HL

EBL1 EBL2 VRM1 VRM2

◎ When [RADAR MENU] key is pressed, the parallel cursor menu closes and the parallel cursors are fixed.

During the operation of parallel cursors, pressing the [EBL1] control or [EBL2] control prevents operating in rotation directions. Pressing the [VRM1] control or [VRM2] control prevents operation at parallel cursor intervals.

3─35

3.5 GENERAL OPERATIONS y y y

Setting of Parallel Cursors (Parallel Cursor)

[I] Parallel Cursor Range Link (Range Scale Link)

When a range is switched, parallel cursors links to a radar range scale and displayed.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [3] key.

Press [5] key.

Press [1] key.

The Parallel Cursor Menu will appear.

2 Press [1] key.

Range Scale Link is switched between ON and

OFF each time you press [1] key.

Range Link ON:

If the range is switched, the width between parallel cursors changes in accordance with the radar range scale.

Range Link OFF:

If the range is switched, the width between parallel cursors remains fixed.

3

3─36

[II] Parallel Cursor Bearing (Reference Bearing)

Parallel cursor bearing mode can be switched.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [3] key.

Press [5] key.

Press [2] key.

The Parallel Cursor Menu will appear.

2 Press [2] key.

The Reference Bearing mode is switched between true bearing and relative bearing each time you press [2] key.

* Bearing in the parallel cursor menu will show which is selected, true bearing or relative bearing.

3─37

3.5 GENERAL OPERATIONS y y y

[III] Parallel Cursor Start Point Display Mode (Floating)

If this function is set to L/L FIX, and the start point of parallel cursor moves, the start point of the parallel cursor can be fixed to the latitude/longitude of the start point. If the function is set to

SCREEN FIX, the start point of parallel cursor is fixed within the radar display, and the start point is fixed to the same place on the display even after the own ship moves.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [3] key.

Press [5] key.

Press [2] key.

The Parallel Cursor Menu will appear.

2 Press [3] key.

The Floating Setting Menu will appear.

3 Select the item you want to display, pressing the numeric keys [1] to [3].

OFF: Floating mode OFF

SCREEN FIX: Fixes the start point of parallel cursor to the radar display.

Fixes the parallel cursor with latitude and longitude. L/L FIX:

* Software button ⑭ located at the top right corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.3 is also available for switching.

Note: Setting the function to the L/L Fix mode needs course data and latitude/longitude data.

3

3─38

[IV] Parallel Cursor Bearing Fix Mode (Bearing Mode)

If this function is set to ANGLE , the parallel cursor also rotates in accordance with the bearing while the own ship is turning. If the function is set to SCREEN FIX , the parallel cursors are fixed within the radar display even while the own ship is turning. The parallel cursors are displayed at the same place even while the own ship is turning.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [3] key.

Press [5] key.

Press [2] key.

The Parallel Cursor Menu will appear.

2 Press [4] key.

The Bearing Mode Setting Menu will appear.

Angle Fix : The angle of the parallel cursors is set in true bearing.

For NUP and CUP, the cursors are displayed in true bearing irrespective of changes in the course of own ship.

For HUP, the angle of the parallel cursors changes as the course of own ship changes.

Screen Fix : Parallel cursors are fixed on the radar screen.

For HUP, NUP, and CUP, the angle of the parallel cursors stays the same on the screen.

When own ship is engaged in TM motions, the parallel cursors move as own ship moves.

Heading Fix : The parallel cursors are displayed while the relative angle of the ship's heading bearing line stays the same.

For HUP, the ship's heading bearing line does not change even though the course of own ship changes; therefore, the parallel cursors do not move.

For NUP, the ship's heading bearing line changes as the course of own ship changes; therefore, the parallel cursors also change as the course of own ship changes.

3─39

3.5 GENERAL OPERATIONS y y y

[V] Individual Display of Parallel Cursor (PI Individual)

Individual parallel cursors can be switched between ON and OFF.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [3] key.

Press [5] key.

Press [2] key.

The Parallel Cursor Menu will appear.

2 Press [5] key.

DIPS For Individual Line Setting Menu will appear.

3 Select the item for which you want to display or not to display, pressing the numeric keys [1] to [7].

Individual setteing is switched between ON and OFF each time you press each numeric keys.

ON: Displayed

OFF : Not displayed

* The line nearest to the own ship is specified as Line1.

3

3─40

3.5.6 Display Parallel Index Lines (Parallel Index Line)

Parallel index lines can be displayed.

Up to 4 parallel index lines can be set.

For each line, angle, distance to own ship, and length can be specified.

Changing the angle of parallel index lines

Procedure 1 Press the [VRM] control.

● Turn the mode on using the jog dial.

Press the jog dial to turn the mode on.

● Turn the mode on from the menu screen.

Turn the mode on by following the steps below: the [Radar Menu] key.

3 Marker Setting

5 Parallel Line

Press

Parallel Index Line mode.

(*) These steps are not required if the mode is already on.

2 Press the [EBL] while the Parallel Index

Line mode is on.

Press the jog dial to scroll target parallel index lines.

A parallel index line currently in use is shown as follows:

EBL Control

PI 1 Bearing

3 Turn the [EBL] control.

Turn the control to change the parallel index line angle.

3─41

3.5 GENERAL OPERATIONS y y y

Changing the interval (distance from own ship) and length of parallel index lines

Procedure 1 Press the [VRM] control.

● Turn the mode on using the jog dial.

Press the jog dial to turn the mode on.

● Turn the mode on from the menu screen.

Turn the mode on by following the steps below:

Press [Radar Menu] key.

3 Marker Setting

5 Parallel Line

Press [1] key to set the Operation Mode to

Parallel Index Line mode.

(*) These steps are not required if the mode is already on.

2 Press the [EBL] while the Parallel Index

Line mode is on.

Press the jog dial to scroll target parallel index lines.

A parallel index line currently in use is shown as follows:

EBL Control

PI 1 Bearing

3 Press the [EBL] control.

Press the jog dial to change the VRM target in the following order:

Interval setting → end point 1 setting → end point 2 setting → interval setting …

Length of the index line changes as the position of end point 1 or end point 2 changes.

When the jog dial is turned...

Interval of index lines, distance to end point 1, and distance to end point 2 are changed.

3

3─42

Setting of Parallel Index Lines (Parallel Index Line)

[I] Parallel Index Line Range Link (Range Scale Link)

When a range is switched, parallel index lines links to a radar range scale and displayed.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [3] key.

Press [5] key.

Press [3] key.

The Parallel Index Line Menu will appear.

2 Press [1] key.

Range Scale Link is switched between ON and

OFF each time you press [1] key.

Range Scale Link ON:

If the range is switched, the width between parallel index lines changes in accordance with the radar range scale.

Range Scale Link OFF:

If the range is switched, the width between parallel index lines remains fixed.

3─43

3.5 GENERAL OPERATIONS y y y

[II] Parallel Index Line Bearing (Reference Bearing)

Parallel index line bearing mode can be switched.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [3] key.

Press [5] key.

Press [3] key.

The Parallel Index Line Menu will appear.

2 Press [2] key.

The Reference Bearing mode is switched between true bearing and relative bearing each time you press [2] key.

* Bearing in the parallel index line menu will show which is selected, true bearing or relative bearing.

3

3─44

[III] Parallel Index Line Start Point Display Mode (PI Floating)

If this function is set to L/L FIX, and the start point of parallel index line moves, the start point of the parallel index line can be fixed to the latitude/longitude of the start point. If the function is set to

SCREEN FIX, the start point of parallel index line is fixed within the radar display, and the start point is fixed to the same place on the display even after the own ship moves.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [3] key.

Press [5] key.

Press [3] key.

The Parallel Index Line Menu will appear.

2 Press [3] key.

The PI Floating Setting Menu will appear.

3 Select the item you want to display, pressing the numeric keys [1] to [3].

OFF: Floating mode OFF

SCREEN FIX: Fixes the start point of parallel index line to the radar display.

Fixes the parallel index line with latitude and longitude. L/L FIX:

* Software button ⑭ located at the top right corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.3 is also available for switching.

Note: Setting the function to the L/L Fix mode needs course data and latitude/longitude data.

3─45

3.5 GENERAL OPERATIONS y y y

[IV] Parallel Index Line Bearing Fix Mode (PI Bearing Mode)

If this function is set to ANGLE , the parallel index line also rotates in accordance with the bearing while the own ship is turning. If the function is set to SCREEN FIX , the parallel index lines are fixed within the radar display even while the own ship is turning. The parallel index lines are displayed at the same place even while the own ship is turning.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [3] key.

Press [5] key.

Press [3] key.

The Parallel Index Line Menu will appear.

2 Press [4] key.

The PI Bearing Mode Setting Menu will appear.

ANGLE: Links the parallel index lines with the bearing of the own ship.

SCREEN FIX: Fixes the parallel index lines to the radar display.

3

3─46

[V] Individual Display of Parallel Index Line (PI Individual)

Individual parallel index lines can be switched between ON and OFF.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [3] key.

Press [5] key.

Press [3] key.

The Parallel Index Line Menu will appear.

2 Press [5] key.

The PI Individual Setting Menu will appear.

3 Select the item for which you want to display or not to display, pressing the numeric keys [1] to [7].

Individual setteing is switched between ON and

OFF each time you press each numeric keys.

ON: Displayed

OFF : Not displayed

* The line nearest to the own ship is specified as Line1.

3─47

3.5 GENERAL OPERATIONS y y y

3.5.7 Switch Bearing Display Mode [AZI MODE]

Select the azimuth for the radar video to be displayed of the display.

The bearing display mode is switched in the sequence of [NORTH UP] (true bearing), [HEAD UP] (relative bearing), and [COURSE UP] (course-up bearing) each time [AZI MODE] key is pressed.

The indication at the upper left of the radar display changes in sequence of HUP

→ NUP → CUP .

* Software button ⑧ located at the top left corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.1 is also available to switch the radar bearing display.

True Bearing Mode [North Up]

The video is displayed so that the zenith of the PPI (0

° on range rings) points to the due north. Fixed targets do not flicker and are easily identified on the chart, and the true bearing of a target can easily be read out.

Relative Bearing Mode [Head Up]

The video is displayed so that the ship’s heading line points to the zenith of the PPI (0

° on range rings). Since targets are displayed in their directions relative to the ship’s heading line, the operator can view the video in the same field of view as in operating the ship at sea. This mode is suitable for watching over other ships.

Course-up Bearing Mode [Course Up]

By pressing [AZI MODE] key, the own ship’s course is fixed pointing to the zenith of the PPI (0

° on range rings) points to the due north. In the same way as in the North-up mode, fixed targets do not flicker, and are stabilized even if the ship is yawing. The bearing of the heading line varies by the same shift of own ship’s course. To change the course, press [AZI MODE] key several times to select the Course-up mode, and set a new course.

North HL HL

HL

North

3

North-up mode Head-up mode Course-up mode

3─48

3.5.8 Switch True/Relative Motion Display Mode [TM/RM]

Note: If the CCRP is outside the display area due to resetting of the own ship position in true motions, the CCRP becomes the antenna location.

Switching Relative Motion (RM) Mode to True Motion (TM) Mode

Procedure 1 Press [TM/RM] key.

The true motion mode will be selected. In the true motion mode, the own ship’s position on the radar display moves depending upon its speed and course and the influence of the current. Land and other fixed targets are fixed on the radar display and only actually moving targets move on the radar display. When the true motion mode is selected, the own ship’s position is set to about 60% of the display radius in the opposite direction to its course allowing for the influence of the current. Own ship starts moving depending upon its speed and course and the influence of the current. Subsequently, when own ship arrives at the position of about 66% of the display radius, it is automatically reset to its initial position at about 60% of the display radius in the opposite direction to its course allowing for the influence of the current.

Resetting Own Ship to its Initial Position in True Motion (TM) Mode

Procedure 1 Press [TM/RM] key for 2 seconds.

Own ship will be reset to its initial position as established when the relative motion mode is changed to the true motion mode. The ship starts moving from that position.

Switching True Motion (TM) Mode to Relative Motion (RM) Mode

Procedure 1 Press [TM/RM] key.

The relative motion mode will be selected. Own ship returns to the center of the radar display.

* Software button ③ located at the top left corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.1 is also available to switch between true motion and relative motion. Keep pressing the button for two seconds can reset the position of the own ship during true motion.

3─49

3.5 GENERAL OPERATIONS y y y

3.5.9 Move Own Ship’s Display Position [OFF CENT]

If the CCRP is outside the display area due to off-centering, the CCRP becomes the antenna location.

The own ship’s position can be moved from the display center to any position within 66% of the display radius.

This function is convenient for observing a wide coverage in any direction.

Note: This function is not available on the 96 NM range.

Procedure 1 Press [OFF CENT] key.

The cross cursor mark + will appear at the own ship’s position on the radar display.

* Software button ④ located at the top left corner of the radar display described in

Section 2.3.1 is also available to activate OFF Center.

2 Move the cross cursor mark + (own ship’s display position) to a desired position by using the trackball.

While the cross cursor mark is moving, the own ship’s display position moves following the cross cursor mark.

When it moves to a position outside 66% of the display radius, the center position is limited to a position within 66% of the display radius.

3 Press [ENT] key.

The own ship’s display position will be fixed to the cross cursor mark + .

HL

HL

Move the cross cursor mark + to a desired position.

Press [ENT] key.

The own ship’s display position will be fixed.

Returning Own Ship’s Position to the Center

Procedure 1 Press [OFF CENT] key for 2 seconds.

Note: Close the menu before using this function. While the menu is open, the function cannot be used.

* You can keep pressing software button ④ located at the top left corner of the radar display described in

Section 2.3.1 for two seconds to return the own ship position to the center.

3

3─50

3.5.10 Display Other Ships’ Trails [TRAILS]

Other ships’ movements and speeds can be monitored from the lengths and directions of their trails, serving for collision avoidance. The trail length varies according to setting.

The setting is described on the next page.

Changing the trail length

Procedure

Trail length setting in SHORT mode:

Press [TRAILS] key.

15 sec will be selected.

“TRAILS 15 sec ” will appear at the lower left of the radar display.

The trails (15 sec in length) will appear after other ships’ symbols.

Press [TRAILS] key.

30 sec will be selected.

“TRAILS 30 sec ” will appear at the lower left of the radar display.

The trails (30 sec in length) will appear after other ships’ symbols.

Press [TRAILS] key.

1 min will be selected.

“TRAILS 1 min ” will appear at the lower left of the radar display.

The trails (1 min in length) will appear after other ships’ symbols.

Press [TRAILS] key.

3 min will be selected.

“TRAILS 3 min ” will appear at the lower left of the radar display.

The trails (3 min in length) will appear after other ships’ symbols.

Press [TRAILS] key.

6 min will be selected.

“TRAILS 6 min ” will appear at the lower left of the radar display.

The trails (6 min in length) will appear after other ships’ symbols.

Press [TRAILS] key.

10 min will be selected.

“TRAILS 10 min ” will appear at the lower left of the radar display.

The trails (10 min in length) will appear after other ships’ symbols.

Press [TRAILS] key.

15 min will be selected.

“TRAILS 15 min ” will appear at the lower left of the radar display.

The trails (15 min in length) will appear after other ships’ symbols.

Press [TRAILS] key.

CONT will be selected.

“TRAILS CONT ” will appear at the lower left of the radar display.

The trails (in unlimited length) will appear after other ships’ symbols.

Press [TRAILS] key.

“TRAILS OFF ” will appear at the lower left of the radar display.

The trails of other ships will disappear.

3─51

3.5 GENERAL OPERATIONS y y y

SHORT mode: 15 sec, 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min, 6 min, 10 min, 15 min, and CONT

MID mode:

LONG mode:

30 sec, 1 min, 3 min, 6 min, 10 min, 15 min, 30 min, and CONT

1 min, 3 min, 6 min, 10 min, 15 min, 30 min, 60 min, and CONT

SUPER LONG mode: 30 min, 1 hr, 2 hr, 3 hr, 4 hr, 5 hr, 6 hr, 7 hr, 8 hr, 9 hr, 10 hr, 11 hr, 12 hr and

CONT

A trail length can also be changed by using the multi-function control. (Refer to Section 3.5.18

“Operate Multi-Function Control [MULTI].”)

Stored trails cannot be erased even when the trail lengths are changed by using [TRAILS] key. Even after the trails display is turned off, the past trails can be displayed traced back by setting a desired time.

The system is plotting trails even while the trails display is off.

* Software button ⑭ located at the other ship's information area in Section 2.3.6 is also available to change trail length.

Erasing Trails Data

Procedure 1 Hold down [TRAILS] key for 5 seconds.

All the stored trails data will be erased. The system starts plotting trails in initial state.

When [TRAILS] key is pushed for 2 seconds, a RADAR Trails Setting menu will be displayed. Furthermore, data will be erased if it continues pushing.

Trails Motion Mode

There are two types of trails: relative motion trails and true motion trails.

Relative motion trails: The system plots the trails of a target at a position relative to the own ship.

True motion trails:

The operator can easily judge whether the target is approaching the own ship.

While the own ship is moving, the system also plots the trails of land and other fixed targets.

The system plots the absolute motion trails of a target, irrespective of the own ship’s position.

The operator can easily judge the course and speed of the target.

The system does not plot the trails of land and other fixed targets.

Land Land

Trails

Ship

True Motion Trails

Trails

Ship

Relative Motion Trails

3

3─52

Trails modes provided with this system vary depending on the motion mode.

With true motion (TM) mode: Only the true motion trails mode is available.

With relative motion (RM) mode: The relative motion trails mode or true motion trails mode is selectable.

RM(R) is indicated while the relative motion trails mode is active.

RM(T) is indicated while the true motion trails mode is active.

While the true motion trails mode is active, this system enables the continuous use of true motion trails even if any of the following operations is performed:

• Motion display mode change [TM/RM] key

• TM reset [TM/RM] key

• Bearing display mode change [AZI MODE] key

• Center move [OFF CENT] key

• MAP display on/off [MAP] key

* Software button ⑬ located at the other ship's information area in Section 2.3.6 is also available to change trial motion mode.

Note: Accurate true bearing signals and speed signals are necessary for using the true motion trails mode.

Changing Motion Mode of Trails (Trails mode)

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key twice.

Press [2] key.

The RADAR Trails Setting Menu will appear.

2 Press [2] key.

The setting of radar trails display mode will be switched between TRUE and RELATIVE.

TRUE : True motion trails

RELATIVE : Relative motion trails

→ For other settings, see Section 3.9.2 “Set Radar Trails

(RADAR Trails Setting).”

3─53

3.5 GENERAL OPERATIONS y y y

3.5.11 Switch Pulse Length (GAIN/PL)

Procedure 1 Press the [GAIN / PL] dial.

Values of the transmitter pulse length are switched.

Example MP1

⇒ MP2 ⇒ LP1 ⇒ LP2 ⇒ MP1

Effects of transmitter pulse length

With SP selected:

The transmitter pulse becomes shorter, and the range resolution improves.

The effect of suppressing sea clutter returns and rain / snow clutter returns heightens.

Recommended condition for selection:

In bays / harbors where targets are densely crowded

Rough sea state due to torrential rain or stormy weather

With MP selected:

The normal transmitter pulse length is set.

Both range resolution and gain are appropriately set.

Recommended condition for selection:

General navigation

With LP selected:

The transmitter pulse becomes longer, and gain improves.

Small targets are zoomed and are easy to observe.

When the sea state is bad, detection performance decreases.

Recommended condition for selection:

Detection of small targets in good weather conditions

Usable transmitter pulse length differs according to the type of scanner unit being used and the observation range being used. For usable pulse length, see Section 11 “SPECIFICATIONS”.

3

3─54

3.5.12 Expand Targets (Target Enhance)

The dimension of video display is enlarged to enhance a target.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The Main Menu will appear.

2 Press [3] key.

The Target Enhance Selection Menu will appear.

3 Select the mode number to be set, pressing the numeric keys [1] to [4].

Target expansion modes

ENH OFF Expansion off: Select this mode particularly when resolution is required.

ENH LEVEL1 Expansion - small: Select this mode in general.

Radar echoes are expanded by 1 scale in all directions.

ENH LEVEL2 Expansion - medium: Select this mode to easily view the radar video.

Radar echoes are expanded by 2 scales in all directions on the

ENH LEVEL3 Expansion - large: display.

Select this mode to detect small targets such as buoys.

The expansion near a screen center is added to ENH LEVEL2.

Note: When ENH LEVEL3 is selected, sea clutter returns and rain/snow clutter returns are apt to be expanded. When using this expansion mode, operate [AUTO-SEA] control and

[AUTO-RAIN] control to suppress sea clutter returns and rain/snow clutter returns.

In general, ENH LEVEL1 or ENH LEVEL2 should be selected.

* Software button ③ located at the bottom left corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.2 is also available to switch the target enhance mode.

3─55

3.5 GENERAL OPERATIONS y y y

3.5.13 Use Video Process (Process)

This function reduces unnecessary noise to highlight targets.

Attention z When viewing a radar beacon, SART signal, or fast

moving target on the radar display, select PROCESS

OFF (video process off).

3

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The Main Menu will appear.

2 Press [2] key.

The Process Selection Menu will appear.

3 Select the mode number to be set, pressing the numeric keys [1] to [6].

The selected mode will be set.

Video process modes

PROC OFF Video process off: Select this mode in general.

3SCAN COREL Correlative process 1: Select this mode when many rain/snow clutter returns are detected.

4SCAN COREL Correlative process 2: Select this mode to highlight targets while suppressing sea clutter returns.

5SCAN COREL Correlative process 3: Select this mode to detect small targets hidden by sea clutter

REMAIN Video process 4: returns.

Select this mode when own ship yaws wildly.

PEAK HOLD Video process 5: Select this mode to detect small targets of which detection probability is low.

* Software button ④ located at the bottom left corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.2 is also available for switching video process modes.

3─56

3.5.14 Zoom

This function doubles the size of radar video near a specified position.

Attention

If the range is 0.125 NM , this function is not available.

If the true motion mode is selected, this function is not available.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The Main Menu will appear.

2 Press [4] key.

The setting of the zoom mode will be switched between ON and OFF.

OFF : Not zoomed

ON : Zoomed

This function is not available at places where the size exceeds 66% of the radius of the display.

3 With ZOOM ON selected, move the cross cursor mark to the position to be zoomed, and press [ENT] key.

The position will be zoomed.

Using the cross cursor mark as reference, the zoom function doubles the size of a radar video with the midpoint between the cursor mark and own ship’s position being set to the center of radar display.

Cross cursor mark

Cross cursor mark

Center of radar display

Own ship’s position

Own Ship’s Position before

Zooming position

Own Ship’s Position after

Zooming

* Software button ① located at the bottom left corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.2 is also available to switch the zoom function between ON and OFF. "x" blinks at the screen lower right during a

ZOOM display.

3─57

3.5 GENERAL OPERATIONS y y y

3.5.15 Use Marker [MOB]

The marker function displays a dotted line from the marker input position to the own ship’s position, and indicates the range, bearing, and required time from the own ship to the marker.

Procedure 1 Press [MOB] key.

A marker will be displayed at the own ship’s position on the radar display at the moment when [MOB] key is pressed.

The own ship and the marker are connected with a dotted line.

Cancellation 1 Hold down [MOB] key for 2 seconds.

The marker will disappear.

Even when the own ship moves, the marker is fixed at the latitude and longitude. Thus, if a marker is put to an important position, the ship can return to the position regarding the marker as a target.

3

3─58

3.5.16 Marking [MARK]

A maximum of 20 marks can be indicated at arbitrary positions on the radar display.

A mark created on the radar display holds the latitude and longitude.

Marks

Procedure 1 Press [MARK] key.

[□] will appear in the CURSOR field at the upper right of the radar display.

2 Put the cross cursor mark + on the position where a mark is to be created, and press [ENT] key.

The cross cursor mark + will be changed into the [□] mark and fixed on the radar display. To enter more [□] marks, repeat step 2.

Up to 20 marks can be entered.

Note: If more than 20 marks are created, the oldest mark is cleared and the newly created mark is displayed.

[II] Clearing Marks

Procedure 1 Press [MARK] key.

The [□] mark will appear in the CURSOR field at the upper right of the radar display.

2 Put the cross cursor mark + on the mark to be cleared.

The [□] mark will disappear. To clear another [□] mark, repeat step 2.

To clear all [□] marks, press [MARK] key and then hold down [CLR] key.

* Software button ① located at the top right corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.3 changes the cursor mode. When "□" appears, the cross cursor is available to create "□" mark.

3─59

3.5 GENERAL OPERATIONS y y y

3.5.17 Operate EBL Maneuver Function (EBL Maneuver)

[I] Initial Setting (Reach,Turn Mode, Turn Set)

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key twice.

Press [3] key.

Press [7] key.

The EBL Maneuver Setting Menu will appear.

2 Press [2] key.

The CODE INPUT Menu will appear.

Enter the Reach value and select ENT.

3 Press [3] to select Turn Mode.

The setting of turn mode will be switched between RADIUS and RATE.

RADIUS: Constant turn diameter (NM)

RATE: Constant turn speed (deg/min)

4 Press [4] key.

The CODE INPUT Menu will appear.

Enter the Turn Set value and select ENT.

Note: If the initial setting is not correct, the maneuver curve is affected.

3

3─60

[II] Creating Maneuver Curve (EBL Maneuver)

Procedure 1 Press [1] key while the EBL Maneuver menu is open.

EBL Maneuver will be set to ON.

A supplemental line, a maneuver curve, and WOL will appear on the radar display.

2 Set the starting point of the supplemental line using the trackball, and set the bearing of the supplemental line using the [EBL] control.

The bearing of the supplemental line will be the final bearing in which the own ship is to move.

The position of WOL will change depending on the bearing of the supplemental line.

If the WOL is behind the own ship’s position, the line color of WOL will change.

3 Press [ENT] key.

The setting will be determined. However, if the WOL is behind the own ship’s position at this point, the pressing of [ENT] key is rejected, and the setting is not determined.

Cancellation 1 Press [1] key.

The EBL Maneuver function will be set to OFF.

Exit 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The EBL Maneuver Menu will close.

WOL: Steering

REACH: Distance from when the wheel is steered to when the ship begins to turn

3─61

3.5 GENERAL OPERATIONS y y y

3.5.18 Operate Multi-Function Control [MULTI]

The multi-function control [MULTI] is provided to change the settings of parameters such as the length of radar trails. Turn the control to select a parameter. Radar operation is simplified by using the control.

[I] Initial Setting (Multi Dial Setting)

Set parameters that can be operated with the multi-function control.

A parameter set to ON can be called by turning [MULTI] control.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key twice.

Press [8] key.

Press [2] key.

The Multi Dial Setting Menu will appear.

2 Press the numeric key of the number of the parameter whose setting is to be changed.

The setting will be switched between ON and OFF .

ON : Can be operated with the multi-function control.

OFF : Cannot be operated with the multi-function control.

Parameters

1. Vector Length: Vector length of TT

2. Trails Length: Length of radar trails

3. TT TGT Display No.: TT target number for which values are to be

displayed

4. C-UP Angle: Course in course-up mode bearing mode

5. Own Track Color:

6. Mark/Line Color:

Available with plotter option.

Available with plotter option.

3

3─62

[II] Using Multi-function Control

Procedure 1 Press the [MULTI] control to select the parameter whose setting is to be changed.

Parameters will be selected sequentially each time the [MULTI] control is pressed.

The currently selected parameter is indicated at the lower left of the radar display.

For example, if three parameter 1-3 are initially set to ON , they are selected in the following sequence each time the [MULTI] control is pressed:

MULTI (VECTOR)

Press the [MULTI] control.

MULTI (TRAILS)

Press the [MULTI] control.

MULTI (TGT No.)

Press the [MULTI] control.

2 Turn the [MULTI] control to change the setting.

The preset values of the selected parameter will change sequentially.

Stop turning the control when the desired value appears.

* Software button ⑬ located at the bottom left corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.2 is also available for switching the settings.

3─63

3.5 GENERAL OPERATIONS y y y

3.5.19 Operate User Key Switches [User Key 1/2]

Users can freely make settings with [USER KEY1] key and [USER KEY2] key.

By using the switches, users can open a frequently used menu by only single operation, or assign special functions, which are not on the standard operation panel, to the user key switches.

[I] Initial Setting (User Key Setting)

Set functions that can be performed with the user key switches.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key twice.

Press [8] key.

Press [3] key.

The User Key Setting Menu will appear.

2 Press the numeric keys [1] or [2] to select the user key switch whose setting is to be changed.

The pull-down menu will appear showing the functions.

User Key1: [1] key

User Key2: [2] key

3 Press the numeric key to select the function that is to be assigned to the user key switch.

The function will be selected.

Pull-down menu items

1. MENU: Directly displays a specified menu.

2. ZOOM: Sets the zoom function to ON/OFF.

3

3─64

[II] Using User Key Switches (Directly displaying a specified menu)

Preset the menu that is to be displayed with the user key switch.

Setting the menu that is to be displayed with User Key 1:

Procedure 1 Perform the general menu open procedure to open the menu that is to be directly displayed with User Key 1.

2 While the menu is open, hold down [USER KEY1] key for 2 seconds.

The menu will be assigned to [USER KEY1] key.

Setting the menu that is to be displayed with User Key 2:

Procedure 1 Perform the general menu open procedure to open the menu that is to be directly displayed with User Key 2.

2 While the menu is open, hold down [USER KEY2] key for 2 seconds.

The menu will be assigned to [USER KEY2] key.

Directly displaying the menus assigned to the User Keys:

Procedure

Procedure

1 Press [USER KEY1] key.

The menu assigned to [USER KEY1] key will appear.

Subsequently, general menu operation can be performed.

1 Press [USER KEY2] key.

The menu assigned to [USER KEY2] key will appear.

Subsequently, general menu operation can be performed.

3─65

3.5 GENERAL OPERATIONS y y y

3.5.20 Automatic Acquisition

Note: If the number of targets being tracked has reached the allowable maximum and other targets (not being tracked) go into the acquisition/activation zone, automatically acquired targets are canceled in ascending order of danger.

Turning On / Off the automatic acquisition and AIS activation (AZ Menu)

Procedure 1 Press the [TT Menu] key.

TT Menu opens.

2 Press the [5] key.

Press the [1] key.

Acquisition / activation zone setting menu (AZ) opens.

3 Press the [1] or [2] key.

The acquisition / activation zone 1 (AZ1) or acquisition / activation zone 2 (AZ2) will be set to on or off.

On :The acquisition / activation zone is

turned on. The mark " " and target

ID number are put to an acquired target

and move with the target. The vectors are displayed within 1 minute.

AIS targets are activated.

Off :The acquisition/activation zone is turned off.

The acquisition/activation zone will disappear from the radar display, but the

system continues to track the acquired target.

The activated AIS targets remain activate.

3

3─66

Creating the automatic acquisition and AIS activation Zone

Procedure 1 Press the [TT Menu] key.

TT Menu opens.

2 Press the [5] key.

Press the [1] key.

Acquisition / activation zone setting menu (AZ) opens.

3 Press the [3] or [4] key.

The range setting of the acquisition / activation zone 1 (AZ1) or acquisition / activation zone 2

(AZ2) will be started.

4 Set the starting azimuth and range by turning the [EBL] dial and

[VRM] dial, and press the [ENT] key.

5 Set the ending azimuth and range by turning the [EBL] dial and

[VRM] dial, and press the [ENT] key.

The acquisition / activation zone will be determined.

3─67

3.5 GENERAL OPERATIONS y y y

Setting the [AZ] key allocation (Set AZ Alarm Key)

A generally used acquisition / activation zone can be turned on / off by simply pressing the [AZ] key.

Procedure 1 Press the [TT Menu] key.

TT Menu opens.

2 Press the [5] key.

Press the [3] key.

Alarm key allocation menu (Set AZ Alarm Key) opens.

3 Press the [1] key.

Allocate alarm keys for the acquisition / activation zone.

On :Pressing the [AZ] key turns on / off the acquisition / activation zone.

Off :Pressing the [AZ] key does not turn on the acquisition / activation zone.

Note: If the RADAR Alarm key assignment is set, pressing the [AZ] key turns on / off the AZ Alarm key at the same time the RADAR Alarm is turned on / off.

3

3─68

3.5.21 Radar Alarm (Radar Alarm)

Sector

Display a created Sector Alarm.

Procedure 1 Press [TT MENU] key.

The TT Menu will appear.

With a fan-shaped range made, the radar alarm can give an alarm to ships that enter or depart from the range.

2 Press [5] key.

Press [2] key.

The Radar Alarm Menu will appear.

3 Press [1] key.

The Sector Radar Alarm Menu will appear.

4 Press numeric key [1] or [2] in accordance with the Sector Alarm to be displayed.

The display sector alarm mode will be switched between ON and OFF.

ON: Displayed

OFF : Not displayed

3─69

3.5 GENERAL OPERATIONS y y y

[II] Set Radar Alarm Mode (Radar Alarm Mode)

For alarm issuing conditions for the radar alarm, set either entry or departure.

Procedure 1 Press [TT MENU] key.

The TT Menu will appear.

2 Press [5] key.

Press [2] key.

The Radar Alarm Menu will appear.

3 Press [5] key.

The radar alarm mode will be switched between

ON and OFF.

IN: Issues an alarm when ship enters.

OUT: Issues an alarm when ship departs.

3

3─70

[III] Set Radar Alarm Detection Level (Sensitivity Level)

Procedure

Detection levels can be set to issue alarms from the radar alarm.

1 Press [TT MENU] key.

The TT Menu will appear.

2 Press [5] key.

Press [2] key.

The Radar Alarm Menu will appear.

3 Press [6] key.

When a detection level appears, select the number you want to set, pressing the numeric keys [1] to [4].

* As the numeric value for detection level is larger, echo needs to be stronger for detection.

If the numeric value for detection level is low, detection can be made with weak echo to issue an alarm.

3─71

3.5 GENERAL OPERATIONS y y y

[IV] Make Sector Alarm (Make Sector Alarm)

Procedure

Sector alarms that can be made are divided into the two types.

1 Press [TT MENU] key.

The TT Menu will appear.

2 Press [5] key.

Press [2] key.

The Radar Alarm Menu will appear.

3 Press [3] key.

The Make Sector Alarm Menu will appear.

4 Press numeric key [1] or [2] in accordance with the Sector Alarm to be made.

5 Place the start position of the sector alarm at a desired position by operating the EBL/VRM dial, and then select ENT.

The start position of the Sector Alarm will be set.

6 Place the end position of the Sector Alarm at a desired position by operating the EBL/VRM dial, and then select ENT.

The end position of the Sector Alarm will be set.

3

3─72

Setting RADAR Alarm Key Assignment (Set AZ Alarm Key)

This section explains how to set a RADAR alarm that is to be assigned to the [AZ ALARM] key.

The setting enables the operator to select ON/OFF for a generally used RADAR alarm by simply operating the

[AZ ALARM] key on the control panel.

Procedure 1 Press [TT MENU] key.

Press

[2].

Sector RADAR Alarm menu will appear.

ON: Turns on the RADAR alarm when the

[AZ ALARM] key is pressed.

OFF: Does not turn on the RADAR alarm when the [AZ ALARM] key is pressed.

Note: When the automatic acquisition / activation zone key allocation is set, pressing the [AZ] key will simultaneously turn on or off the radar alarm in the automatic acquisition / activation zone.

3─73

3.6 DISPLAY OWN SHIP'S TRACK (OWN TRACK) y y y

3.6

USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK DATA

(OWN TRACK)

The own ship's track function saves and displays own ship's track.

If navigation equipment is connected, this radar system records latitude / longitude data sent from the navigation equipment and displays own ship's track.

Note: Even when own ship's track interval switching (software button ⑫ located at the bottom right corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.4) is set to Off , own ship's track can be displayed. However, in this case, if rewrite operation such as changing of the display range is performed for the radar display, own ship's track display is erased and the track will not be plotted again.

If the DISP Own Track is turned off when the own ship track is in save, own ship's track is not shown of the display, but own ship's track data is still saved.

When a plotter unit (optional) is connected, own ship's track can be displayed and saved in seven different colors. The color display can be turned on or off by color.

3.6.1 Display Own Ship’s Track (Display Own Track)

If navigation equipment is connected, this system records data received from the navigation equipment and displays the own ship’s track.

1 Select color for new own ship past tracks. (Own Track Color)

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [9] key.

Press [1] key.

The Own Track Setting Menu will appear.

2 Press [5] key.

The color list is displayed.

3 Select the number to be set, pressing the numeric key.

The selected track colorl will be set.

* Software button ② located at the bottom right corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.4 is also available to select the

Own Track color.

The selected color is applied to the newly displayed track only.

The tracks displayed already are not affected by the setting.

Note: The own ship’s track can be displayed even while Own Track Memory is set to OFF. In this case, if rewrite operation such as changing of the display range is performed for the radar display, the own ship’s track display is erased and the track is not plotted again.

If DISP Own Track is set to OFF when Own Track Memory is ON, the own ship’s track is not shown on the radar display but the system stores own ship’s track data at specified intervals.

3

3─74

2 Select Own ship tracks by the color. (Display Own Track Color)

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [9] key.

Press [1] key.

The Own Track Setting Menu will appear.

2 Press [2] key.

The track color list is displayed.

3 Select the color of the tracks to be displayed by Pressing the numeric key.

The selected traks are displayed.

* You can select the color for new own ship’s track in “Track Color”. Then you can view the memorized own ship’s tracks by colors selected in “DISP Own Track Color”.

3─75

3.6 DISPLAY OWN SHIP'S TRACK (OWN TRACK) y y y

3.6.2 Set Own Ship’s Track Data Storage Interval (Own Track Interval)

There are 10 preset time intervals and 8 preset range intervals that can be selected for storing own ship’s track data.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [9] key.

Press [1] key.

The Own Track Setting Menu will appear.

2 Press [1] key.

The Own Track Interval Setting Menu will appear.

3 Select the storage interval number to be set, pressing the numeric key.

The selected storage interval will be set.

A preset time interval or preset distance interval can be selected as the storage interval.

Storage intervals that can be selected

Time: 3 sec, 5 sec, 10 sec, 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min, 30 min, and 60 min

Range: 1 nm, 3 nm, 5 nm, and 10 nm

The pull-down menu consists of 2 pages.

To switch between the pages, select Next Page pressing the numeric key [9], or Previous Page pressing the numeric key

[0].

* Pressing software button ⑫ located at the bottom right corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.4, you can switch track data storage intervals, and pressing software button ③ located at the bottom right corner of the radar display described in Section

2.3.4, you can switch of a memory unit.

Setting the button to OFF cancels the storing of data.

3

3─76

3.6.3 Cancel Storing of Own Ship’s Track Data (Own Track Memory)

This function cancels the storing of own ship’s track data.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [9] key.

Press [1] key.

The Own Track Setting Menu will appear.

2 Press [4] key.

The setting of Own Track Memory will be switched between ON and OFF.

ON : Own ship’s track data is stored.

OFF : Own ship’s track data is not stored.

* Software button ⑫ located at the bottom right corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.4 is also available for switching Track Data Storage Intervals. Setting the button to OFF cancels own track memory.

Note: The own ship’s track can be displayed even while Own Track Memory is set to OFF. In this case, if rewrite operation such as changing of the display range is performed for the radar display, the own ship’s track display is erased and the track is not plotted again.

If Display Own Track is set to OFF when Own Track Memory is ON, the own ship’s track is not shown on the radar display but the system stores own ship’s track data at specified intervals.

3─77

3.6 DISPLAY OWN SHIP'S TRACK (OWN TRACK) y y y

3.6.4 Clear Own Ship’s Track Data (Clear Own Track)

This function clears own ship’s track data from memory.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [9] key.

Press [1] key.

The Own Track Setting Menu will appear.

2 Press [3] key.

The Own Track color list will appear.

3 Select the track color to be cleared, pressing the numeric key.

The tracks with selected color will be cleared.

3

3─78

3.7

DISPLAY

3.7.1 Insert/Remove a Card

Insert or remove the JRC coastline ROM card, ERC card, C-MAP card and memory card according to the procedures below.

Note: Keep a card horizontal when inserting it into a card slot. An inclined card causes a failure.

Do not simultaneously insert a JRC coastline ROM card, an ERC card and C-MAP card into the card slot. A malfunction will occur on the display.

Insert the card into the specified slot according to the following table:

Card type

JRC card

ERC card

Insertion slot No.

Either one

Either one

C-Map NT+ detail card Either one

Memory card Card slot 2 (Upper stage)

Note: The Background of C-Map has been built in, don’t insert C-Map NT+ background card.

If the background card is inserted, the system will malfunction.

Insert a card into processor unit

Procedure 1 Remove the rubber packing located at the backside of the processing unit cabinet, and expose the card slot.

3─79

3.7 DISPLAY CHARTS y y y

2 Insert the card in the direction indicated by the arrow.

3

3 Insert the card until the card slot's eject button protrudes and complete the installation of a card.

Eject a card from processor unit

Procedure 1 Push the eject button corresponding to the desired card slot.

2 remove a card from processor unit

3─80

3.7.2 Display Coastline ROM Card Produced by JRC

z Insert the Coastline ROM card produced by JRC with the top surface upward into card slot 1 (lower) or 2 (upper) as shown in the figure below. Press [MAP] key, and the coastlines will be displayed automatically. z Two Coastline ROM cards can be inserted into card slots 1 and 2 at the same time. z For ranges including detailed coastlines, refer to the Coastline ROM card catalog. z Do not insert an ERC card (provided by Japan Hydrographic Association) or C-MAP card into a card slot while JRC’s Coastline ROM card is in the other slot. Doing so causes display trouble.

JRC

CDD-612JKA

Coastline ROM Card

Area: Kanto and Tokai Districts

(1) Kanto

Japan Radio Co., Ltd.

Front view of the processor

Upper: Card slot 2

Lower: Card slot 1

Top surface

Insert into card slot 1 or 2.

* Insert the card and then press software button ④ located at the bottom right corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.4 to switch Display Charts between ON and OFF.

3─81

3.7 DISPLAY CHARTS y y y

3.7.3 Display ERC Card

z Insert the ERC card (provided by Japan Hydrographic Association) with the top surface upward into card slot 1 (lower) or 2 (upper) as shown in the figure below. Press [MAP] key, and the coastlines will be displayed automatically. z Two ERC cards can be inserted into card slots 1 and 2 at the same time. z For ranges of charts to be displayed, refer to the catalog issued by Japan Hydrographic Association. z Do not insert JRC’s Coastline ROM card or C-MAP card into a card slot while the ERC card is in the other slot. Doing so causes display trouble.

Front view of the processor

Upper: Card slot 2

Lower: Card slot 1

Insert into card slot 1 or 2.

Electronic Reference Charts for Navigation

R-300 Tokyo Bay and Vicinity

★ North of Tokyo Bay

★ Uraga Channel and Vicinity

★ South of Tokyo Bay – Ohshima

Taitohsaki - Irohzaki

* Insert the card and then press software button ④ located at the bottom right corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.4 to switch Display Charts between ON and OFF.

3

3─82

3.7.4 Fill Charts (Fill Land Area)

This function fills the chart when JRC/ERC card is in use.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [9] key.

Press [5] key.

The Map Setting Menu will appear.

2 Press [1] key.

The setting of Fill Land Area will be switched between ON and OFF.

ON : Charts are filled.

OFF : Charts are not filled.

3─83

3.8 DISPLAY NAVIGATION INFORMATION (NEW INFORMATION DISPLAY) y y y

3.8

DISPLAY

(NAV INFORMATION DISPLAY)

Navigation information such as waypoint marks, and a maximum of 256 points of NAV lines, coastlines, depth contours, and NAV marks can be displayed, created, read, saved, corrected, and deleted. (This function is available only when navigation equipment is connected with the system.)

3.8.1 Display Waypoint Marks (Waypoint Display)

When waypoint information is received from the navigation equipment, the waypoint mark appears on the radar display. In this case, ○WP is indicated as the waypoint mark on the radar display.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key twice.

Press [6] key.

The NAV Information Menu will appear.

2 Press [1] key.

The setting of Waypoint Display will be switched between ON and OFF.

ON : Displays waypoint marks.

OFF : Does not display waypoint marks.

Waypoint marks are displayed only when NMEA sentences are used to receive Waypoint information. A plotter function (option) is needed to make Waypoint in this radar.

3

3─84

3.8.2 Display Navigation Information (NAV Display Setting)

The navigation information below can be displayed (ON) or hidden (OFF) individually. c Line 1 [Line 1]

― d Line 2 [Line 2]

---e Line 3 [Line 3]

‐― f Mark 1 [Mark 1] g Mark 2 [Mark 2]

★ h Mark 3 [Mark 3]

+ i Mark 4 [Mark 4]

Y

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [6] key.

Press [2] key.

The NAV Display Setting Menu will appear.

To determine whether to display each type of navigation information, press the corresponding numeric key.

ON : Displays the navigation information.

OFF : Does not display the navigation information.

3─85

3.8 DISPLAY NAVIGATION INFORMATION (NEW INFORMATION DISPLAY) y y y

3.8.3 Create/Edit Navigation Information (Edit User Map)

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [6] key.

Press [3] key.

Press [6] key.

The Edit User Map Menu will appear.

The Edit User Map enables the operations of the functions below.

Clear Map Object: Clears all or an item of navigation information.

Make Map Object: Creates navigation information.

Correct: Corrects navigation information.

Delete: Deletes one point from navigation information.

Insert: Inserts an element into a line of each type

3

3─86

1 Clearing all or an item of navigation information (Clear Map Object)

Procedure 1 Press [1] key while the Edit User MAP

Menu is open.

The Clear Map Object Menu will appear.

Select the type of navigation information to be cleared, pressing the corresponding numeric key.

Line

Coast Line: Clears Line 2.

Line

Mark1: Clears

Mark2: Clears

1.

Mark

Mark3: Clears

Mark4: Clears

2.

3.

All: Clears all items of navigation information.

3─87

3.8 DISPLAY NAVIGATION INFORMATION (NEW INFORMATION DISPLAY) y y y

2 Making navigation information (Make Map Object)

Procedure 1 Press [2] key while the Edit User MAP

Menu is open.

The Make Map Object Menu will appear.

MAKE will appear in the CURSOR mode field at software button ⑪ located at the bottom right corner of the radar display described in

Section 2.3.4.

2 Select the type of navigation information to be made, pressing the corresponding numeric key.

3 Use the trackball to move the cross cursor mark to the starting point of a line or a point where a mark is to be made, and press [ENT] key.

The starting point of a line or one point of a mark will be determined.

4 Repeat step 3, and press [8] key when finishing the making of the line or mark.

The line or mark make mode will terminate.

5 To make another line or mark, repeat steps 2 to 4.

6 Press [0] key when finishing the making of all navigation information.

The Edit User Map Menu will reappear.

Note: Navigation information can be created with a maximum of 256 points being plotted.

The number of points that can still be plotted (REMAIN POINT in the menu) is decremented each time a line or mark is plotted.

3

3─88

3 Correcting a continuous line or moving a mark (Correct)

Procedure 1 Press [3] key while the Edit User Map

Menu is open.

The navigation information correction mode will be activated.

Correct will appear in the CURSOR mode field at software button ⑪ located at the bottom right corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.4.

2 Use the trackball to move the pointer to the vertex in a line to be corrected or the mark to be moved, and press [ENT] key.

The cross cursor mark will appear on the selected line or mark.

3 Use the trackball to move the cross cursor mark to a new point to which the line is corrected or the mark is moved.

The selected line will be corrected to the new point, or the mark will be moved there.

4 To correct another line or mark, repeat steps 2 and 3.

5 Press [0] key when finishing the correction of lines and marks.

The CURSOR mode at the upper right of the radar display will change to the general operation mode, terminating the navigation information correction mode.

(Example)

Select a top

3─89

3.8 DISPLAY NAVIGATION INFORMATION (NEW INFORMATION DISPLAY) y y y

4 Deleting a continuous line or mark (Delete)

Procedure 1 Press [4] key while the Edit User Map

Menu is open.

The navigation information deletion mode will be activated.

Delete will appear in the CURSOR mode field at software button ② located at the top right corner of the radar display described in

Section 2.3.3.

2 Use the trackball to move the pointer to the vertex in a line or the mark to be deleted, and press [ENT] key.

The selected line or mark will be deleted.

Note: A line drawn by joining two points is all deleted.

3 To delete another line or mark, repeat step 2.

4 Press [0] key when finishing the deletion of lines and marks.

The CURSOR mode at the upper right of the radar display will change to the general operation mode, terminating the navigation information deletion mode.

(Example) Deletion of a vertex from a line

3

3─90

5 Inserting a vertex into a line (Insert)

Procedure 1 Press [5] key while the Edit User MAP

Menu is open.

The navigation information insertion mode will be activated.

Insert will appear in the CURSOR mode field at software button ② located at the top right corner of the radar display described in

Section 2.3.3.

2 Use the trackball to move the pointer to the line that is to become a vertex, and press [ENT] key.

The cross cursor mark will appear on the selected point.

3 Use the trackball to move the cross cursor mark to a new point where a vertex is to be formed, and press [ENT] key.

A vertex will be inserted into the selected line.

4 To insert another vertex, repeat steps 2 and 3.

5 Press [0] key when finishing the insertion of all vertices.

The CURSOR mode at the upper right of the radar display will change to the general operation mode, terminating the navigation information insertion mode.

(Example)

3─91

3.8 DISPLAY NAVIGATION INFORMATION (NEW INFORMATION DISPLAY) y y y

3.8.4 Set Navigation Information (User Map Setting)

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [6] key.

Press [3] key.

The User Map Setting Menu will appear.

Select operation for navigation information, pressing the corresponding numeric key. The selected operation will be performed. navigation

Unload: Unloads

Save: Saves navigation information.

Erase: Erases

Edit User Map:Edits navigation information.

Shift: information.

Shifts the display position of navigation information.

Shift Clear: Clears position correction information.

3

3─92

[I] Entering the own ship’s position in manual mode (Own Ship Position)

Use this function to edit the navigation information of any positions other than the own ship’s position.

Procedure 1 Press [1] key while the User Map

Setting Menu is open.

The CODE INPUT Menu for entering latitude and longitude of the own ship position will appear.

2 Enter a value as the latitude (xx

°

xxx.xx’) using the numeric keys [0] to

[9].

3 To switch between north latitude and south latitude, turn the [MULTI] control.

Each time the control is turned, N (north latitude) is changed to S (south latitude), or vice versa.

4 Press [ENT] key.

The latitude entered in manual mode will be determined.

Subsequently, enter the longitude.

5 Enter a value as the longitude (xx

° xxx.xx’) using the numeric keys [0] to

[9].

6 To switch between east longitude and west longitude, turn the [MULTI] control.

Each time the control is turned, E (east longitude) is changed to W (west longitude), or vice versa.

7 Press [ENT] key.

* Button on the CODE INPUT Menu is also available instead of the numeric keys.

The longitude entered in manual mode will be determined.

Note: The own ship’s position manually entered by using the function above is valid only in the User

MAP Setting Menu. When control exits from the menu, the manually entered position data is invalidated.

3─93

3.8 DISPLAY NAVIGATION INFORMATION (NEW INFORMATION DISPLAY) y y y

[II] Loading navigation information (Load User Map)

Procedure 1 Press [2] key while the User Map

Setting Menu is open.

The Load User Map Menu will appear.

2 Press [2] key.

The list of navigation information files saved in the system will appear.

* Each time you press [1] key, the Device item is switched between

INTERNAL and CARD2.

INTERNAL: Reads saved data from the processor.

CARD2: Reads saved data from CARD2.

To select CARD2, insert the flash memory card, in which data has been saved, into card slot 2 (upper stage).

3 Select the number of the file to be loaded, pressing the numeric key.

The selected navigation information will be loaded and shown on the radar display.

3

3─94

[III] Initializing Navigation Information (Unload)

Procedure 1 Press [3] key while the User Map

Setting Menu is open.

Display the window to select whether or not the information is to be initialized.

2 Press [1] key.

The navigation information is initialized.

This function can be executed for files that have been read and new navigation information currently being entered.

3─95

3.8 DISPLAY NAVIGATION INFORMATION (NEW INFORMATION DISPLAY) y y y

[IV] Saving navigation information (Save User Map)

This function is available only when navigation equipment is connected with the system or the own ship’s position is entered in manual mode.

Procedure 1 Press [4] key while the User Map

Setting Menu is open.

2 Press [2] key.

The Save User Map Menu will appear.

* Each time you press [1] key, the Device item is switched between

INTERNAL and CARD2.

INTERNAL: Saves data in the processor.

CARD2: Saves data in CARD2.

To select CARD2, insert the flash memory card, in which data has been saved, into card slot 2 (upper stage).

3 Select the number of the file to be saved, pressing the numeric key.

The Name Input Menu will appear.

4 Use the trackball to select an alphabetic character A-Z or 0-9 shown in the menu and press [ENT] key on your required characters.

A maximum of 8 characters can be entered.

5 Repeat step 4 until the file name to be saved is created, move the cursor to

ENT , and press [ENT] key.

The currently displayed navigation information will be saved.

3

3─96

[V] Erasing navigation information from memory (Erase User Map)

Procedure 1 Press [5] key while the User Map

Setting Menu is open.

2 Press [2] key.

The Erase User Map Menu will appear.

* Each time you press [1] key, the Device item is switched between

INTERNAL and CARD2.

INTERNAL: Erases saved data from the processor.

CARD2: Erases saved data from CARD2.

To select CARD2, insert the flash memory card, in which data has been saved, into card slot 2 (upper stage).

3 Select the number of the file you want to erase, pressing the numeric keys [1] to [5].

The navigation information file will be erased from the memory, and the file name will disappear from the file list.

3─97

3.8 DISPLAY NAVIGATION INFORMATION (NEW INFORMATION DISPLAY) y y y

[VI] Shifting the display position of navigation information to a correct position (Shift)

If the display position of navigation information is incorrect, it can be shifted to the correct position in manual mode.

Procedure 1 Press [7] key while the User Map

Setting Menu is open.

Shift will appear in the CURSOR mode

Procedure

field of software button ② located at the top right corner of the radar display described in

Section 2.3.3, and the navigation information shift mode is activated.

2 Use the trackball to move the pointer to a mark or a point on a NAV line, coastline, or depth contour line, and press [ENT] key.

3 Use the trackball to move the cross cursor mark to the position to which the mark or line is shifted, and press

[ENT] key.

All the marks and lines currently displayed will be shifted to their correct positions.

[VII] Shifting the corrected display position of navigation information back to original (Shift Clear)

1 Press [8] key while the User Map

Setting Menu is open.

The MAP returns to the original position.

3

3─98

3.8.5 Set and Display Geodetic System

To create navigation information, set the geodetic system that is used with the connected navigation equipment.

When navigation information is loaded, the geodetic system used when the navigation information was saved, is displayed. Make sure that the displayed geodetic system is identical to the one used with the navigation equipment. If the two geodetic systems are different, the positions of navigation information on the radar display will be shifted. Therefore, it is important to set the geodetic system of the navigation equipment.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [6] key.

The NAV Information Menu will appear.

2 Press [4] key.

The geodetic system input ten-key screen will appear.

3 Enter the number of the target geodetic system, pressing the numeric keys.

4 The entered geodetic system number can be changed by turning the [MULTI] control.

5 Press [ENT] key.

The entered geodetic system will be determined.

3─99

3.8 DISPLAY NAVIGATION INFORMATION (NEW INFORMATION DISPLAY) y y y

Geodetic System List

No. Name

0 WGS-84

1 WGS-72

2 Japan

5

6

European 1950 (Europe)

Australian geodetic 1966 (Australia)

7 Ordance Survery of Great Britain (England)

8 NAD-83

11

12

13

14

ADINDAN (Etiopia & Sudan)

ARC 1950 (Botswana)

AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1984 (Australia)

BERMUDA 1957 (the Bermudas)

3

21 EUROPEAN (Europe)

22 GEODETIC DATUM 1949 (New Zeland)

23 GUAM 1963 (Guam)

24 HAYFORD (Finland)

25

26

HJORSEY 1955 (Ice land)

INDIAN (India & Nepal)

28

29

KERTAU 1948 (West Malaysia)

L.C.5 ASTRO (Cayman Black Island)

35

36

38

39

40

41

NAPARIMA, BWI (Trinidad & Tobago)

OLD EGYPTIAN (Egypt)

PCO DE LAS NIEVES (Canary)

PROVISIONAL SOUTH AMERICAN 1956 (South America)

PROVISIONAL SOUTH CHILEAN 1963 (South Chile)

PUERTO RICO (Puerto Rico & Virgin Islands)

44

46

47

SANTA BRAZ (San Miguel island & Saint Mary islands)

AMERICAN America)

SOUTHWEST BASE (Faial & Sao Jorge & Pico & Graciosa & Terceira island)

TIMBALAI 1948 (Brunei & East Malaysia)

3─100

3.9

APPLIED

3.9.1 Set Radar Signal Processing (Process Setting)

This function enables the setting of detail information about radar signal processing.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key twice.

Press [2] key.

The Process Setting Menu will appear.

Detail information about radar signal processing can be set by changing the settings of the menu items.

Note: After the settings for radar signal processing are changed, small targets may not be displayed or unwanted waves may not be suppressed. Thus, do not make a significant change in the settings.

[1] Video Latitude

• Select the dynamic range in which receiving signals are to be shown on the radar display.

• Select NORMAL in standard, and WIDE in rainy weather.

• NARROW clearly displays short-range videos when STC is used in manual mode.

NORMAL : Standard setting

WIDE :

The dynamic range varies depending on the actual range:

Short range > long range

Use this mode when rainy weather intensifies unwanted waves.

The dynamic range is about twice as wide as when NORMAL is selected.

SUPER WIDE : Use this mode when rain cloud remain at WIDE mode.

The dynamic range is about twice as wide as when NORMAL is selected.

NARROW : Narrows the dynamic range at short range.

3─101

3.9 APPLIED OPERATIONS y y y

[2] Video Noise Rejection

• This function rejects signals that assumed as noise and clutter in radar videos.

• Select OFF to display radar videos like analog signals.

• Select LEVEL1 or LEVEL2 to suppress noise and clutter.

• Select LEVEL1 or LEVEL2 to superimpose-display the chart.

OFF : Turns off the noise rejection function, and displays all signals.

Targets are popped up from noise and displayed like analog signals.

LEVEL1 : Rejects the signals of definitely unwanted waves (noise and clutter).

When detection of targets or unwanted waves is not definite, the signals are displayed.

When detection of targets is definite, the signals are displayed.

LEVEL2 : Rejects the signals of definitely unwanted waves (noise and clutter).

When detection of targets or unwanted waves is not definite, the signals are rejected.

Only when detection of targets is definite, the signals are displayed.

[3] Auto Dynamic Range Control

• This function automatically controls the dynamic range of radar videos when the AUTO SEA (sea clutter suppression)/AUTO RAIN (rain/snow clutter suppression) mode is used.

• When the AUTO SEA (sea clutter suppression) mode is used, this function improves sensitivity by widening the dynamic range of only areas where sea clutter is strong, and narrowing the dynamic range of areas where sea clutter is not detected.

• When the AUTO RAIN (rain/snow clutter suppression) mode is used, this function improves sensitivity by widening the dynamic range of areas where sea clutter or rain/snow clutter is strong, and narrowing the dynamic range of the other areas.

• Land videos become obscure when the AUTO RAIN clutter suppression mode is used.

OFF : Does not control the dynamic range automatically.

The dynamic range is set in the same manner as when the MANUAL SEA/RAIN clutter suppression mode is used.

ON : Automatically controls the dynamic range. (Standard setting)

[4] Process Switch

• This function sets a specific area and switches the video process mode between the inside and outside of the area.

• In [5] 2nd Process Mode, set the second video process mode for the area outside the boundary.

• In [2] PROCESS of Main Menu , set the first video process mode for the area inside the boundary.

• Sensitivity at a distance can be improved by suppressing near sea clutter through the correlative process.

• There are two methods for setting an area:

OFF : Disables the Process Switching function. (Standard setting)

RANGE FIX : Sets a boundary at a constant range from the center.

Set the boundary range in [6] Process Switch Range.

The specific area turns out to be a circle with the own ship’s position as the center.

AUTO : Automatically sets a specific area.

The area subject to many clutter returns is inside the boundary, and the area less subject to clutter returns is outside the boundary.

3

3─102

[5] 2nd Process Mode

• Set the second video process mode for the outside of a specific area.

• This function is enabled when RANGE FIX or AUTO is selected in [4] Process Switching.

Video process modes

PROC OFF Correlation Off : Select this mode in general.

3 SCAN COREL Correlation Short : Select this mode when many rain/snow clutter returns are detected.

4 SCAN COREL Correlation Medium : Select this mode to highlight targets while suppressing sea clutter returns.

5 SCAN COREL Correlation Long : Select this mode to detect small targets hidden by sea clutter returns.

REMAIN Afterimage Short: Select this mode when own ship yaws wildly.

PEAK HOLD Afterimage Long : Select this mode to detect small targets of which detection probability is low.

[6] Process Switch Range

• Set the boundary range of a specific area.

• This function is enabled when RANGE FIX is selected in [4] Process Switch.

• The specific area turns out to be a circle with the own ship’s position as the center.

• The boundary range can be set in units of 0.1 nm, ranging 0.1 to 25.5 nm.

• After selecting PROC Switch Range, adjust the range using the [MULTI] control.

• When finishing the adjustment, press [ENT] key to determine the video process switching range.

[7] Fast Target Detection

• This function displays fast moving targets that are suppressed in scan-correlative process mode.

• This function is enabled when 3SCAN CORR , 4SCAN CORR , or 5SCAN CORR is selected as the video process mode.

• If unwanted waves remain on the radar display, suppress them by using the [SEA], [RAIN], or

[GAIN] control, or adjusting the interference rejection mode.

OFF : Disables the Fast Target Detection function.

ON : Enables the Fast Target Detection function.

3─103

3.9 APPLIED OPERATIONS y y y

3.9.2 Set Radar Trails (RADAR Trails Setting)

This function enables the setting of detail information about radar trails processing.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key twice.

Press [7] key.

Or, hold down the [TRAILS] key.

The RADAR Tails Setting Menu will appear.

Detail information about radar trails processing can be set by changing the settings of the menu items.

Note: After the settings for radar trails processing are changed, targets’ trails may not be displayed or trails may be plotted with unwanted waves. Thus, do not make a significant change in the settings.

[1] Trails Interval

• Set the trail intervals at which radar trails are displayed.

• Selection items of trail intervals change depending on the setting of maximum value of radar trail display time.

• The Multi-function control is also available for setting.

• For the decision branches of trail interval, see Section 3.5.10 “Display Other Ships' Trails [TRAILS]”.

[2] Trails Mode

• Set the radar trail display mode.

• Each time the button is pressed, you can switch between True and Relative.

• For details on the trail mode, see “Changing Motion Mode of Trails (Trails mode)” in 3.5.10 “Display

Other Ships' Trails [TRAILS].”

[3] Trails REF Level

• Select a radar video level required for plotting radar trails.

• The radar video level increases in order of LEVEL1 → LEVEL2 → LEVEL3 →

LEVEL4 .

• To plot radar trails with unwanted waves, change to a higher level.

• To thin radar trails, change to a higher level.

• If radar trails are plotted in snatches, change to a lower level.

[4] Trails Reduction

• Make a setting for thinning radar trails.

• The effect of thinning increases in order of LEVEL1 → LEVEL2 → LEVEL3 .

• Radar videos do not become obscure because of the thinning of radar trails.

OFF : Disables the Trails Reduction function.

LEVEL1 : Enables the Trails Reduction function. (Effect: Low)

LEVEL2 : Enables the Trails Reduction function. (Effect: Modest)

LEVEL3 : Enables the Trails Reduction function. (Effect: High)

3

3─104

[5] Time/Cont Combine

• This function superimpose-displays time radar trails and continuous radar trails.

• Operators can distinguish time radar trails from continuous radar trails by setting different colors for both types of trails.

OFF : Disables the Time/Cont Combine function.

ON : Enables the Time/Cont Combine function.

[6] Trails Process

• Determine whether to use the video process with radar signals for plotting radar trails.

• When Trails Process is ON , radar trails are never plotted with unwanted waves, but the radar trails of fast moving targets may not be plotted.

• When Trails Process is OFF , radar trails may be plotted with unwanted waves, but the radar trails of fast moving targets are always plotted.

OFF : Disables the Trails Process function.

ON : Enables the Trails Process function.

[7] MAX Interval

• Select the maximum time for displaying radar trails.

• Select Short when short radar trails are often used in bays and the likes.

• Select Super Long when long radar trails are necessary for ocean navigation.

• Medium is for specification between Short and Long .

• Continuous trails are available with all the options.

Short :

Medium :

Long :

Super Long :

[9] NEXT

• The file menu will appear.

Sets 15 minutes as the maximum time for radar trails display.

Sets 30 minutes as the maximum time for radar trails display.

Sets 60 minutes as the maximum time for radar trails display.

Sets 12 hours as the maximum time for radar trails display.

3─105

3.9 APPLIED OPERATIONS y y y

Load and save of the Rdar trails.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key twice.

Press [7] key.

Or, hold down the [TRAILS] key.

Press [9] key.

[1] Loading Trails File

• Presse [1] key.

The saved trail files are displayed.

• Select the file to be loaded

Confirmation warining is displayed.

Select “Yes” for loading.

It takes a few second to be loded.

Note: When the saved trail position is too far from own ship position, the saved trails can not be loaded.

On the standby mode, however, far trail positions can be loaded. In that case, the own ship position is changed to the loaded trail position temporally.

After loading, Range scale, Trails mode (True /

Relative) and Max interval are set to loded settings.

[2] Saving Trails File

• Presse [2] key.

The File Save menu is displayed.

• Using the cusor, enter the file name and click “ENT”

Confirmation warining is displayed.

Select “Yes” for saving.

It takes a few second to be loded.

Note: When the own ship position data are not available, trails can not be saved.

[3] Erasing Trails File

• Presse [3] key.

The saved trail files are displayed.

• Select the file to be erased.

Confirmation warining is displayed.

Select “Yes” for erasing.

Note: Deleted files can not be restored, so Erase files carefully.

3

3─106

Erasing the displayed trails partially.

Erasing the part of the displayed trails by using the cursor as a eraser.

Note: Deleted trails can not be restored, so Erase them carefully.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key twice.

Press [7] key.

Or, hold down the [TRAILS] key.

Press [9] key.

Press [4] key.

z Trail erase menu will appear.

[1] Trails Erase Mode

Press [1] key.

z

Trail erase mode is enabled. z On the mode, cusor is fixed on the menu, and the eraser (white box) is displayed on the own ship positon. z Using the trackball, positon the eraser on the Trail to be deleted.

[2] Trails Erase start

The depth input scre

Size

Press [2] key.

z Trail erase function starts.

Using the track ball, wipe out trails. z Press [2] key again to disable the function temporally.

Press [3] key.

z Eraser size lit is displayed. z Select the size of the eraser.

2x2 : 2x2 pixels

4x4 : 4x4 pixels

8x8 : 8x8 pixels

16x16 : 16x16 pixels

32x32 : 32x32 pixels

3─107

3.9 APPLIED OPERATIONS y y y

3.9.3 Set Cursor (Cursor Setting)

This function enables the setting of detail information about cursor operation and display.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [3] key.

Press [6] key.

The Cursor Setting Menu will appear.

Detail information about cursor operation and display can be set by changing the settings of the menu items.

[1]

EBL/VRM Control CURS

(device for cursor operation)

• This function is switched between ON and OFF of EBL/VRM Control CRUS function

• The trackball is provided as a standard device. If the trackball malfunctions, the cursor can be moved by using the [EBL] control and [VRM] control.

• The cursor moves horizontally when [EBL] is operated, and moves vertically when [VRM] is operated.

• To switch between EBL/VRM operation and cursor operation while ON is selected, hold down the

[EBL] control for 2 seconds.

ON: Cursor is operated using a [EBL] [VRM] control.

OFF: Cursor is operated using a trackball.

[2] Cursor Length

• Set the length of the cross cursor mark on the radar display.

SHORT : Cuts the cross cursor mark in length.

LONG : Makes the cross cursor mark twice as long as when SHORT is selected.

[3] Cursor Pattern

• The type of the cross cursor mark displayed of the display is selected.

: Type 1 is selected for the cross cursor mark 1 displayed in the radar display.

: Type 2 is selected for the cross cursor mark 2 displayed in the radar display.

: Type 3 is selected for the cross cursor mark 1 displayed in the radar display.

: Type 4 is selected for the cross cursor mark 2 displayed in the radar display.

3

3─108

3.9.4 Set Screen(Screen Setting)

This function enables the setting of detail information about screen display.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [4] key.

The Screen Setting Menu will appear.

Detail information about screen display can be set by changing the settings of the menu items.

Graph Display

Press the graph button to see the registered graph.

To register a graph, hold down the graph button or use Graph Panel Setting menu described on the next page.

3─109

3.9 APPLIED OPERATIONS y y y

Graph Settings (Graph Panel Setting)

Set the functions of a graph to be associated with the graph button.

The function shown in the parentheses is prioritized.

Therefore, specify a graph to be displayed while the prioritized function is not active.

1. Panel 1 (Target):

A graph registered here can be displayed while target information is not displayed.

2. Panel 2 (Marker):

A graph registered here can be displayed while the marker function is not in use.

3. Panel 3 (Dir/Dist):

A graph registered here can be displayed while destination information is not displayed.

4. Panel 4 (Cursor/EBL/VRM):

A graph registered here can be displayed while the cursor/EBL/VRM zoom display function is not in use.

5. Panel 5 (Graph):

A graph registered here can be displayed since there are no priority functions to be displayed.

(*) When using a regular graph, first register it in Panel 5 menu.

Numeric NAV INFO

• Select numerical information (Numeric) in graph setting menu to register the Numeric function with the graph button.

• Press the Numeric button to see received navigation information in numerical values.

• Water depth, water temperature, current, wind direction, wind speed, and destination are shown in numerical values.

3

3─110

Wind/Current Graph

• The wind direction and speed display function (Wind) is registered with the graph button when "Wind" is selected in the graph setting menu.

• Press the Wind button to call up numerical values and a graph for the received wind direction and speed information.

DIR/DIST EXP Display

• Cursor, EBL, and VRM values are displayed in a larger font.

• While the cursor is moving within the PPI screen, the cursor information is displayed in a larger font.

• When EBL and VRM are used, values for each marker are displayed in a larger font.

• Information will not be displayed in a larger font while menu is displayed.

Direction and distance zoom display setting

OFF :

ON :

No zoom display.

Zoom display continues for 5 seconds after marker operations end.

Always:ON : Information is always displayed in a larger font.

3─111

3.9 APPLIED OPERATIONS y y y

Depth Graph Display

• The water depth display function (Depth) is registered with the graph button when "Depth" is selected in the graph setting menu.

• Press the Depth button to call up numerical values and a graph for the received water depth information.

Displaying Water Depth Graph (Depth Graph Setting)

• Set the water depth graph display method.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [4] key.

Press [4] key.

The Depth Graph Setting Menu will appear.

Detail information about screen display can be set by changing the settings of the menu items.

3

3─112

Depth Range

• Select the depth range on the water depth graph.

50m : Sets 50 m as the depth range.

100m : Sets 100 m as the depth range.

250m : Sets 250 m as the depth range.

AUTO : Uses the depth range in the DPT sentence included in received data.

Depth range

Time Table

• Select the time range on the water depth graph.

10min : Sets 10 minutes as the time range.

15min : Sets 15 minutes as the time range.

30min : Sets 30 minutes as the time range.

60min : Sets 60 minutes as the time range.

Time range

3─113

3.9 APPLIED OPERATIONS y y y

Water Temperature Display (Temp Graph)

• The water temperature display function (Temp) is registered with the graph button when "Temp" is selected in the graph setting menu.

• Press the Temp button to call up numerical values and a graph for the received water temperature information.

Course Bar Display (Course Bar)

• The course bar display function (Course Bar) is registered with the graph button when "Course Bar" is selected in the graph setting menu.

• Press the Course Bar button to call up numerical values and a graph for the received heading, turning ratio, and steering direction information.

3

3─114

3.9.5 Set Scanner (TXRX Setting)

This function enables the setting of detail information about a scanner

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key twice.

Press [5] key.

The TXRX Setting Menu will appear.

Detail information about antenna operation can be set by changing the settings of the menu items.

[1] PRF Fine Tuning

• Fine-tune the transmitting repetition frequency of the transmitter in the range 90 to 100%.

• If radar’s interference patterns are concentrically displayed, increment or decrement the set value by 3 to 4 in order to heighten the effect of interference rejection.

• The same operation can be performed by pressing the [TX/STBY] key several times.

• One of 32 levels 0-31 can be set.

[2] Jamming

• Use the jamming function to control the transmitting repetition frequency of the transmitter.

• This function is effective when interference patterns caused by radar equipment of the same model do not disappear.

OFF : Disables the jamming function.

ON : Enables the jamming function.

[4] XMIT Repitation FREQ

• Select the operation mode the transmitting repetition frequency of the transmitter.

NORMAL Standard mode: Both appropriate sensitivity and magnetron’s life expectancy are maintained.

ECONOMY Power saving mode: Sensitivity slightly lowers, but the service life of magnetron is prolonged when short pulses are used.

HI POWER High sensitivity mode: Sensitivity improves when long pulses are used, but the service life of magnetron is slightly shortened.

3─115

3.9 APPLIED OPERATIONS y y y

[5] Band Select

• Select band of antenna. This item is effective only when the antenna in connection supports two frequencies.

X-Band : Selects the X-band side from the two frequencies.

S-Band : Selects the S-band side from the two frequencies.

X/S-band : Supports the two frequencies.

Note: This function is not functioning now. The function is for future use.

3

3─116

3.9.6 Set Chart Display (Map Setting)

This function enables the setting of detail information about chart display.

Setting JRC/ERC Chart Display (JRC/ERC Setting)

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key twice.

Press [9] key.

Press [5] key.

Or, hold down the [Map] key.

Sea chart menu (Map Setting) opens.

2 Press [3] key.

The JRC/ERC Setting Menu will appear.

Detail information about the colors and brilliance of JRC/ERC chart display can be set by changing the settings of the menu items.

The data of colors and brilliance can be stored for each day/night mode.

[1] Day/Night

• Select a desired display mode before setting the colors and brilliance of chart display.

• There are four selection items: DAY1 , DAY2 , DUSK , and NIGHT .

[2] Color of Land

• Select the color of land display.

• There are four selection items: BROWN , YELLOW , GREEN , and WHITE .

[3] Bright of Land

• Select the brilliance of land display.

• There are three selection items: LOW , MEDIUM , and HIGH .

[4] Color of Sea

• Select the color of sea display.

• There are four selection items: GRAY , CYAN , BLUE , and GREEN .

Note: This function is available on the plotter mode only.

3─117

3.9 APPLIED OPERATIONS y y y

[5] Bright of Sea

• Select the brilliance of sea display.

• There are four selection items: OFF , LOW , MEDIUM , and HIGH .

Note: This function is available on the plotter mode only.

[6] Color of Name

• Select the color of a location name.

• There are eight selection items: BLACK , WHITE , CYAN , BLUE , GREEN ,

YELLOW , PINK , and RED .

[7] Bright of Name

• Select the brilliance of location name display.

• There are four selection items: OFF , LOW , MEDIUM , and HIGH .

[8] Bright of Track/Mark/Line

• Select the brilliance of track, mark and line..

• There are four selection items: LEVEL1 , LEVEL2 , LEVEL3 , and LEVEL4 .

[9] Next Page

• Moves to the next page.

• The next page of the JRC/ERC Setting Menu will appear.

[1] LAT/LON Line

• Select the mode to display latitude and longitude lines.

• There are two selection items:

LINE NUM : Displays both latitude/longitude lines and values indicating the latitude and longitude.

NUM : Displays only the values indicating the latitude and longitude.

[2] Color of L/L Line

• Select the colors that are to represent latitude and longitude lines.

• There are eight selection items:

BLACK , WHITE , CYAN , BLUE , GREEN ,

YELLOW , PINK , and RED .

3

3─118

[3] Bright of L/L Line

• Select the brilliance of latitude/longitude line display.

• There are four selection items: OFF , LOW , MEDIUM , and HIGH .

[4] ERC Display Request

• Display of the information within ERC can be switched between ON and OFF .

• There are two selection items: ON , and OFF .

On : Data in the ERC is displayed.

Off : Data in the ERC is not displayed.

[5] ERC Mark

• Select the size of mark display on the ERC chart.

• There are two slection items: NORMAL and SMALL .

Normal : The ERC mark is displayed in normal size.

Small : The ERC mark is displayed in a size smaller than normal.

[6] JRC Card Display

• Sets the display contents of the JRC card.

• The JRC Card Display Setting Menu will appear.

[1] Light House

• Determine whether to display lighthouses.

• There are two selection items: ON and OFF .

On : Light houses are displayed.

Off : Light houses are not displayed.

[2] Buoy

• Determine whether to display buoys.

• There are two selection items: ON and OFF .

On : Buoys are displayed.

Off : Buoys are not displayed.

[3] Rough Line

• Determine whether to display rough lines.

• There are two selection items: ON and OFF .

On : Rough lines are displayed.

Off : Rough lines are not displayed.

3─119

3.9 APPLIED OPERATIONS y y y

[4] Other Line

• Determine whether to display other lines.

• There are two selection items: ON and OFF .

On : Other lines are displayed.

Off : Other lines are not displayed.

Setting Contour Lines on Chart (Contour Setting)

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key twice.

Press [9] key.

Press [5] key.

Or, hold down the [Map] key.

Sea chart menu (Map Setting) opens.

2 Press [4] key.

JRC depth contour display menu (Contour

Setting) opens.

Depths and display colors can be set for 9 contour lines in total: 8 for depth specification

3 Select the number of depth to be changed, pressing the numeric key.

and 1 for other depths.

4 Select the number to be set, pressing the numeric key.

The depth input screen will appear. Enter the value as the depth to be set.

Subsequently, the display line list will appear.

The selected color to represent the contour lines of the depth will be set.

To change the settings of other depths, repeat steps 3 and 4.

3

3─120

Set C-MAP Display

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [9] key.

The Plot Menu will appear.

2 Press [5] key.

Or, hold down the [Map] key.

The MAP Setting Menu will appear.

3 Press [2] key.

The C-MAP Setting Menu will appear.

[1] Grid Display

• Sets whether or not latitudinal longitudinal lines are displayed with C-MAP.

• Each time you press [1] key, the grid display item is switched between ON and OFF.

• ON: Displayed

OFF: Not displayed

[2] Sounding Display

• Sets whether or not soundings values are displayed with C-MAP.

• Each time you press [2] key, the souding display item is switched between ON and OFF.

• ON: Displayed

OFF: Not displayed

[3] Sounding Unit

• Sets the units when soundings values are displayed with C-MAP.

• Press [3] key to display a list of units.

• 1: FEET

2: FATHOM

3: METERS

You can select one from the above three items. Select the item you want to set, pressing the numeric keys

[1] to [3].

[4] Light Sectors Display

• Sets whether or not the light sectors are displayed.

• Each time you press [4] key, the light sectors display item is switched between ON and OFF.

• ON: Displayed

OFF: Not displayed

3─121

3.9 APPLIED OPERATIONS y y y

[5] Light Sectors Level

• Sets levels when light sectors are displayed with C-MAP.

• Press [5] key to display a list of levels.

• Selects one from level settings A to H.

[6] Chart Boundaries

• Sets whether or not the Chart Boundaries are displayed.

• Each time you press [6] key, the function is switched between ON and OFF.

• ON: Displayed

OFF: Not displayed

[7] Buoy and Beacon

• Sets display style of the buoy and beacon.

• Press [7] key to display a list of display style.

1: OFF

2: INTER NATIONAL : The style based on the official paper chart presentation.

3:United States

4: SIMPLIFIED

: The style based on the NOAA paper chart.

: Simplified style display.

[8] Geographical Names

• Sets whether or not the geographical names are displayed.

• Each time you press [8] key, the geographical name is switched between ON and OFF.

• ON: Displayed

OFF: Not displayed

[9] NEXT

• Going to Next page.

• Another C-MAP setting menu is displayed..

3

3─122

[1] Land Marks

• Sets whether or not the Land Marks are displayed.

• Each time you press [8] key, the Land Marks is switched between ON and OFF.

• ON: Displayed

OFF: Not displayed

[2] Rivers and Lakes

• Sets whether or not the Inland waters are displayed.

• Each time you press [8] key, the Rivers and Lakes is switched between ON and OFF.

• ON: Displayed

OFF: Not displayed

[3] Cultural Features

• Sets whether or not the cultural features are displayed.

• Each time you press [8] key, the Cultural features is switched between ON and OFF.

• ON: Displayed

OFF: Not displayed

[4] Sea bottom types

• Sets whether or not the types of the seabed are displayed.

• Each time you press [8] key, the Sea bottom type is switched between ON and OFF.

• ON: Displayed

OFF: Not displayed

[5] Under water rocks etc.

• Sets whether or not the rocks, obstructions etc are displayed.

• Each time you press [8] key, the Under water is switched between ON and OFF.

• ON: Displayed

OFF: Not displayed

[7] Depth Contours.

• Sets whether or not the Depth Contours are displayed.

• Each time you press [7] key, the Depth Contours is switched between ON and OFF.

• ON: Displayed

OFF: Not displayed

3─123

3.9 APPLIED OPERATIONS y y y

Correcting Chart Position (Map Display Setting)

Procedure

Caution

When the chart position is corrected, the display will be shifted away from the actual position. With this in mind, navigate your ship with attention to the surroundings.

Otherwise, this may cause accidents.

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Press [9] key.

Press [5] key.

Or, hold down the [Map] key.

Sea chart menu (Map Setting) opens.

2 Press [5] key.

The Map Display Setting Menu will appear.

There are three methods for correcting the chart position.

[1] Shift Coast Line 1

Set the correction value by operating the cursor.

1 Press [1] key while the Map Display Setting Menu is open.

The chart display position correction 1 (Shift Coast Line 1) is set.

2 Move the cursor to the chart on which a position is to be corrected, and press [ENT] key.

3 Move the cursor to the radar video of which position is to be corrected, and press [ENT] key.

SETTING (correcting) will be indicated for Shift Coast Line 1.

At this time, MAP SHIFT will appear at software button ⑪ located at the bottom right corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.4, indicating that the position is being corrected.

Note: A correction value can be operated in the range -9.999’ to +9.999’.

3

3─124

Cancellation of Shift Coast Line 1

1 Press [1] key while the MAP Display Setting Menu is open.

DELETE (no correction) will be indicated for Shift Coast Line 1.

At this time, MAP SHIFT will disappear from software button ⑪ located at the bottom right corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.4.

[2] Shift Coast Line 2

Set a correction value pressing the numeric values.

A correction value can be entered in the range -9.999’ to +9.999’.

1 Press [2] key while the Map Display Setting Menu is open.

The latitude / longitude input screen for the Shift Coast Line2 menu will appear.

2 Enter the correction value for the latitudinal direction, pressing the numeric keys.

To switch between the north and south, turn the [MULTI] control.

3 Press [ENT] key.

The correction value for the latitudinal direction will be determined.

4 Enter the correction value for the longitudinal direction, pressing the numeric keys.

To switch between the east and west, turn the [MULTI] control.

5 Press [ENT] key.

The correction value for the longitudinal direction will be determined.

At this time, MAP SHIFT will appear at software button ⑪ located at the bottom right corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.4, indicating that the position is being corrected.

Cancellation of Shift Coast Line 2

1 Press [2] key while the MAP Display Setting Menu is open.

The chart position correction value input screen will appear.

2 Press [0] key, and then [ENT] key.

The correction value for the latitudinal direction will be set to 0.

3 Press [0] key, and then [ENT] key.

The correction value for the longitudinal direction will be set to 0.

At this time, MAP SHIFT will disappear from software button ⑪ located at the bottom right corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.4.

3─125

3.9 APPLIED OPERATIONS y y y

[3] LAT/LON Correction

This method corrects a chart position by changing the values of latitude and longitude that are sent by the navigation equipment.

Only our service engineers are to use this correction method because the contents of data such as trails data to be saved are changed when the method is used.

A correction value can be entered in the range -9.999’ to +9.999’.

1 Press [3] while the MAP Display Setting Menu is open.

The latitude / longitude input screen for the LAT/LON Correction menu will appear.

2 Enter the correction value for the latitudinal direction, pressing the numeric keys.

To switch between the north and south, turn the [MULTI] control.

3 Press [ENT] key.

The correction value for the latitudinal direction will be determined.

4 Enter the correction value for the longitudinal direction, pressing the numeric keys.

To switch between the east and west, turn the [MULTI] control.

5 Press [ENT] key.

The correction value for the longitudinal direction will be determined.

Cancellation of LAT/LON Correction

1 Press [3] key while the MAP Display Setting Menu is open.

The latitude/longitude correction value input screen will appear.

2 Press [0] key, and then [ENT] key.

The correction value for the latitudinal direction will be set to 0.

3 Press [0] key, and then [ENT] key.

The correction value for the longitudinal direction will be set to 0.

3

3─126

[4] MAP Center Position

This method corrects a chart position by entering the values of latitude and longitude at own ship’s position in manual mode.

If latitude and longitude data sent by the navigation equipment has been entered, the data has priority over the manually entered values.

1 Press [4] key while the MAP Display Setting Menu is open.

The latitude / longitude input screen for the Map Center Position menu will appear.

2 Enter the value as latitudinal, pressing the numeric keys.

To switch between the north latitude and south latitude, turn the [MULTI] control.

3 Press [ENT] key.

The entered value will be determined as latitude.

4 Enter the value as longitude, pressing the numeric keys.

To switch between the east longitude and west longitude, turn the [MULTI] control.

5 Press [ENT] key.

The entered value will be determined as longitude.

Note: The function is available in the plotter mode only.

3─127

3.9 APPLIED OPERATIONS y y y

3.9.7 Set LORAN C (LORAN C Correction)

Note: Plotter option (NDB-34A) is necessary to enable LORAN C time difference display.

Setting LORAN C

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key twice.

Press [9] key.

Press [5] key.

Press [5] key.

Press [5] key.

The LORAN C Correction Menu will appear.

The chain and time difference for LORAN C time difference display can be set by changing the settings of the menu items.

[1] Chain

• Set the chain.

• Enter the value in the range 0000 to 9999 by using the numeric keys.

• Only a value in the table can be entered.

[2] TD1, [3] TD2

• Enter the TD value for slave station 1/2.

[4] TD1 Correction, [5] TD2 Correction

• Enter the sound velocity time correction value for the TD value of slave station 1/2.

3

3─128

3.10

USE FUNCTION SWITCH [FUNC]

“Radar Function Setting” is provided for always obtaining the best radar video by storing complex radar signal processing settings in the optimum status by use, and calling the setting in accordance with the conditions for using the function.

Functions are factory-set for general use, and the settings can be fine adjusted by operating the menu.

Four function modes are available, and they are factory-set as follows:

Function 1: COAST Useful for observing short-range videos

Function 2: DEEP SEA Suitable for general ocean navigation

Function 3: FISH NET Useful for small target.

Function 4: STORM Useful for observing videos in stormy weather

3.10.1 Operation Procedure

Calling a Function

Procedure 1 Press the [FUNC] key.

Each time the [FUNC] key is pressed, the selection changes cyclically as follows:

Function Off

→ Function 1 → Function 2 → Function 3 → Function 4 → Function Off

The currently called function mode will be indicated at the lower left of the radar display.

* Switching can be done each time software button ⑤ located at the bottom left corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.2 is pressed.

Changing Function Setting (temporary change)

• When radar signal processing setting is changed by using the menu or button on the radar display while function 1 to 4 is called, the change is temporarily reflected to the operating state.

• Since this method does not change the memory contents, the new setting is deleted as soon as another function is called.

• When the previous function is called again, operation is performed according to the memory contents.

Changing Function Setting (memory contents change)

• To change the memory contents of functions 1 to 4, use the function setting menu.

• To display the function setting menu, press [RADAR MENU] twice, [1] key, and then [8] key.

• Press the numeric key corresponding to the target function number.

• The function setting menu consists of five pages. To switch between the pages, select [0] key

Previous Page or [9] key Next Page.

3─129

3.10 USE FUNCTION SWITCH y y y

3.10.2 Function Setting Menu Items

The function setting menu has the items below.

Page 1

1. Mode

2. IR

Name of the mode to be used

Radar interference rejection

3. Process

4. Target Enhance

5. Auto STC/FTC

Video process

Automatic clutter suppression

6. Save Present State Saving of the present state

OFF/LOW/MEDIUM/HIGH

OFF/・・・・

OFF/AUTO SEA/AUTO RAIN

Page 2

1. Pulse Length 0.75nm Standard pulse length of 0.75 nm range

2. Pulse Length 1.5nm

3. Pulse Length 3/4nm

4. Pulse Length 6/8nm

5. Pulse Length 12nm

Standard pulse length of 1.5 nm range

Standard pulse length of 3 nm range

Standard pulse length of 6 nm range

Standard pulse length of 12 nm range

Standard pulse length of 16 nm range 6. Pulse Length 16nm

Page 3

SP1/MP1

SP1/MP1/LP2

MP1/MP2/LP1

MP2/LP1/LP2

MP2/LP1/LP2

MP2/LP1/LP2

1. Video Latitude

3. Auto DR Control

4. Process Switch

5. 2nd Process Mode

Dynamic range of radar video

2. Video Noise Rejection Radar video noise rejection

Automatic dynamic range control

Radar video process switching

Second video process mode

6. Process Switch Range Video process switching range

7. Fast Target Detection Fast moving target detection

NORMAL/WIDE/NARROW

WIDE

OFF/LEVEL1/LEVEL2

OFF/ON

OFF/RANGE FIX/AUTO

OFF/・・・・

Range setting

OFF/ON

Page 4

1. Trails Interval

2. Trails Mode

3. Trails REF Level

4. Trails Reduction

5. Time/Cont Combine

6. Trails Process

7. Max Interval

Radar trails length

Radar trails mode

Radar trails plotting threshold

Thinning of radar trails

Superimpose-display of time radar trails and continuous radar trails

Radar trails video process

OFF/・・・・

TRUE/RELATIVE

LEVEL1-4

OFF/LEVEL1-3

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

Maximum time for radar trails display

SHORT/MEDIUM/LONG/SUPER LONG

3

Page 5

1. Gain Offset Sensitivity correction Correction value setting

2. XMIT Repetition FREQ Transmitting repetition frequency NORMAL/ECONOMY/HIPOWER

3. Small Buoy Detection

4. Fishnet Detection

5. Antenna Height

Small target detection mode

Fishnet detection mode

Antenna height

OFF/ON

OFF/ON

DEFAULT/-5m/5-10m/10-20m/20m

3─130

3.10.3 Overview of Function Operations

The following outlines the operation of each function selected from the function setting menu:

Procedure 1 Press the [FUNC] key for 2 seconds.

The User Function Setting menu will appear.

Specify the number for the function for which the settings are to be changed.

The following are the operation overviews of each function setting item.

[Page 1] [1] MODE (Mode)

• Selects the function name to be indicated at the lower left of the radar display when the function is selected.

• When the setting is changed back to the factory setting, the initial value of the selected mode is called.

• The following 11 modes are provided:

COAST: Use this mode to monitor a relatively short range, for example, bays and coasts where many boats and ships are running. (Importance is attached to resolution.)

DEEPSEA: Use this mode to monitor a relatively long range, for example, the open sea.

(Importance is attached to long-range sensitivity.)

FISHNET: Use this mode to detect small targets such as fishnets of round haul netters hidden by sea clutter returns. (Importance is attached to sea clutter suppression, and sensitivity to moving targets lowers.)

STORM: Use this mode when many rain/snow clutter returns or sea clutter returns are

CALM: detected in stormy weather. (Importance is attached to rain/snow clutter and sea clutter suppression, and sensitivity slightly lowers.)

Use this mode when only a few rain/snow clutter returns or sea clutter returns are

RAIN:

BIRD:

LONG:

BUOY:

USER1:

USER2: detected.

Use this mode when sea clutter is not strong but rain/snow clutter is strong.

(Importance is attached to rain/snow clutter suppression, and sensitivity slightly lowers.)

Use this mode to detect tens of seabirds at low altitude during coastal navigation or hundreds of seabirds at high altitude during ocean navigation.

Use this mode to detect small targets at relatively long distance in the open sea.

Use this mode to detect small targets like radio buoys in areas outside the sea clutter area. (This mode displays targets of which detection probability is low.)

General mode used when the nine modes above are not applicable

General mode used when the nine modes above are not applicable

[Page 1] [2] IR (radar interference rejection)

• Same function as IR in the Main Menu

[Page 1] [3] Process (video process)

• Same function as PROCESS in the Main Menu

[Page 1] [4] Target Enhance

• Same function as TARGET ENHANCE in the Main Menu

3─131

3.10 USE FUNCTION SWITCH y y y

[Page 1] [5] Auto SEA/RAIN (Auto STC/FTC)

• Detects unwanted waves such as rain/snow clutter and sea clutter and automatically suppresses them.

• When the sea state or weather changes, this function automatically performs suppression processing in accordance with the situation.

• Suppression processing is not full automatic, and requires the operator to control the afterimages of unwanted waves.

• To control the afterimage of sea clutter, use the [SEA] control.

• To control the afterimage of rain/snow clutter, use the [RAIN] control.

• In areas where the density of unwanted waves is low, unwanted waves may remain being judged as targets. Thus, use the automatic clutter suppression mode together with the video process mode.

• Characteristics of the automatic clutter suppression function:

OFF: Disables the automatic clutter suppression function.

Select OFF when rain/snow clutter and sea clutter are not strong or when the ship is in a bay.

AUTO SEA: Automatically detects the strength of sea clutter, and performs the most suitable sea clutter suppression processing.

Even when the strength of sea clutter varies depending on the wind direction,

AUTO SEA performs the most suitable suppression processing.

Land like islands can be displayed naturally.

Since rain clouds outside sea clutter areas are recognized as land, there is no effect of suppressing rain/snow clutter.

AUTO RAIN: Along with AUTO SEA, AUTO RAIN automatically detects the strength of rain/snow clutter, and performs the most suitable rain/snow clutter suppression processing.

When rain clouds are scattered about, AUTO RAIN performs rain/snow clutter suppression processing for only the rain-cloud areas.

Since land is recognized as rain clouds, land videos become obscure.

[Page 2] [1]-[7] PL (Pulse Width)

• Sets the standard transmitter pulse length in each range.

• When the range is called, the pulse range is used.

[Page 3] [1]-[7] Radar signal processing settings (Process Setting)

• Same functions as those in the Process Setting Menu generally used

[Page 4] [1]-[7] Radar trails settings (Trails Setting)

• Same functions as in the Trails Setting of the RADAR Menu generally used

3

3─132

[Page 5] [1] Gain Offset

• Corrects sensitivity while the function mode is called.

• Since the displayed noise level varies depending on the combination of the video process mode and the interference rejection level, sensitivity needs fine adjustment for always obtaining the highest level.

• The sensitivity correction function saves the correction value set by the sensitivity control in each function mode, so it can obtain the highest sensitivity without the sensitivity control being operated when the function mode is changed.

• To set high sensitivity, set a value on the “+” side.

• To set low sensitivity, set a value on the “-” side.

• When the radar interference rejection level is increased, the noise level is lowered. Thus, set a sensitivity correction value to the “+” side.

• When the video process mode 3SCAN CORR, 4SCAN CORR, or 5SCAN CORR is used, the noise level is lowered. Thus, set a sensitivity correction value to the “+” side.

• When the video process mode REMAIN or PEAK HOLD is used, noise is hard to disappear. Thus, set a sensitivity correction value to the “-” side.

[Page 5] [2] XMIT Repetition FREQ.

• Same function as in the TXRX Setting of the RADAR Menu generally used

[Page 5] [3] Small Buoy Detection

• Reduces the loss of signal processing during detection of small targets.

OFF: Activates the general signal processing mode.

ON: Activates the small buoy detection mode that reduces the loss of signal processing.

[Page 5] [4] Fishnet Detection

• Use this mode to detect small targets hidden by sea clutter returns.

• This function becomes more effective when the AUTO RAIN clutter suppression function is used together.

OFF: Activates the general signal processing mode.

ON: Activates the fishnet detection mode.

[Page 5] [5] Antenna Height

• Set the height of radar antenna above sea level.

• The STC/FTC curve is changed.

-5m : Set the antenna height under 5m.

5-10m : Set the antenna height 5m to 10m.

10-20m : Set the antenna height 10m to 20m.

20m- : Set the antenna height over 20m.

3─133

3.10 USE FUNCTION SWITCH y y y

3.10.4 Overview of Stored Function Setting Data

The overview of stored function setting data is as follows:

• Factory-set data: Stored data that general operation cannot change

• Default data: Standard data of each function mode that users can change

• Data that can be called: Stored data that can be called by pressing the [FUNC] key

Function Setting

Factory-set data

COAST

DEEPSEA

FISHNET

STORM

CALM

RAIN

BIRD

Function Setting

Default data

COAST

DEEPSEA

FISHNET

Function Setting

Data that can be called

[5]-[7]

[FUNC]

[1]-[7]

LONG

BUOY

USER1

USER2

STORM

CALM

RAIN

BIRD

LONG

BUOY

USER1

USER2

FUNC1

FUNC2

FUNC3

FUNC4

Current data

PRESENT

3

[Page 1] [1] Call Mode

• Calls the standard setting of the mode, and stores it for the function number.

[Page 1] [6] Save Present State

• The currently operating state can be stored for the function number.

• Use this function to store the state of good setting that will be frequently used.

[Page 5] [7] Save Default of Mode

• Stores the setting of the current function number, as the default setting of the mode.

[Page 5] [8] Initialization

• Changes the memory contents of the mode, which is used with the current function number, back to the factory setting.

3─134

3.10.5 Personal Information (PIN Setting)

The operation status of the radar is recorded. If the system is operated by more than one operator, the operators can register operation status as suitable for them and call the status. Operation status for up to five operations can be registered, and a name can be assigned to each status. (Up to 10 alphanumeric characters)

* Data stored as personal information

• Day/Night mode setting

• Brilliance

• Alarm volume

• Vector length/mode

• Various types of image processing (IR, ENH, PROC, FUNC)

[1] Calling Operation Status (Load PIN Data)

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key twice.

Press [8] key.

The Radar Sub Menu will appear.

2 Press [1] key.

The PIN Setting Menu will appear.

3 Press [1] key.

The Load PIN Data Menu will appear.

4 Select the item you want to load, pressing the numeric keys [1] to [5].

The Load Execution Check Menu will appear.

Select “Yes” for loading.

Exit 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The Target Information Display Menu will reappear.

3─135

3.10 USE FUNCTION SWITCH y y y

[II] Saving Operation Status (Save PIN Data)

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key twice.

Press [8] key.

The Radar Sub Menu will appear.

2 Press [1] key.

The PIN Setting Menu will appear.

3 Press [2] key.

The Save PIN Data Menu will appear.

4 Select the number corresponding to the place where you want to save status, pressing the numeric keys [1] to

[5].

The Code Input Menu will appear.

5 Using numeric key, enter the name and then press [ENT] key.

Data will be saved with the entered name.

Exit 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The Target Information Display Menu will reappear.

3

3─136

[III] Erasing Registered Operation Status (Delete PIN Data)

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key twice.

Press [8] key.

The Radar Sub Menu will appear.

2 Press [1] key.

The PIN Setting Menu will appear.

3 Press [3] key.

The Delete PIN Data Menu will appear.

4 Select the file you want to erase, pressing the numeric keys [1] to [5].

The Delete Execution Check Menu will appear.

Select “Yes” for deletion.

Exit 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The Target Information Display Menu will reappear.

3─137

3.11 USING CARD y y y

3.11

USING

This radar has two card slots. Inserting a flash memory card (option) into a card slot, you can save the following contents, saved in the processor, in the card or can read data from the card to the processor.

• Trails of own ship: 7000 points maximum

• Track of other ship: 20 target×1500 points (TT option)

• Mark Line: 20000 points maximum (plotter option)

• Waypoint: 99 points maximum (plotter option)

• Route: 10 routes maximum (plotter option)

These pieces of information can be saved in a flash memory card as a file. The internal capacity is as large as only a file. An internally created file can be saved until the flash memory card is full.

Caution

3

Compact Flash Cards can be used with this system. The following shows the recommendations in use. However they do not guarantee that CF cards may properly work with this system. Depending on the hardware or software, the cards will not work correctly.

Any damage including loss of data caused by using the data created on this system is out of warranty.

Important files should be backed up therefore.

Recommendations on using CF cards.

Recommended card size.

64 MB, 128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB, 1GB.

Recommended file system.

The Compact card should be formatted to FAT32 in Windows XP (SP2).

Many CF cards are formatted to FAT16 before shipping. Be sure to Format the CF card

to FAT32, before use.

Recommended OS.

Windows XP (SP2).

Operating temperature range

Depending on the CF card specification and the radar specification, -15 to +55 degree Celsius.

3─138

Caution in use.

Never eject the CF card while files are being written to the card.

Turn the power off before inserting or ejecting a CF card.

3.11.1 Save in and Transfer to Card (MEM CAPA/Copy)

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key twice.

The Radar Menu will appear.

2 Press [9] key.

The Plot Menu will appear.

* Software button ④ located at the operation/message area in

Section 2.3.9 is also available to save and transfer data.

3 Press [6] key.

The MEM CAPA/Copy window will appear.

3─139

3.11 USING CARD y y y

• Information saved in the processor is displayed in the Memory Content.

Total:

Track:

Total number of data points

Number of data points for own ship's track (7000 points maximum)

Remain: Number of remaining data points of own ship's track that can be saved

Mark/Line: Number of mark and line points made with user map (20000 points maximum only when a plotter option is installed)

Remain: Number of remaining data points of marks and lines that can be saved

WPT: Number of data points of created waypoints (99 points maximum)

Remain: Remaining waypoints that can be saved

Route: Number of data points of created routes (10 routes maximum)

Remain: Remaining routes that can be saved

• File names and information saved in the card is displayed in Card 2.

• Arrows next to Card 2 are used to scroll the contents of Card 2.

Range +/- keys can be used to scroll also.

• Numeric key is used to give a file name.

3

3─140

[I] Copy Internal Information to Card 2 (Copy Internal

Card 2)

Procedure 1 Press [1] key while the CAPA/Copy Menu is open.

The items to be saved are displayed.

2 Using the numeric key, select a item to be saved.

A file name to copy Internal information to Card 2 can be entered.

3 Using the numeric key, enter a file name.

After enter a file name, select ENT.CLR will be cancelled.

The system writes internal information into Card 2 with an entered number used as a file name.

The capacity of information that can be saved in the internal portion is limited to the maximum number of points in items described on the previous page. For the capacity of information that can be saved in a card, the system can save information in a card until the card capacity is filled with a file, counting the information saved in the internal portion as a file.

3─141

3.11 USING CARD y y y

[II] Read Information from Card 2 to Internal Portion(Copy Card 2

Internal)

Procedure 1 Press [2] key while the CAPA/Copy Menu is open.

2 Using the numeric key, select ADD mode or OVER WRITE mode.

A file name to copy information from Internal portion to Card 2 can be entered.

Read the file name displayed in the Card 2 window.

3 Using the numeric key, enter a file name.

After having enter the name, select ENT.CLR will be cancelled.

The entered file name is read from Card 2 to the internal portion.

When information is to be transferred from Card 2 to the internal portion in the ADD mode, the information can be copied from multiple files. However, information cannot be read when the number of points for an item has reached the maximum. In the ADD mode, the WPT and Route are overwritten.

3

3─142

[III] Copy Information from Card 1 to Card 2 (Copy Card 1

Card 2)

Procedure 1 Press [3] key while the CAPA/Copy Menu is open.

A file name to copy information from Card 1 to Card 2 can be entered.

2 Using the numeric key, enter a file name.

Using the numeric key, euter a file name to be copied.

After having enter the name, select ENT. CLR will be cancelled.

3 Using the numeric key, enter a file name to copy.

After having enter the name, select ENT.CLR will be cancelled.

The entered file number is copied from Card 1 to Card 2.

3─143

3.11 USING CARD y y y

[IV] Delete File from Card 2 (Clear File)

Procedure 1 Press [4] key while the CAPA/Copy Menu is open.

A file name to clear file can be entered.

2 Using the numeric key, enter a file name.

After having enter the name, select ENT.CLR will be cancelled.

The entered file number is deleted from Card 2.

[VI, VII] View Information in Card (Show Card)

Procedure 1 Press [7] or [8] key while the CAPA/Copy Menu is open.

7: Card slot 1

8: Card slot 2

Select a card to be displayed.

Exit 1 Press [0] key.

The MEM CAPA/Copy window will be closed.

3

3─144

3.11.2 Erase/Initialize Card Memory (CLR MEM/INIT Card)

Erase saved information from inside the processor.

[I] Erase Mark/Line (CLR Mark/Line Data)

Erase saved mark/line from inside the processor.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key twice.

The Radar Menu will appear.

2 Press [9] key.

The Plot Menu will appear.

3 Press [7] key.

The CLR MEM/INT Menu will appear.

4 Press [1] key.

A window will appear to select whether or not marks/lines should be erased.

1. Erased

2: Cancel

3─145

3.11 USING CARD y y y

[II] Erase Waypoint/Route (CLR WPT/Route Data)

Erase saved WPT/Route from inside the processor.

Procedure

Procedure

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key twice.

[III] Initialize Card 2 (Format Card 2)

Initialize Card 2.

The Radar Menu will appear.

2 Press [9] key.

The Plot Menu will appear.

3 Press [7] key.

The CLR MEM INIT Card Menu will appear.

4 Press [2] key.

The Waypoint/Route Erase Execution window will appear.

1. Erase

2: Cancel

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key twice.

The Radar Menu will appear.

2 Press [9] key.

The Plot Menu will appear.

3 Press [7] key.

The CLR MEM INIT Card Menu will appear.

4 Press [3] key.

The window to select whether or not Card 2 is initialized will appear.

1. Initialize

2: Cancel

3

3─146

3─147

SECTION 4

MEASUREMENT OF

RANGE AND BEARING

4.1 MEASUREMENT USING THE CURSOR WITH THE TRACKBALL . 4-1

4.2 MEASUREMENT BY RANGE RINGS................................................ 4-2

BY

4.4 MEASUREMENT BETWEEN TWO OPTIONAL POINTS.................. 4-4

4.1

MEASUREMENT USING THE CURSOR

WITH THE TRACKBALL

Procedure 1 Check the target echoes on the radar display.

2 Move the cursor mark to a target by the trackball.

The CURSOR on the radar display indicates the bearing and range of the target.

The range is a distance from own ship’s position.

CURSOR ( )

TRUE 45.0

°: True bearing of the cursor relative to own ship

5.0nm: Range between the cursor and own ship

REL 45.0

°:

Relative bearing of the cursor relative to own ship

Figure 4.1

4─1

4.2 MEASUREMENT BY RANGE RINGS

4.2

MEASUREMENT BY RANGE RINGS

Procedure 1 Press [RR/HL] key.

Display and non-display of the scale of the range rings is switched every time the

[RR/HL] key is pressed. Also, the scale unit is shown on the Range rings display On /

Off button (Software button ② located at the top left corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.1).

Assess the distance to the target based on the location of the target on the range ring scale.

To change brilliance of the range rings scale, refer to Section 3.3.5 “Adjust Brilliance of

Information on Radar Display (Brilliance Setting).”

4

4─2

4.3

MEASUREMENT BY EBLS AND VRMS

Procedure 1 Press [EBL1] key to select EBL1 display and operation.

The EBL1 indication at the upper right of the radar display will be selected and the

EBL1 will appear as a broken-line on the PPI display.

2 Turn the [EBL] control to put EBL1 on a target.

The bearing of the EBL1 will appear at the upper right of the radar display. The EBL1 bearing represents the target’s bearing.

3 Press [VRM1] key to select VRM1 display and operation.

The VRM1 indication at the upper right of the radar display will be selected and the

VRM1 will appear as a broken-line circle on the PPI display.

4 Move the broken-line VRM1 to the target by using the [VRM] control.

The range of the VRM1 from own ship will appear at the upper right of the radar display. The range of VRM1 signifies a distance between the target and own ship.

Refer to Figure 4.2.

Figure 4.2

4─3

4.4 MEASUREMENT BETWEEN TWO OPTIONAL POINTS

4.4

MEASUREMENT BETWEEN TWO

OPTIONAL POINTS

Procedure 1 Press [EBL2] key to select EBL2 display and operation.

The EBL2 indication at the upper right of the radar display will be selected and the

EBL2 will appear as a dotted-line on the PPI display.

2 Place the cursor over the .

button of EBL2 at the top right corner of the radar screen, and press the [ENT] key.

The EBL cursor mode changes between C and D every time the button is pressed.

Select C .

3 Using the trackball, move the starting point of EBL2 to one (A) of the two points and press [ENT] key.

(See Figure 4.3.)

4 Turn the [EBL] control to move EBL2 to the other point (B).

(See Figure 4.3.)

5 Press [VRM2] key to select VRM2 display and operation.

{ (VRM marker) will appear on a dotted-line of the EBL2.

6 Using the [VRM] control, move the VRM2 marker on a dotted-line of EBL2 to the point B.

The bearing and range between the two points will appear in the VRM2 and EBL2 area on the lower right of the radar display.

4

4─4

Figure 4.3

It is also possible to use EBL1 instead of EBL2 in measuring the bearing and range between two optional points.

In this case, read EBL2 as EBL1 and VRM2 as VRM1 in the procedure above, point the cursor to C of EBL2 in step 2, and then press [ENT] key.

4─5

SECTION 5

OPERATION OF TT AND AIS

5.1 PREPARATION ............................................................ 5-2

5.1.2 Definitions of Symbols......................................... 5-6

Modes

5.1.5 Setting Collision Decision Criteria (CPA/TCPA

Limit).................................................................... 5-14

5.1.6 Setting CPA Ring (CPA Ring)............................. 5-15

5.1.7 Setting Vectors (Vector Time)............................ 5-16

5.1.8 Setting the GPS antenna location..................... 5-17

OPERATION ......................................................... 5-18

5.2.2 Canceling Unwanted Targets............................. 5-21

5.2.3 Tracking Target Data Display [TGT DATA] ....... 5-22

5.2.4 Displaying Target ID No.

(Target Number Display) .................................... 5-24

5.2.5 Input of target information

(TT Individual Setting)........................................ 5-25

5.2.6 Reference Target (Reference)............................ 5-28

5.2.7 TT Test Menu....................................................... 5-29

OPERATION........................................................ 5-35

5.3.1 Restrictions......................................................... 5-35

5.3.3 Setting AIS Display Function (AIS Function)... 5-38

5.3.4 Activating AIS Targets (Activate AIS) ............... 5-39

5.3.5 Deactivating AIS Targets (Deactivate AIS)........ 5-40

5.3.6 Displaying Numeric Data of AIS Targets

(TGT DATA) .......................................................... 5-41

5.3.7 Displaying Target ID No.

(Target Number Display)..................................... 5-46

5.3.8 Setting AIS Filter (AIS Filter Setting)................. 5-47

5.3.9 Conditions for Deciding AIS Target to be Lost 5-51

5.3.10 Setting AIS Alarm (AIS Alarm Setting) .............. 5-52

5.4 TARGET ASSOCIATION ASSESSMENT

(ASSOCIATION SETTING)......................................... 5-53

5.4.1 Target Association Assessment ........................ 5-53

5.4.2 Priority ................................................................. 5-54

5.4.3 Azimuth................................................................ 5-55

5.4.4 Distance ............................................................... 5-56

5.4.5 Course.................................................................. 5-57

5.4.6 Speed ................................................................... 5-58

5.4.7 Hysteresis............................................................ 5-59

5.4.8 Non-Hysteresis.................................................... 5-60

5.4.9 AIS Target to be Assessed ................................. 5-61

DISPLAY ....................................................... 5-62

DISPLAY........................................................ 5-67

5.6.1 Display Past Tracks (Past Position) .................. 5-67

5.6.2 Other Ship's Tracks (Target Track Setting)....... 5-68

USAGE OF TARGET TRACKING FUNCTION

Attention

z There are the following limitations on use of the target

acquisition and target tracking functions.

[I]

Resolution between adjacent targets and swapping during automatic target tracking

Depending on the particular distance and echo size, resolution between adjacent targets during automatic target tracking usually ranges somewhere between 0.03 to 0.05 NM. If multiple targets approach each other, resolution will become about 0.05 NM and this may cause the system to regard them as one target and thus to swap them or lose part of them. Such swapping or less of targets may also occur if the picture of the target being tracked is affected by rain/snow clutter returns or sea clutter returns or moves very close to land.

[III]

[II]

Intensity of echoes and the target tracking function

The intensity of echoes and the tracking function have a correlationship, and thus the target will be lost if no echoes are detected during six scans in succession. If a lost target exists, therefore, radar gain must be increased to support detection of the target. If, however, radar gain is increased too significantly, sea clutter returns or other noise may be erroneously detected and tracked as a target, and resultingly, a false alarm may be issued.

Adverse effects of error sources on automatic tracking

To execute accurate tracking, it becomes necessary first to appropriately adjust the [GAIN], [SEA] and [RAIN] dials of the radar so that the target to be acquired and tracked id clearly displayed on the radar display.

Inappropriate settings of these adjustments reduce the reliability / accuracy of automatic tracking.

5─1

5.1 PREPARATION yy yyy

5.1

PREPARATION

This section explains the features of the target tracking and AIS functions, and the initial setting for using each function.

Before the target tracking function or AIS function can be used, the corresponding optional device must be installed.

Target Tracking Function

The target tracking function calculates the course and speed of a target by automatically tracking the target's move.

The target tracking function enables the automatic acquisition of targets by using the automatic acquisition zone function.

The target tracking function is available when a target tracking unit (option) is installed.

AIS (Automatic Identification System) function

The AIS function shows the target’s information on the radar display, using other ship's information sent out from the AIS unit.

This function is available when the optional AIS unit is installed.

5

5─2

5.1.1 Collision Avoidance

Problems of Collision Avoidance in Navigation

Marine collision avoidance is one of the problems that have been recognized from of old. Now, it will be described briefly who the collision avoidance is positioned among the navigational aid problems.

The navigation pattern of all mobile craft constitutes a system with some closed loops regardless of the media through which the mobile craft travels, whether air, water, the boundary between air and water, or space. This pattern consists of two closed loops in principle, one of which is a collision with another mobile craft and the other is a loop of finding a right and safe way to reach a predeterminate destination. Fig. 5-1 shows the conceptual diagram of navigation pattern by MR. E.W. Anderson. The closed loop of collision avoidance is shown on the left side and the closed loop of finding a right course on the right side.

Fig. 5-1 Navigation Pattern

Marine Accidents and Collisions

Among marine accidents, collision accidents have been highlighted as the tonnages and speeds of ships become higher along with the increase in traffic at sea. If a tanker carrying dangerous articles such as crude oil collides with any other vessel, then not only the vessels involved with the accident but other vessels in the vicinity, port facilities, inhabitants in the coastal area as well as marine resources may also suffer immeasurable damages and troubles. Collision accidents have a high percentage of the marine accidents that have occurred in recent years.

To cope with these problems, any effective measures are needed and some equipment to achieve collision avoidance requirements have been developed at rapid strides.

5─3

5.1 PREPARATION yy yyy

Basic Concept of Collision Avoidance

There are two aspects in collision avoidance: collision prediction and avoidance. Collision prediction is to predict that two or more vessels will happen to occupy the same point at the same time, while collision avoidance is to maneuver vessels not to occupy the same point at the same time.

In practical operation of vessels, a spot of collision has to be deemed to be a single point but a closed zone. This closed zone is conceptually defined as a CPA (Closest Point of Approach). In collision prediction, the time to be taken until a ship reaches the CPA is defined as a TCPA (Time to CPA).

Fig. 5-2 shows a diagram caked “Collision Triangle”.

5

Fig. 5-2 Collision Triangle

5─4

Relative Vector and True Vector

From two points of view, collision prediction and avoidance, it is necessary to obtain the relative vector of other ship for prediction and the true vector of other ship for collision avoidance in order to grasp other ship’s aspect.

The relationship between the relative vector and true vector is shown in Fig. 5-3.

Both rough CPA and TCPA can be obtained easily from the relative speed vector of other ship. This method has an advantage that the risks of collision with all other ships within the radar range can be seen at a glance. On the other hand, the course and speed of other ship can easily be obtained from its true speed vector, enabling other ship’s aspect to be seen at a glance. Thus, the aspects of other ships (transverse, outsail, parallel run, reverse run, etc. ) as described in the act of prevention of collision at sea can be readily grasped. If there is a risk of collision with other ship, the operator can determine which rule to be applied and how to operate own ship.

N

Target ship true vector

N

O

V

T

T

V

O

: Own ship's speed

O

: Own ship's course

V

T

: Other ship's true speed

T

: Target ship's true course

V

R

: Target ship's relative speed

R

: Target ship's relative course

A

: Aspect

A

V

o

R

V

R

Relative vector

Own ship true vector

CPA

Fig. 5-3 Relative Vector and True vector

Radar and Collision Avoidance

Radar is still playing an important roll for collision prevention and positioning. A plotter is used to further enhance the radar functionality. The plotter is capable of plotting other positions of other ships in 3 to 6 minute intervals to monitor their movement. The plots of other ships represent their tracks relative to own ship, and it is shown whether there is a risk of collision, namely CPA and TCPA can be obtained. This method using a plotter is fairly effective, but the number of target ship, which is manually plotted, is limited and it takes several minutes to measure those.

5─5

5.1 PREPARATION yy yyy

5.1.2 Definitions of Symbols

Types and Definitions of Target Tracking Symbols

Vector/Symbol Definition

12

Initial acquisition target

12

Target acquired in automatic acquisition zone

Remarks

This symbol is displayed until the vector is displayed after target acquisition.

The alarm sounds.

The alarm message (New Target) turns red and blinks.

12

Tracked target

12

Dangerous target

The alarm sounds.

The alarm message (CPA/TCPA) turns red and blinks.

12

12

Numeric displayed target

Lost target

When the numeric data is displayed, the target symbol is enclosed in a square.

The alarm sounds.

The alarm message (Lost) turns red and blinks.

12

Past position

The past positions of an AIS target are displayed as well as the target tracking symbol.

5

12

Target track

The track of another ship as an AIS target is displayed as well as the target tracking symbol.

5─6

Types and Definitions of AIS Symbols

Vector/Symbol Definition

Sleeping target

Remarks

This symbol is displayed when received data is valid.

The direction of the triangle’s vertex indicates the target’s bow or course.

AIS12

Activated target

The heading direction is displayed with a solid line, and the course vector is displayed with a dotted line.

The line perpendicular to the heading direction indicates the direction to which the course is to be changed. This line may not be displayed.

AIS12

AIS12

AIS12

Outline display

Numeric displayed target

Dangerous target

The outlines of ships are displayed scaled down.

When the numeric data is displayed, the target symbol is enclosed in a square.

The alarm sounds.

The alarm message (CPA/TCPA) turns red and blinks.

Lost target

The alarm sounds.

The alarm message (Lost) turns red and blinks.

AIS12

Up to a total of 130 activated and sleeping AIS targets can be displayed.

Of which, up to 30 activated AIS targets can be displayed.

If there are more than 130 AIS targets, priority of displaying these targets is as follows:

1. Numeric displayed targets

2. Targets with CPA / TCPA smaller than the set value

(They are considered as dangerous targets and the alarm sounds.)

3. Targets within the automatic activation area

4. Activated AIS targets

5. Targets within the AIS filter (sleeping AIS targets)

If the number of targets exceeds the maximum number of targets that can be displayed within one priority, these targets are then displayed in accordance with the priority list below:

1. Association targets

2. Activated AIS targets

3. Sleeping AIS targets

5─7

5.1 PREPARATION yy yyy

The vector of an AIS target is to be displayed with a vector over ground or over water, depending on the speed sensor setting and current offset setting. The type of the currently displayed vector can be confirmed by viewing the setting of the stable mode.

When GND is displayed for the stability mode (⑩ located at the top left corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.1):

Vector

When Sea is displayed for the stability mode (⑩ located at the top left corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.1):

Vector

When the vector of an AIS target is displayed with a vector over water, the system has converted the AIS target's vector over ground to the vector over water according to the data received from the AIS and the own ship's information.

Note: When the AIS target's symbol is activated but the vector is not displayed, the following are probable causes of the trouble:

COG/SOG is not yet input from the GPS.

The selected speed sensor is malfunctioning.

Types and Definitions of Association Target Symbols

When a tracked target and an AIS target are decided as identical, it is displayed with either of the following symbols:

Vector/Symbol Definition Remarks

Priority for tracked target

Association target

Priority for AIS target

Association target

5

5─8

TT symbol display setting (TT Symbol Display)

Turn on or off (ON / OFF) the TT symbol display.

This function can be used only when the AIS display function (optional) is on.

This function cannot be used when the AIS display function (The TT display function cannot be deactivated if only TT is used without using the AIS function).

Data is saved even though the TT display is turned off by this function.

Refer to Section 5.3 “AIS OPERATION” for the AIS display function.

Procedure 1 Press the [TT MENU] key.

2 Press the [1] key.

TT Setting menu opens.

3 Press the [2] key.

TT Symbol Display is turned on or off.

ON : Enables the TT symbol display function.

OFF : Disables the TT symbol display function.

* Software button ⑨ located at the other ship's information area in Section 2.3.6 is also available for switching.

5─9

5.1 PREPARATION yy yyy

Setting AIS Symbol Display Function (AIS Symbol Display)

Switch ON or OFF to set the AIS symbol display function.

Procedure 1 Press [TT MENU] key.

Press [2] key.

The AIS Setting menu will appear.

2 Press [2] key.

The AIS Symbol Display is switched between

ON and OFF.

ON: Enables the AIS symbol display function.

OFF: Disables the AIS symbol display function.

* Software button ⑩ located at the other ship's information area in Section 2.3.6 is also available for switching.

5

5─10

5.1.3 TT Data Display

(Refer to Example of Display in Section 2.1 “EXAMPLE OF DISPLAY.”)

Display of Vectors

z

Attention

When a target or own ship changes a course, or when

a target is acquired, its vector may not reach a given level of accuracy until three minutes or more has passed after such course change or target acquisition.

Even if three minutes or more has passed, the vector may include an error depending upon the tracking conditions.

A vector to represent a target’s predicted position can presented in the True vector or Relative vector mode. In each mode, a vector length can be freely changed for a time interval of 1 to 60 minutes.

The True and Relative vector can be switched by using software button ① located at the other ship's information area in Section 2.3.6.

[I] Vector Mode Selection

True Vector Mode

In the true vector mode, the direction of a target vector indicates the true course of the target and its vector length is proportional to its speed.

In this mode, own ship’s vector is displayed as shown below.

In this mode, the movements of other ships around own ship can be accurately and easily monitored.

However, no CPA RING can appear in this mode.

Own ship’s position HL

True vector

The relative vector is not displayed

5─11

5.1 PREPARATION yy yyy

Relative Vector Mode

In displaying the relative vector of a target, press the [VECT R/T] key to select the Relative Vector mode.

The relative vector does not represent the true motion of the target, but its relative relation with own ship.

This means that a target with its relative vector directed to own ship (passing through the CPA LIMIT ring) will be a dangerous target. In the Relative Vector mode, it can be seen at a glance where the CPA LIMIT of the dangerous target is.

HL

The true vector is not displayed

CPA ring

Relative vector

Therefore, the TRUE/REL mode shall optionally be used for the purpose of observation: the TRUE vector mode for grasping the true aspect of a target, and the REL vector mode for grasping a target’s closest point of approach (CPA)

[II] Vector Length: VECTOR TIME

The vector length of a target is proportional to its speed, and the vector time can be switched in a range of 1 to

60 minutes by used for ten-key.

The diagram below illustrates a vector length of a target for six minutes, and the tip of the vector represents the target’s position expected to reach six minutes later.

5

Refer to Section 5.1.7 “Setting Vectors (Vector Time)” for how to change the vector time.

5─12

5.1.4 Cursor Modes (Cursor)

Types and Functions of Cursor Modes

The types of cursor modes are listed in the table below. To use the function of a cursor mode, move the cursor onto the PPI object and press the [ENT] key.

Mode Function

ACQ TT

ACT AIS

TGT Data

Cancel

Enables the target tracking function to acquire a target in manual mode.

Activates AIS targets, deactivates AIS target and sets a point filter.

Select or deselect a tracking or AIS target whose numerical data is to be displayed.

Cancels a target tracking.

Mark Puts a temporary mark.

Change of Cursor Mode

Procedure

1 Move the cursor to the cursor mode Cursor (software button

located at the top right corner of the radar display described in Section

2.3.3), and press the [ENT] key. On the PPI, press the

[CLR / INFO] key and select a desired cursor mode from the list.

The selected cursor mode will be shown at the cursor mode (software button ② located at the top right corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.3).

5─13

5.1 PREPARATION yy yyy

5.1.5 Setting Collision Decision Criteria (CPA/TCPA Limit)

For details on each operation, see 3.4 BASIC OPERATION and 4 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND

BEARING. z

Attention

Set the optimum values of collision decision

conditions, depending upon vessel type, water area, weather and oceanographic conditions.

(For the relations between those conditions and alarms, refer to Section 5.5 “ALARM DISPLAY.”)

Set and check collision decision criteria before operating the TT system.

Procedure 1 Press [TT MENU] key.

2 Press

The TT Setting menu will appear.

3 Press

4 Select the value to be set pressing the numeric key, and press [ENT].

The ten-key screen will appear.

The selected CPA Limit value will be determined.

5 Press

The ten-key screen will appear.

6. Select the value to be set pressing the numeric key, and press [ENT].

The selected TCPA Limit value will be determined.

5

5─14

5.1.6 Setting CPA Ring (CPA Ring)

Procedure 1 Press [TT MENU] key.

2 Press

The TT Setting menu will appear.

3 Press

The setting of CPA Ring will change between

ON and OFF.

ON: Displays the CPA ring.

OFF: Hides the CPA ring.

While the CPA ring is displayed, CPA RING is shown at the lower right of the radar display.

While the distance of the specified CPA Limit value is used as the radius, the CPA ring is displayed with a red circle of which center is the own ship’s position.

Note: The CPA ring is not displayed when the true (T) vector mode is selected.

* The CPA ring switch to Display or Hide within software button ⑦ located at the bottom right corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.4.

5─15

5.1 PREPARATION yy yyy

5.1.7 Setting Vectors (Vector Time)

Vector time can be set in minutes in the range 1 to 60 min.

A true vector mode or relative vector mode can be selected.

Setting vector time on the display

Procedure

1 Move the cursor to the target vector time setting (Software button

located at the other ship's information area in Section 2.3.6), and press the [ENT] key.

The Vector Time value input screen will appear.

2 Use number keys, input a vector length, and press the [ENT] key.

The inputted vector length is confirmed.

Setting vector time using the multi-dial [MULTI]

Procedure 1 Press the [MULTI] dial several times to activate the Vector mode.

Vector will be displayed in the multi-dial mode (⑭ located at the bottom left corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.2).

2 Turn the [MULTI] dial to set the vector time.

Setting vector mode [VECT R / T]

Procedure 1 Press the [VECT R / T] key.

The current vector mode T (true vector) or R (relative vector) will be displayed in the target vector display true / relative switching (software button ① located at the other ship's information area in Section 2.3.6).

The vector mode is switched between T (true vector) and R (relative vector) each time the button is pressed.

5

5─16

5.1.8 Setting the GPS antenna location

Set the GPS antenna location. Set offset ranges in longitudinal direction and latitudinal direction from the own ship's reference position.

For the setting procedure, refer to Section 7.1.6 “Setting of CCRP/Antenna/GPS Antenna Position (CCRP

Setting).” z z

Attention

If offset ranges are not set correctly, AIS symbols and

radar echoes may be displayed shifted.

When offset ranges are set, latitude and longitude

data received from the GPS is offset, and the offset data is displayed as the latitude and longitude of own ship’s position.

5─17

5.2 TT OPERATION yy yyy

5.2

TT

This section explains how to use the target tracking (TT) functions.

Each function is available only when the target tracking (TT) option is installed.

The functions automatically track a target, and store/display vectors as the course and speed.

They calculate CPA and TCPA, and issue an alarm.

The target tracking (TT) function can track up to 30 ships.

Automatic acquisition/activate zone can be set for automatic acquisition.

When the power is turned off or the transmit/standby mode is activated, tracking data is erased from memory.

5.2.1 Acquiring Target [ACQ]

Target acquisition can be performed on two modes, AUTO and MANUAL, and both modes can be used at the same time.

Automatic Acquisition [AUTO]

Procedure

z

Attention

If untracked targets intrude into automatic

acquisition/activate zone in the conditions that maximum number of targets is under tracking, the targets acquired automatically will be cancelled in the order of lower levels of danger.

1 Press the [AZ ALARM] key.

Automatic acquisition will be started. The mark “ ” and target ID number are put to an acquired target, and they move together with the target. The vectors are displayed within one minute.

2 Press the [AZ ALARM] key again.

Automatic acquisition will be turned off, and automatic acquisition/activate zone disappears from the radar display. However, automatically acquired ships are continuously tracked.

For automatic acquisition/activate zone to be called by using the [AZ ALARM] key, refer to “Setting Automatic Acquisition Key Assignment (AZ Alarm Key Setting)” on the next page.

5

5─18

Setting Automatic Acquisition Key Assignment (AZ Alarm Key Setting)

This section explains how to set automatic acquisition/activate zone that is to be assigned to the [AZ ALARM] key.

The setting enables the operator to select ON/OFF for a generally used automatic acquisition/activate zone by simply operating the [AZ ALARM] key on the control panel.

Procedure 1 Press [TT MENU] key.

Press

Press

Press

AZ menu will appear.

ON: Turns on automatic acquisition/activate zone when the [AZ ALARM] key is pressed.

OFF: Does not turn on automatic acquisition/activate zone when the [AZ

ALARM] key is pressed.

Procedure

The same function also as RADAR Alarm (Sector Alarm) can be given.

1 Press [TT MENU] key.

[3].

[2].

* The setting method is the same as the method of automatic acquisition/activate zone.

For the creation method of sector alarm, refer to [IV] “Make Sector Alarm (Make

Sector Alarm)” in Section 3.5.21 “Radar Alarm (Radar Alarm).”

5─19

5.2 TT OPERATION yy yyy

Manual Acquisition [MANUAL]

Procedure

z

Attention

If more targets are acquired manually in the

condition that the maximum number of targets are under tracking, the targets under tracking will be cancelled in the order of lower level of danger in order to track the manually acquired targets.

1 Move the cross cursor mark onto the target to be acquired, and press the

[ACQ] key.

The target will be acquired. The initial acquisition mark and target ID number are put to the acquired target, and the vectors are displayed within one minute.

Target manually captured.

The initial capture symbol is displayed.

5

Target that has intruded the zone for 1 min.

The capture symbol and vector are displayed.

When using only the manual acquisition mode alone, press the [AZ ALARM] key to turn off the automatic acquisition mode.

Use of Automatic and Manual Acquisition Modes [ACQ AUTO] / [ACQ MANUAL]

Use the manual acquisition mode while the automatic acquisition mode is on.

Manually acquire the target to which particular attention should be paid, and get the other targets automatically acquired. If a new target appears exceeding the maximum number of targets, the manually acquired target is displayed even in the background until it gets out of the display. However, automatically acquired targets are canceled starting far distance from own ship.

5─20

5.2.2 Canceling Unwanted Targets

Unwanted targets can be canceled one by one in the following cases:

• Tracking is no longer necessary for targets with which vectors/symbols are displayed after being acquired and tracked.

• The number of vectors on the radar display needs to be reduced for easy observation.

When targets are to be re-acquired from the beginning, all the current vectors can also be canceled.

Canceling targets one by one

Procedure 1 Move the cross cursor mark onto the target to be canceled.

2 Press the [TGT CNCL] key.

The target’s vectors and symbols will disappear, and only the radar video remains.

Canceling all targets collectively

Procedure 1 Hold down the [TGT CNCL] key.

The vectors and symbols of all the targets will disappear, and only the radar videos remain.

Note: When all the targets have been canceled, the system stops tracking them. Thus, you need to re-acquire targets in manual or automatic acquisition mode. Do not cancel all the targets unless otherwise required.

5─21

5.2 TT OPERATION yy yyy

5.2.3 Tracking Target Data Display [TGT DATA]

z

Attention

When a target or own ship changes its course, or when a new

target is acquired, its vector may not reach a given level of accuracy until three minutes or more has passed after such course change or target acquisition.

Even if three minutes or more has passed, the vector may include an error depending upon the. tracking conditions.

Type of Data Display

Target Data

Target identification (TGT ID)

True bearing: BEARING

Range: RANGE

True course: COURSE

True speed: SPEED

Closest point of approach (CPA)

Time to CPA (TCPA)

Bow crossing range (BCR)

ID number of the target

0.1

° unit

0.01 NM unit

0.1

° unit

0.1 knot unit

0.01 NM unit

0.1 min unit

0.01 NM unit

Bow crossing time (BCT) 0.1 min unit

The target for which its numeric data is displayed is marked with a symbol “ ” to distinguish from other targets.

If a target’s data is displayed, but without the symbol “ ”, such a target exists outside the currently displayed radar display.

5

5─22

[I] Method of Displaying Target Data [TGT DATA]

Procedure 1 Move the cross cursor mark onto the target for which numeric data is to be displayed, and press the [TGT DATA] key.

Or, set the cursor mode to TGT Data, place the cross cursor over the target whose numerical data is to be displayed, and press the [ENT] key.

Then, the data of the designated target will appear, it will be marked with a symbol “ ”.

The target data will remain on the radar display until the target is lost and its vector disappears, or until another target is designated.

If a target with the mark “ ” is designated, only its true bearing (BEARING) and range

(RANGE) will appear until its vector appears.

[II] Canceling numerical data display (CNCL Data)

Procedure 1 Set the cursor mode to TGT Data, place the cross cursor over the tracked target whose numerical data is to be displayed, and press the [CLR/INFO] key.

Numerical data display is canceled.

5─23

5.2 TT OPERATION yy yyy

5.2.4 Displaying Target ID No. (Target Number Display)

A target ID number is a value displayed beside the acquisition symbol when a target is acquired.

These numbers are assigned to targets in acquisition order. The numbers 1 to 30 are automatically assigned.

Each target is identified by the assigned ID number until it is lost or its acquisition is canceled.

Procedure 1 Press [TT MENU] key.

2 Press [1] key.

The TT Setting menu will appear.

3 Press [3] key.

The Target Number Display is switched ON or

OFF.

ON: Displays target ID numbers.

OFF: Hides target ID numbers.

Target TRACK:

Displays target ID number with target track.

If there are many tracking targets and their symbol display is confusing, set Target Number

Display to OFF to view the radar display easily.

Note: An ID number is always displayed for only targets with which numeric data is displayed.

5

5─24

5.2.5 Input of target information (TT Individual Setting)

This radar enables name inputs and target track color changes for individual TT targets acquired.

Procedure 1 Turn OFF the cursor mode.

Software button ① located at the top right corner of the radar display described in

Section 2.3.3 is available to change the cursor mode.

2 Place the cursor over the target and then press [CLR/INFO] key.

The TT Individual Setting INFO screen opens.

* This function is available only when the cursor mode is set to OFF.

Target information screen

Item overview

Target ID : Target ID currently selected.

Name : The name of the target. It is blanked in the initial status. The user is to enter a name.

Track Color : Determines a target track color.

Association Priority :

Specify whose target information is to be displayed between an AIS target and a TT target when an association is made.

Reference Target :

On : Set this target as a reference target.

Off : Stop using this target as a reference target.

5─25

5.2 TT OPERATION yy yyy

Name entry (Name)

Procedure 1 While the TT Target INFO screen is open, press [1] key.

2 For the entry of a new name

2. INPUT

For the selection of a name from names that have already been entered

1. DATA BASE.

For new entry

Selecting INPUT displays the screen shown below.

After making an entry, place the cursor over

[ENT] key and then press it.

When the name entered with INPUT is changed to a target name, it is saved in DATA BASE.

* Up to eight characters can be entered as a name.

For calling a name from the names that have been entered

Selecting DATA BASE lists INPUT names that have already been entered. From the list, select a name you want to use.

* Names for 32 ships can be saved in DATA BASE.

5

5─26

Track Color Setting (Track Color)

Procedure 1 While the TT Target INFO screen is open, press [2] key.

2 Pressing numeric key(s), select a color number you want to set.

Colors selectable with Track Color are colors that have been set within the TT Track Setting.

When colors are set, individual colors can be set for 10 ships. For the 11th to 20th ships, 10 ships are to be set collectively.

On this screen, selection of the 1st track is to select CYAN.

For target tracks, up to 20 ships can be displayed.

5─27

5.2 TT OPERATION yy yyy

5.2.6 Reference Target (Reference)

This equipment can calculate and display the speed of own ship by tracking a target whose position is fixed with respect to the ground and by setting this target as a reference target.

Attention

z The reference target function is to be used when the own ship

speed cannot be properly displayed due to for example speed device failure. Use this function only in emergency.

z When the own ship speed or course is changed or when a new

reference target is selected, it takes at least 3 minutes before the speed is displayed with a certain level of accuracy. It should also be noted that the displayed speed may not be accurate depending on the tracking state even after 3 minutes.

z When a large radar echo such as the land is set as a reference

target, the own ship speed and the vector of other targets may not be displayed properly. This may result in an accident.

z When a meandering vessel is set as a reference target, the own

ship speed and the vector of other targets may not be displayed properly. This may result in an accident.

z The speed device enters the manual mode MAN when the

reference target is lost or when the target tracking function is deactivated.

Procedure 1 Set the cursor mode to OFF.

2 Acquire a target whose position if fixed with respect to the ground.

3 Place the cursor over the tracked target and press the [CLR/INFO] key.

4 Target information menu is displayed.

5 Press the [4] key.

ON : Set this target as a reference target.

OFF : Stop using this target as a reference target.

When ON is selected, the speed device activates the reference target function.

Then symbol “○

R

” is displayed when the reference target is set.

Only one target can be set as a reference target.

When a new reference target is created, the previous reference target is deleted.

When OFF is selected, the speed device deactivates the reference target function and other functions become available.

5

5─28

5.2.7 TT Test Menu

CAUTION

Simulation is a function to check whether the TT system is operating normally. Do not use this function except when checking the TT operation.

In particular, if this mode is used during navigation, pseudo targets appear on the radar display, which may be confused with the actual targets. Do not use this mode during navigation.

Otherwise, this may cause accidents.

The following simulation to be used for TT can be referred to and modified:

[I] Test Video:

[II] TT Simulator:

Test video for use in checking the operation of the target detection circuit.

Pseudo targets are generated on the radar display to check whether the TT functions are operating normally.

Displays the TT status.

Gate size to acquire and track targets.

[III] Status:

[IV] Gate Display:

5─29

5.2 TT OPERATION yy yyy

[I] Test Video

Attention z TEST VIDEO may not appear for targets that are not

acquired nor tracked, or if the [GAIN] and [SEA] controls are adjusted properly

Test Video is used to check whether the video signals under target acquisition and tracking are inputted to and processed in the target processing circuit normally.

However, it is sufficient to check that VDH in TEST VIDEO is displayed.

The start of the Test Video mode is available only in the Standby mode.

Procedure 1 Press [STBY] key.

The equipment will enter the standby state.

2 Press [TT MENU] key.

Press [6] key.

The TT Test Menu will appear.

3 Press [1] key.

The Test Video setting screen will appear.

4 Press a numeric key to select a video signal you want to set.

The selected test video will be set.

The test video is displayed in the background of the radar display.

In general, VDH is sufficient for target display checks in test video mode.

If any target displayed clearly in the radar display is not displayed in the Test Video mode, the target detection circuit of the TT system may have a trouble.

5

5─30

[II] Target Tracking Simulator

Pseudo targets can be generated in certain known positions to check whether the TT processing circuits are operating normally. Since the pseudo targets move depending on known parameters, the values for these pseudo targets can be compared with the known value if the pseudo targets are acquired and tracked, and displayed. Thus, it can be checked if the TT system is operating normally.

Procedure 1 Press the [STBY] key.

The equipment will enter the standby state.

2 Press [TT MENU] key.

Press [6] key.

The TT Test Menu will appear.

3 Press [2] key.

Choices for the TT simulator (TT Simulator) are displayed.

4 Select the simulator to be set, pressing the numeric key.

The selected simulator will be set.

5 Press the [TX/PRF] key.

The simulator will be activated and generate pseudo targets. The characters "X" at the bottom of the radar display blinks indicating that the simulation mode is active.

TT simulator/scenario

SCENARIO

TARGET START POINT

DISTANCE BEARING

TARGET END POINT

DISTANCE BEARING

TARGET SPEED

3 6NM

°

1NM

0NM

1NM

1NM

90

°

0

° every 18

°

45

°

20kts

10kts

10kts

105kts

6NM

6NM

150

°

150

°

20kts

20kts

Note: Set the ship's heading bearing to 0º and the own ship speed to 0 kn while the simulator is operating.

When the range between own ship and the pseudo target is 0, the target will disappear.

5─31

Exit

5.2 TT OPERATION yy yyy

1 Press the [STBY] key.

The equipment will enter the standby state.

2 Press [2] key while the TT Test Menu is open.

Choices for the TT simulator (TT Simulator) are displayed.

3 Press [1] key to select OFF.

The TT Simulator is turned off.

5

5─32

[III] Status

The current TT status will appear.

Procedure 1 Press [TT MENU] key.

The TT Menu will appear

Press [6] key.

The TT Test Menu will appear.

2 Press [3] key.

The Status screen will appear.. response

*Video Level TD: Threshold value used for tracking

*Video Level HI: VD threshold value used for automatic acquisition/activate zone

*Video Level Low: Unused

*Gate Size:

*Tracking:

Size of gate used for tracking

Number of targets currently acquired

5─33

5.2 TT OPERATION yy yyy

[IV] Gate Display

The gate displays an area monitoring a target using the TT function. This radar equipment allows the gate size to change automatically according to target distance and size. User can check the gate size using the following function.

Procedure 1 Press [TT MENU] key.

Press [6] key.

The TT Test Menu will appear.

2 Press [4] key.

The gate display mode is switched.

ON: Gate is displayed

OFF: Gate is not displayed

3 The gate displays data of a target you want to check using the cursor and

[TGT DATA] key. (See Section 5.3.6

“Displaying Numeric Data of AIS

Targets (TGT DATA).”)

The data is displayed, and the gate is displayed around the TT symbol in green.

Note: The TT function can display the gate of two targets simultaneously.

TT symbol

Echo

Vector

Gate (displayed in green)

5

5─34

5.3

AIS

5.3.1 Restrictions

Attention

There are the following limitations on use of the AIS function, system, and operation:

[I] This system can display up to a total of 130 targets.

Of which, up to 30 activated targets can be displayed.

There are 3 types of filters for controlling sleeping target display.

(Refer to Section 5.3.8 “Setting AIS Filter (AIS Filter Setting)”.)

[II] The following restrictions are placed on use of the AIS function.

The AIS function is unavailable in the following cases:

MAN is selected for the speed sensor.

The current offset (Set/Drift Setting) is set while LOG or

2AXW is selected for the speed sensor.

LOG or 2AXW cannot be selected for the speed

sensor in the following case:

The AIS function is turned on and the current offset

(Set/Drift Setting) is selected.

MAN cannot be selected for the speed sensor in the

following case:

The AIS function is On.

Current offset (Set/Drift Setting) cannot be turned On in

the following case:

LOG or 2AXW is selected for the speed sensor while

the AIS function is on.

* The AIS function is optional for non-MED ships.

Use of this function requires AIS I/F (option).

5─35

5.3 AIS OPERATION yy yyy

5.3.2 Initial Setting

This section explains the initial setting for using the AIS function.

Setting the GPS antenna location

Set the GPS antenna location. Set offset ranges in longitudinal direction and latitudinal direction from the own ship's reference position.

For the setting procedure, refer to Section 7.1.6 “Setting of CCRP/Antenna/GPS Antenna Position (CCRP

Setting).”

Attention z If offset ranges are not set correctly, AIS symbols and

radar echoes may be displayed shifted.

z When offset ranges are set, latitude and longitude

data received from the GPS is offset, and the offset data is displayed as the latitude and longitude of own ship’s position.

Setting collision decision criteria (CPA Limit/TCPA Limit)

The collision decision criteria for the TT function are applied to the AIS function.

For the setting procedure, refer to Section 5.1.5 “Setting Collision Decision Criteria (CPA/TCPA Limit).”

The AIS setting menu is also available for the collision decision criteria. Note that the same collision decision criteria must apply to TT.

Attention z Set the optimum values of collision decision

conditions, depending upon vessel type, water area, weather, and oceanographic conditions.

5

5─36

Procedure 1 Press [TT MENU] key.

2 Press [3] key.

The Target Setting Menu will appear.

3 Press [5] key.

The ten-key screen will appear.

4 Using numeric keys, enter the CPA value you want to set, and then press

[ENT] key.

The entered CPA Limit value is determined.

5 Press [6] key.

The ten-key screen will appear.

6 Using numeric keys, enter the TCPA value you want to set, and then press [ENT] key.

The entered TCPA Limit value is determined.

* The collision decision criteria set on the AIS side are also available on TT.

5─37

5.3 AIS OPERATION yy yyy

5.3.3 Setting AIS Display Function (AIS Function)

Switch the AIS symbol display function to ON/OFF.

Attention z When the AIS display function is set to OFF, no AIS

Procedure

symbols are displayed.

z The AIS display function itself is turned OFF. z Once the AIS display function is set to OFF, it is not

automatically switched to ON even if a dangerous target exists.

1 Press [TT MENU] key.

Press [2] key.

The AIS Setting menu will appear.

2 Press [1] key.

The AIS Function is switched between ON and

OFF.

ON: Enables the AIS display function.

OFF: Disables the AIS display function.

* Software button ⑧ located at the other ship's information area in Section 2.3.6 is also available to switch the display functions.

* Note that turning OFF this function switches all AIS display functions to OFF.

5

5─38

5.3.4 Activating AIS Targets (Activate AIS)

Activate an AIS target, and display the target’s vector and make a collision decision.

Manual activation

Activate an AIS target

*1

in manual mode to display the vector and HL.

Procedure 1 Press the CURSOR button at the upper right of the radar display several times until ACT AIS appears.

The cursor mode is set to the AIS activation mode.

2 Move the cross cursor mark onto the inactive AIS target that is to be activated

*1

, and press [ENT] key.

The selected AIS target will be activated

*1

.

Automatic activation

Activate an AIS target in automatic mode to display the vector and heading line.

When the automatic activation function is used, AIS targets are automatically activated when they go into the automatic activation zone. The automatic activation zone is identical to the automatic acquisition zone (AZ) used for target tracking. For the zone setting, refer to Section 3.5.20 “Auto Acquisition” and Section 5.2.1

“Acquiring Target [ACQ].”

Reference If an AIS target is activated but the vector is not displayed, refer to “Setting AIS Symbol Display

Function (AIS Symbol Display)” in Section 5.1.2 “Definitions of Symbols.”

*1

For activation of targets, refer to “Types and Definitions of AIS Symbols” in Section 5.1.2 “Definitions of

Symbols.”

5─39

5.3 AIS OPERATION yy yyy

5.3.5 Deactivating AIS Targets (Deactivate AIS)

Deactivate an AIS target

*2

and clear the display of the vector and HL. z

Attention

The operation above is effective only for active

targets.

Procedure 1 Press the CURSOR button at the upper right of the radar display several times until CANCEL appears.

The cursor mode is set to the deactivation mode.

2 Move the cross cursor mark onto the active AIS target that is to be deactivated

*2

, and press [ENT] key.

The selected AIS target will be deactivated

*2

.

*2

For deactivation of targets, refer to “Types and Definitions of AIS Symbols” in Section 5.1.2 “Definitions of Symbols.”

5

5─40

5.3.6 Displaying Numeric Data of AIS Targets (TGT DATA)

Numerical data for a specified AIS target is displayed.

Types of numeric data displayed

Display items

y

Navigation information

BRG (true bearing)

COG (course over ground)

0.01

° unit

RANGE 0.01nm

0.1

° unit

SOG (speed over ground)

CPA (closest point of approach)

TCPA (time to CPA)

HDG (heading bearing)

ROT (course change speed) y

Destination and location information

0.1knot unit

0.1nm unit

0.1min unit

1

° unit

0.01

°/min

Destination

Estimated time of arrival

L/L (latitude/longitude)

Position fixing device

RAIM

Position fixing accuracy

0.001’ unit y

Ship information

NAME (ship name)

CALL SIGN

MMSI

IMO number

Navigation status

Up to 20 characters

Up to 7 characters

Up to 9 characters y

AtoN information

AtoN class

AtoN type

Displaying numeric data

Procedure 1 Press the CURSOR button at the upper right of the radar display several times until

TGT DATA appears.

The cursor mode is set to the numeric data display mode.

2 Move the cross cursor mark onto the active AIS target for which numeric data is to be displayed, and press [ENT] key.

The values of the selected AIS target will appear on the right side of the radar display.

The mark is displayed around the symbol.

Reference: If the values are displayed but the mark . is not on the radar display, the target is outside the radar display.

5─41

5.3 AIS OPERATION yy yyy

Clearing numeric data

Procedure 1 Press the Cursor button at the upper right of the radar display several times until TGT Data appears.

The cursor mode is set to the numeric data display mode.

2 Move the cross cursor mark onto the active AIS target for which numeric data is to be cleared, and press [CLR] key.

The values of the selected AIS target will be cleared from the right side of the radar display, and the mark displayed around the symbol will also disappear.

AIS information panel display setting

A set of AIS information to be preferentially displayed (before other sets of information) on the AIS information panel can be specified.

Information type can be selected from the choices of: navigation information, ship information, and destination and location information.

Procedure 1 Press the [TT menu] key.

2 Press the following buttons.

2. AIS setting

9. Next menu list

2. AIS numerical data display setting

Select AIS information panel display setting.

AIS numerical data display setting menu is displayed.

3 Press a number key for the desired setting.

Navigation information :

COG/SOG, CPA/TCPA, azimuth, distance, and turning ratio

Ship information : ship name, call sign, and MMSI

Destination and location information : destination, arrival time, and location

AIS information for the selected condition will be displayed.

5

5─42

Received AIS message display

Messages received from AIS can be displayed.

Messages can be displayed while the received AIS message display screen is displayed.

Procedure 1 Press the [TT menu] key.

2 Press the following buttons.

2. AIS setting

3. Received AIS message display

1. Messages for a specific address:

Messages sent to own ship are displayed.

2. Broadcasted message:

Messages sent to all vessels are displayed.

5─43

Lost target data display

Information of the last lost AIS target can be displayed.

Data can be displayed for the target that was lost most recently.

Procedure 1 Press the [TT menu] key.

2 Press the following buttons.

2. AIS setting

4. Lost target data display

Information of the last lost AIS target is displayed.

5.3 AIS OPERATION yy yyy

5

5─44

AIS own ship information display

AIS information for own ship can be displayed.

Procedure 1 Press the [TT menu] key.

2 Press the following buttons.

2. AIS setting

5. AIS own ship information display

AIS information for own ship is displayed.

5─45

5.3 AIS OPERATION yy yyy

5.3.7 Displaying Target ID No. (Target Number Display)

A target ID number is a value displayed beside the AIS symbol.

ID numbers are assigned to AIS symbols in displayed order. ID numbers 1 to 130 are automatically assigned.

Each target is identified by the assigned ID number until it is lost.

Procedure 1 Press [TT MENU] key.

2 Press [2] key.

The TT Setting menu will appear.

3 Press [7] key.

The Target Number Display is switched ON or

OFF.

ON: Displays target ID numbers.

OFF: Hides target ID numbers.

Target TRACK:

Displays target ID number with target track.

If there are many AIS targets and their symbol display is confusing, set Target Number Display to OFF to view the radar display easily.

Note: An ID number is always displayed for only targets with which numeric data is displayed.

5

5─46

5.3.8 Setting AIS Filter (AIS Filter Setting)

About an AIS filter

Once the AIS filter is set, only the AIS targets that are inside the filter area are displayed (setting can be made such that sleeping targets outside the AIS filter will not be shown).

The filter is initially set in a circle having a radius of 20 [nm] from the own ship’s position. If 131 or more targets exist in the filter range, they are displayed according to the priority explained in “Types and Definitions of AIS Symbols” of Section 5.1.2 “Definitions of Symbols.”

Type of AIS filters (Filter Type)

There are the following three types of AIS filters:

1) RANGE........ A filter is set in a circle with a set range as the radius.

2) SECTOR ...... A filter is set in a sector formed by two bearings with the bow as reference.

3) ZONE........... A filter is set in a zone formed by two bearings and two ranges with the bow as reference.

Procedure 1 Press [TT MENU] key.

Press [2] key.

Press [6] key.

The TT Filter Setting menu will appear.

2 Press [1] key.

The Filter type selection screen will appear.

3 Select the AIS filter type to be set, pressing the numeric key.

The selected AIS filter type will be determined.

5─47

5.3 AIS OPERATION yy yyy

Making an AIS filter (Make AIS Filter)

Procedure

[I] Setting a RANGE filter

2 Turn the [VRM] key control to set a filter range, and press [ENT] key.

The range of a RANGE filter will be set.

AIS targets in the set circle are displayed by priority.

1 Press [2] key while the AIS Filter Setting menu is open.

The Make AIS Filter screen will appear.

[II] Setting a SECTOR filter

2 Turn the [EBL] key control to set the bearing of the port side, and press [ENT] key.

3 Turn the [EBL] key control to set the bearing of the starboard, and press

[ENT] key.

A SECTOR filter will be set.

AIS targets in the area formed by the two set bearings are displayed by priority.

[III] Setting a ZONE filter

2 Turn the [EBL] key and [VRM] key controls to set the bearing and range of the port side, and press [ENT] key.

3 Turn the [EBL] key and [VRM] key controls to set the bearing and range of the starboard, and press [ENT] key.

A ZONE filter will be set.

AIS targets in the area formed by the two set bearings and ranges are displayed by priority.

5

5─48

z

Attention

When automatic acquisition/activate zone function is

enabled, the system automatically corrects the filter range to cover automatic acquisition/activate zone.

Thus, automatic acquisition/activate zone is always inside the filter range.

Setting the AIS filter display function to ON/OFF (Filter Display)

Procedure 1 Press [3] key while the AIS Filter Setting menu is open.

The setting of AIS Filter display will be switched

ON or OFF. the

OFF: Hides

Display of Targets outside AIS Filter (Filter Mode)

Procedure 1 Press [TT MENU] key.

Press [2] key.

Press [6] key.

2 Press the [5] key.

The Filter Mode is switched.

Display :Displays only AIS targets in the AIS filter.

Priority :Displays AIS targets in the AIS filter by priority, and also displays targets

outside the AIS filter.

Note: Activated AIS targets can be displayed even when they are outside the AIS filter.

5─49

5.3 AIS OPERATION yy yyy

Point Filter

AIS targets which are not displayed because they are outside the AIS filter or at low priority levels can be activated by giving a higher priority to them.

Procedure 1 Press a few times the CURSOR button at the top right corner of the screen to call up ACT AIS .

2 Place the cursor over the location where you wish to set a point filter, and press the [ENT] key.

The cursor mode is set to AIS activation mode.

A point filter will be set at the cursor position.

If an AIS target is in the point filter, it will be activated.

When an AIS target is activated or an AIS target is not found within one minute, the point filter will be cleared.

5

5─50

5.3.9 Conditions for Deciding AIS Target to be Lost

About a lost target

When the data of an AIS target cannot be received for a specified time, the target is decided to be lost and the target data is deleted. As shown in the table below, the time until target data is deleted varies depending on the class of receive data and the target status.

Deciding AIS Target to be Lost

Time until data deletion

Target status

SOLAS ship

(Class A)

SOLAS ship

(Class B)

Vessel below 3 knots and it is now at anchor or on the berth

Vessel of 3 knots or more and it is now at anchor or on the berth

Vessel of 0 to 14 knots (Class B: 0 to 14 knots)

Vessel of 0 to 14 knots and it is now changing the course

18 min

60 sec

60 sec

60 sec

18 min

18 min

180 sec

180 sec

Vessel of 14 to 23 knots

Vessel of 14 to 23 knots and it is now changing the course

36 sec

36 sec

180 sec

180 sec

Vessel of 23 knots or more

30 sec 180 sec

Vessel of 23 knots or more and it is now changing the course

30 sec 180 sec

Reference:

• When a dangerous target ship is lost, a lost alarm is issued and the symbol changes to a lost symbol. The system calculates the current position from the last-received data and continues displaying the symbol for a maximum of one minute. If the system cannot receive any data within one minute or the ALARM ACK switch is pressed, the symbol is cleared.

• When a safe target ship is lost, the system does not issue a lost alarm, display a lost symbol, or calculate the current position.

5─51

5.3 AIS OPERATION yy yyy

5.3.10 Setting AIS Alarm (AIS Alarm Setting)

Conditions for setting off a lost AIS target alarm (Lost) and a dangerous target alarm (CPA/TCPA) can be set.

Lost target alarm (Lost)

Procedure 1 Press the [TT menu] key.

2 Press the following buttons.

2. AIS setting

8. AIS alarm setting

2. Lost target alarm

Choices for the lost target alarm (Lost) setting are listed.

3 Press a number key for the desired setting.

Off : Lost target alarm will not be active.

Dangerous ship : Lost target alarm will sound only for the AIS targets for which a dangerous target alarm has already been activated.

Activated and dangerous ship :

Lost target alarm will sound only for the AIS targets for which an activated AIS target and dangerous target alarm has already been activated.

Note: Sleeping AIS targets will not set off a lost target alarm.

Dangerous target alarm setting (CPA/TCPA)

Procedure 1 Press the [TT menu] key.

2 Press the following buttons.

2. AIS setting

8. AIS alarm setting

1. Dangerous ship alarm

Choices for the dangerous target alarm (CPA/TCPA) setting are listed.

3 Press a number key for the desired setting.

Activated : Dangerous target alarm will be activated only for activated AIS targets.

Activated & sleeping : Dangerous target alarm will be activated for all AIS targets that are displayed.

5

5─52

5.4

TARGET ASSOCIATION ASSESSMENT

(ASSOCIATION SETTING)

5.4.1 Target Association Assessment

Whether or not the AIS target and the tracked targets are identical is assessed. If they are determined to be identical, an association symbol is displayed.

When this occurs, the AIS target symbol is activated automatically. z

Attention

Turn off the software button Association

located at the other ship's information area in Section

2.3.6 if you wish to cancel association assessment or

Procedure

to bring back symbols that are no longer displayed.

1 Press the [TT menu] key.

2 Press the following buttons.

3 Target setting

1 Association assessment setting

1 Association assessment

On : Use the association assessment function.

(Targets that are judged to be identical will be indicated as an association symbol.)

Off : Do not use the association assessment function.

(AIS target and tracked target are shown separately even though they are determined to be identical.)

5─53

5.4 TARGET ASSOCIATION ASSESSMENT (ASSOCIATION SETTING) yy yyy

5.4.2 Priority

An association symbol can be created based on either AIS target data or tracked target data.

Procedure 1 Press the [TT menu] key.

2 Press the following buttons.

3 Target setting

1 Association assessment setting

2 Priority

AIS : Symbol is created and displayed based on AIS target data.

TT : Symbol is created and displayed based on tracked target data.

5

5─54

5.4.3 Azimuth

Set an azimuth difference between targets to be identified as one target.

Targets that are within the set azimuth range will be identified as one target.

Procedure 1 Press the [TT menu] key.

2 Press the following buttons.

3 Target setting

1 Association assessment setting

3 Azimuth

Set an azimuth difference between a tracked target and an AIS target to be identified as one target. Set the azimuth range between 0.0 and 9.9 degrees.

A narrower azimuth range means a stricter condition.

The possibility of mistakenly identify resembling targets will be lower, but targets are less likely to be identified as one target.

A wider azimuth range means a looser condition.

Targets are likely to be identified as one target, but targets with similar parameters are likely to be mistakenly identified.

Adjust the setting in accordance with the intention.

Caution

When a large value is set as an association condition, a tracked target near an AIS target is identified as the AIS target and may thus disappear from the display.

For example, when a pilot vessel equipped with the AIS function (a small target which is not a tracked target) goes near a cargo vessel which is a tracked target without the AIS function, the tracked target symbol for the cargo vessel may disappear.

5─55

5.4 TARGET ASSOCIATION ASSESSMENT (ASSOCIATION SETTING) yy yyy

5.4.4 Distance

Set a distance between targets to be identified as one target.

Targets that are within the set distance will be identified as one target.

Procedure 1 Press the [TT menu] key.

2 Press the following buttons.

3 Target setting

1 Association assessment setting

4 Distance

Set a distance between a tracked target and an AIS target to be identified as one target.

Set the distance between 0 and 999 m.

A shorter distance means a stricter condition.

The possibility of mistakenly identify resembling targets will be lower, but targets are less likely to be identified as one target.

A longer distance means a looser condition.

Targets are likely to be identified as one target, but targets with similar parameters are likely to be mistakenly identified.

Adjust the setting in accordance with the intention.

Caution

When a large value is set as an association condition, a tracked target near an AIS target is identified as the AIS target and may thus disappear from the display.

For example, when a pilot vessel equipped with the AIS function (a small target which is not a tracked target) goes near a cargo vessel which is a tracked target without the AIS function, the tracked target symbol for the cargo vessel may disappear.

5

5─56

5.4.5 Course

Set a course difference between targets to be identified as one target.

Targets that are within the set course angle will be identified as one target.

Procedure 1 Press the [TT menu] key.

2 Press the following buttons.

3 Target setting

1 Association assessment setting

5 Course

Set a course difference between a tracked target and an AIS target to be identified as one target. Set the course angle between 0 and 99 degrees.

A narrower course angle means a stricter condition.

The possibility of mistakenly identify resembling targets will be lower, but targets are less likely to be identified as one target.

A wider course angle means a looser condition.

Targets are likely to be identified as one target, but targets with similar parameters are likely to be mistakenly identified.

Adjust the setting in accordance with the intention.

Caution

When a large value is set as an association condition, a tracked target near an AIS target is identified as the AIS target and may thus disappear from the display.

For example, when a pilot vessel equipped with the AIS function (a small target which is not a tracked target) goes near a cargo vessel which is a tracked target without the AIS function, the tracked target symbol for the cargo vessel may disappear.

5─57

5.4 TARGET ASSOCIATION ASSESSMENT (ASSOCIATION SETTING) yy yyy

5.4.6 Speed

Set a speed difference between targets to be identified as one target.

Targets that are within the set speed range will be identified as one target.

Procedure 1 Press the [TT menu] key.

2 Press the following buttons.

3 Target setting

1 Association assessment setting

6 Speed

Set a speed difference between a tracked target and an AIS target to be identified as one target. Set the speed range between 0 and 99 kn.

A smaller speed range means a stricter condition.

The possibility of mistakenly identify resembling targets will be lower, but targets are less likely to be identified as one target.

A larger speed range means a looser condition.

Targets are likely to be identified as one target, but targets with similar parameters are likely to be mistakenly identified.

Adjust the setting in accordance with the intention.

Caution

When a large value is set as an association condition, a tracked target near an AIS target is identified as the AIS target and may thus disappear from the display.

For example, when a pilot vessel equipped with the AIS function (a small target which is not a tracked target) goes near a cargo vessel which is a tracked target without the AIS function, the tracked target symbol for the cargo vessel may disappear.

5

5─58

5.4.7 Hysteresis

Set a hysteresis level at which a tracked target and an AIS target are identified as one target by the association assessment function.

Set the condition for using an association symbol when a tracked target symbol and an AIS target symbol overlap each other.

Procedure 1 Press the [TT menu] key.

2 Press the following buttons.

3 Target setting

1 Association assessment setting

7 Hysteresis

Set a level of hysteresis at which targets are identified as one target between 0% and 300%.

The standard percentage is 100%.

A larger value means a stricter condition.

The possibility of mistakenly identify resembling targets will be lower, but targets are less likely to be identified as one target.

A smaller value means a looser condition.

Targets are likely to be identified as one target, but targets with similar parameters are likely to be mistakenly identified.

Adjust the setting in accordance with the intention.

Caution

When a small value is set as a hysteresis condition, a tracked target near an AIS target is identified as the AIS target and may thus disappear from the display.

For example, when a pilot vessel equipped with the AIS function (a small target which is not a tracked target) goes near a cargo vessel which is a tracked target without the AIS function, the tracked target symbol for the cargo vessel may disappear.

5─59

5.4 TARGET ASSOCIATION ASSESSMENT (ASSOCIATION SETTING) yy yyy

5.4.8 Non-Hysteresis

Set a non-hysteresis level at which targets that were once identified as one target by the association assessment function are identified as separate targets.

Set the condition for separating an association symbol into a tracked target symbol and an AIS target symbol.

Procedure 1 Press the [TT menu] key.

2 Press the following buttons.

3 Target setting

1 Association assessment setting

8 Non-Hysteresis

Set a level of non-hysteresis at which an associated target is separated into individual targets between 0% and 300%. The standard percentage is 100%.

A larger value means a stricter condition.

It becomes harder to separate a tracked target symbol from an AIS target symbol.

Targets that are not separated to start with are less likely to be separated, and also, separated individual symbols are less likely to be displayed properly after separation.

A smaller value means a looser condition.

It becomes easier to separate a tracked target symbol from an AIS target symbol.

Targets that are not separated to start with are more likely to be separated, and also, separated individual symbols are more likely to be displayed soon after separation.

Adjust the setting in accordance with the intention.

Caution

When a small value is set as a hysteresis condition, a tracked target near an AIS target is identified as the AIS target and may thus disappear from the display.

For example, when a pilot vessel equipped with the AIS function (a small target which is not a tracked target) goes near a cargo vessel which is a tracked target without the AIS function, the tracked target symbol for the cargo vessel may disappear.

5

5─60

5.4.9 AIS Target to be Assessed

Specify an AIS target to be assessed for association.

Targets of association assessment can be either activated targets only or both activated and sleeping targets.

Procedure 1 Press the [TT menu] key.

2 Press the following buttons.

3 Target setting

1 Association assessment setting

9 AIS target to be assessed

Select AIS targets to be assessed for association.

Activated : Only activated targets will be assessed for association.

Activated & sleeping : All activated and sleeping targets will be assessed for association.

5─61

5.5 ALARM DISPLAY yy yyy

5.5

ALARM

Alarm messages for Target Tracking (TT) and AIS functions:

Error message Description

CPA/TCPA

New Target

Lost

REF Target

95% Capacity

MAX Target

AIS 95% Capacity

AIS MAX Target

AIS ACT 95% Capacity

AIS ACT MAX

TT(Data)

AIS(Data)

AIS PROC(Data)

AIS Alarm ***

There is a dangerous target.

A new target is acquired in the automatic acquisition zone

There is a lost target.

The accuracy of the reference target may be decreased.

The number of targets being tracked by the Target Tracking function has reached

95% of the maximum.

The number of targets being tracked by the Target Tracking function has reached the maximum.

The number of displayed AIS target symbols has reached 95% of the maximum.

The number of received data items exceeds the maximum number of AIS target symbols that can be displayed.

The number of activated AIS targets by the AIS function has reached 95% of the maximum.

The number of activated AIS targets by the AIS function has reached the maximum.

The target tracking unit is malfunctioning.

The AIS transponder is not connected correctly or the power is turned off.

The AIS unit is malfunctioning.

Alarm information issued with the ALR sentence by the AIS

*** is a 3-digit number which is Local Alarm No in the ALR sentence. For AIS alarms, refer to the table in “AIS Alarm Display” of Section 5.5 “ALARM

DISPLAY.”

An alarm is displayed in the alarm indication (software button ⑭ located at the operation/message area in

Section 2.3.9).

5

Alarm display area

5─62

CPA / TCPA Alarm

Caution

Since these alarms may include some errors depending on the target tracking conditions, the navigation officer himself should make the final decision for ship operations such as collision avoidance.

Making the final navigation decision based only on the alarm may cause accidents such as collisions.

In the system, targets are categorized into two types: tracked / activate AIS targets and dangerous targets.

The grade of danger can easily be recognized on the display at a glance. So the officer can easily decide which target he should pay attention to.

The types of target and alarm are shown below.

CPA / TCPA Alarm

Status Symbol on display Alarm characters Alarm sound Conditions

Tracked target

Activated AIS target

Dangerous target

12

AIS12

12

AIS12

Red blinking

• CPA > CPA LIMIT

• 0 > TCPA

• TCPA > TCPA LIMIT

(Off) (Off)

The symbol is displayed when one of the above conditions is met.

CPA / TCPA

Beep sound

(pee-poh)

Alarm acknowledgeable

• CPA ≤ CPA LIMIT,

• 0 ≤ TCPA ≤ TCPA LIMIT

An alarm is issued when all the conditions are met.

The AIS targets that issues alarm refer to Section 5.1.5

“Setting Collision Decision

Criteria (CPA/TCPA Limit)”.

CPA Limit and TCPA Limit: The Setting Values

5─63

5.5 ALARM DISPLAY yy yyy

Alarm for New Target Acquired in Automatic Acquisition Zone (New Target)

Caution

In setting an automatic acquisition zone, it is necessary to adjust the gain, sea clutter suppression and rain / snow clutter suppression to ensure that target echoes are displayed in the optimum conditions. No automatic acquisition zone alarms will be issued for targets undetected by the radar, and this may cause accidents such as collisions.

The automatic acquisition function sets a zone in a range and issues an alarm when a new target (which is not yet acquired) goes into this zone.

For the setting of an automatic acquisition zone, refer to “Automatic Acquisition [AUTO]” in Section 5.2.1

“Acquiring Target [ACQ].”

Alarm for New Target Acquired in Automatic Acquisition Zone

Status Symbol on display Alarm characters Alarm sound Conditions

5

New target in automatic acquisition zone

12

Red Blinking

New Target

Beep sound (pipi-pipi)

Alarm acknowledgeable

The alarm is issued when a new target is acquired in the automatic acquisition zone.

Note: When an already acquired target goes into automatic acquisition zone, the alarm message is not displayed and the buzzer does not sound either.

5─64

Lost Target Alarm

z

Attention

If the gain, sea clutter suppression, rain/snow clutter

suppression are not adjusted adequately, the lost target alarm may be easily generated. So such adjustments should be mad carefully.

When it is impossible to continue tracking any acquired and tracked target, or the data of AIS target cannot received for a specified time, the LOST alarm will be generated. The typical causes for alarm generation are shown below, but not limited to the following:

• The target echo is very weak.

• The target is shadowed by a shore or a large ship and its echo is not received.

• The target echo is blurred by sea clutter returns.

If a target under tracking goes into a range of 32 nm and can no longer be tracked, it is canceled without a lost target alarm being issued.

Lost Target Alarm

Status Symbol on display Alarm characters Alarm sound Conditions

Lost target

12

AIS12

Red Blinking

Lost

Beep

sound (pee)

Alarm acknowledgeable

The alarm will sound once when a lost target symbol is displayed.

5─65

026

029

030

035

002

003

004

005

008

5.5 ALARM DISPLAY yy yyy

System Function Alarm (TT Data)

When an abnormal state of an input signal or Target Tracking unit may have a trouble, alarm is generated.

When an alarm occurs against any Target Tracking function, TT (Data) will appear in the alarm indication

(Software button ⑭ located at the operation/message area in Section 2.3.9), but no indication is made in the

Tracked Target information display (panel display area in Section 2.3.8). This status means that there is any operational trouble in the Target Tracking unit. Please, contact the service depot or the manufactures.

System Function Alarm

Alarm characters Alarm sound

Conditions

TT (DATA)

Beep sound (pipipi)

Alarm acknowledgeable

An alarm sound is generated when a Target Tracking circuit error occurs.

Gyro Set Alarm

The GYRO I/F in this system receives signals from a gyro. Even if the power is turned off, the system will follow up the gyro. However, the system stops the follow-up operation when the power of the master gyro is turned off or when any trouble occurs to the line. When the power of the master gyro is recovered, the

Set Gyro alarm will be generated.

If this alarm occurs, set the gyro.

Gyro Set Alarm

Alarm characters Alarm sound

Conditions

Set Gyro Beep sound (pipi-pipi)

The signals from the gyro are stopped, but the gyro is recovered.

AIS Alarm Display

The following provides a list of the AIS alarm.

Alarm No. Definition

5

Antenna VSWR exceeds limit

Rx channel 1 malfunction

Rx channel 2 malfunction

Rx channel 70 malfunction

MKD connection lost no sensor position in use no valid SOG information no valid COG information no valid ROT information

5─66

5.6

TRACK

5.6.1 Display Past Tracks (Past Position)

With the past position function (Past Position), up to 6 past tracked and AIS target positions can be displayed (5 set time and distance intervals).

Select one of the time intervals at which past time positions should be displayed: 0.5 minutes, 1 minute, 2 minutes, and 4 minutes. Also, select one of the distance intervals at which past locations should be displayed:

0.1 NM, 0.2 NM, 0.5 NM, and 1 NM.

Procedure 1 Press the [TT menu] key.

2 Press the following buttons.

3 Target setting

3 Past position

3 Press a number key for the desired setting.

0.5 minutes, 1 minute, 2 minutes, and 4 minutes :

Past positions are displayed at a specified time interval.

0.1 NM, 0.2 NM, 0.5 NM, and 1 NM :

Past locations are displayed at a specified distance interval.

The selected interval will be displayed on the Past position display interval switching button (Software button ⑥ located at the other ship's information area in Section 2.3.6).

The track display mode is not active when the button shows "Off." Track modes are linked with vector modes to show a true or relative track. In the relative vector mode, a relative track of the target is shown. In the true vector mode, a true track obtained from relative azimuth and distance, and own ship course and speed is displayed.

5─67

5.6 TRACK DISPLAY yy yyy

5.6.2 Other Ship's Tracks (Target Track Setting)

Make track settings for acquired tracked and AIS targets.

This equipment can display tracks of up to 20 other vessels.

* Tracks of other ships will not be recorded with the Target Track Function is deactivated.

[I] Track color setting (Target Track Color)

Procedure 1 Place the cursor over a tracked target or an AIS target, and press the

[CLR/INFO] key.

2 Target information menu opens.

3 Press the [2] key.

Track color choices are listed (Track Color).

4 Press a number key for the desired color.

The track will be shown in the selected color.

[II] Turning on/off the Target Track Function

Procedure 1 Press the [TT menu] key.

2 Press the following buttons.

4 Target Track Setting

1 Target Track Color

On : Activate the Target Track Function.

Off : Deactivate the Target Track Function.

* Selecting "Off" deactivates the entire Target Track Function.

Tracks will not be recorded; therefore, they cannot be checked later on.

5

5─68

[III] Other ship's track color setting (Target Track Color)

The track color can be the same for all tracked targets, or different colors can be assigned to the first 20 targets.

* Tracks of other ships will not be recorded with the Target Track Function is deactivated.

Procedure 1 Press the [TT menu] key.

2 Press the following buttons.

4 Target Track Setting

2 Target Track Color

3 Press the [1] key.

Choices for "All" are displayed.

4 Press a number key for the desired setting.

Individual : Assign different colors to individual tracks.

Color name : The selected color will be assigned to all tracks. Select a track color.

When "INDIVIDUAL" is selected

5 Press a number key for the desired track number.

Color choices for the selected track number are displayed.

6 Press a number key that corresponds to the desired track color.

The selected color will be assigned to the selected track.

Selecting "INDIVIDUAL" allows assignment of different colors to the first 20 tracks, from Track No.1 to Track

No.20. Select a color for each target. Press the target number to see the list of available colors. Then, select a color.

There are 8 colors: off, white, cyan, blue, green yellow, pink, and red.

* Note that different colors can be assigned to individual tracks only when "INDIVIDUAL" is selected.

5─69

5.6 TRACK DISPLAY yy yyy

[IV] Other ship's track display setting (Target Track Display)

Other ship's track display can be turned on/off. Also, track display mode can be chosen between display/non-display of all tracks and individual tracks.

Procedure 1 Press the [TT menu] key.

2 Press the following buttons.

4 Target Track Setting

3 Target Track Display

3 Press the [1] key.

Choices for "All" are displayed.

4 Press a number key for the desired setting.

Individual : Set track display mode for each

Off : track.

Hide all tracks for all ships.

On : Show all tracks for all ships.

* Even though the track display mode is set to "Off," tracks of other ships are still recorded as long as the track recording interval is set.

When "INDIVIDUAL" is selected

5 Press a number key for the desired track number.

Display/Non-display of the selected track can be set.

On : Show the track.

Off : Do not show the track.

Selecting "INDIVIDUAL" allows the track display mode to be set for the first 20 tracks, from Track No.1 to

Track No.20. For each target, decide whether or not the track should be displayed. The mode changes between ON and OFF every time the ON/OFF window is pressed.

* Note that the track display mode can be set for individual tracks only when "INDIVIDUAL" is selected.

5

5─70

[V] Other ship track recording interval setting (Track Memory Interval)

A time interval for recording tracks of other ships can be set.

* This function can be used only when the Target Track Setting function is enabled.

Procedure 1 Press the [TT menu] key.

2 Press the following buttons.

4 Target Track Setting

4 Track Memory Interval

Choices for "Target Memory Interval" are displayed.

3 Press a number key that corresponds to the desired track recording interval.

Select from the following:

Off,

3 sec, 5 sec, 10 sec, 30 sec,

1 min, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min, 30 min, 60 min,

1 NM, 3 NM, 5 NM, and 10 NM

5─71

5.6 TRACK DISPLAY yy yyy

[VI] Deletion of other ship's tracks (Clear Track)

Tracks of other ships can be deleted. They can be deleted by track color or by track number.

* When using the card-based track display function (Card T. TRK Display), tracks of other ships that are loaded from the card cannot be deleted.

Deletion of other ship's tracks by track color (Clear Track Color)

Procedure 1 Press the [TT menu] key.

2 Press the following buttons.

4 Target Track Setting

5 Clear Track Color

3 Press a number key that corresponds to the track color to be deleted.

Choices for "Clear Track Color" are displayed.

The confirmation dialog window opens.

4 Press the [1] key.

Tracks of the selected color will all be deleted.

Select ALL to delete all tracks regardless of the color.

Deletion of other ship's tracks by track number (Clear Track Number)

Procedure 1 Press the [TT menu] key.

2 Press the following buttons.

4 Target Track Setting

6 Clear Track Number

Choices for "Clear Track Number" are displayed.

3 Press a number key that corresponds to the track number to be deleted.

The confirmation dialog window opens.

4 Press the [1] key.

Tracks of the selected number will all be deleted.

Select ALL to delete all tracks regardless of the number.

5

5─72

[VII] Loading target tracks from CARD2 (Card2 Track Display)

Target tracks saved in CARD2 can be loaded.

Procedure 1 Insert a Flash memory card into the card slot.

Refer to the attached instruction manual for how to insert/remove the card.

2 Press the [TT menu] key.

3 Press the following buttons.

4 Target Track Setting

7 Card2 Track Display

4 Input the number of track and press the

[ENT] key.

Data of the selected track number is loaded and displayed on the radar screen.

5─73

SECTION 6

TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES

ON DISPLAY

WAVE

6.2 STRENGTH OF REFLECTION FROM THE TARGET........ 6-4

ECHOES ............................................................... 6-10

6.5 DISPLAY OF RADAR TRANSPONDER (SART).............. 6-13

The radar operator has a role of interpreting the radar displays to provide his best aid in maneuvering the ship.

For this purpose, the operator has to observe the radar displays after fully understanding the advantages and disadvantages that the radar has. For better interpretation of radar display, it is important to gain more experiences by operating the radar equipment in fair weathers and comparing the target ships watched with the naked eyes and their echoes on the radar display.

The radar is mainly used to monitor the courses of own ship and other ships in open seas, to check buoys and other nautical marks when entering a port, to measure own ship’s position in the coastal waters relative to the bearings and ranges of the shore or islands using a chart, and to monitor the position and movement of a heavy rain if it appears on the radar display.

Various types of radar display will be explained below.

6─1

6.1 RADAR WAVE WITH THE HORIZON yyy yyy

6.1

RADAR WAVE WITH THE HORIZON

Radar beam radiation has the nature of propagating nearly along the curved surface of the earth.

The propagation varies with the property of the air layer through which the radar beam propagates.

In the normal propagation, the distance (D) of the radar wave to the horizon is approximately 10% longer than the distance to the optical horizon. The distance (D) is given by the following formula:

D=2.23( h1

+ h2 )(nm) h1: Height (m) of radar scanner above sea level h2: Height (m) of a target above sea level

Figure 6.1 is a diagram for determining the maximum detection range of a target that is limited by the curve of the earth surface in the normal propagation.

6

6─2

D (nm)

Height of Radar Scanner

Detective Range

Figure 6.1

Height of Target

When the height of own ship’s scanner is 10 m for instance,

(a) A target that can be detected at the radar range of 64 nm on the radar display is required to have a height of 660 m or more.

(b) If the height of a target is 10 m, the radar range has to be approx. 15 nm. However, the maximum radar range at which a target can be detected on the radar display depends upon the size of the target and the weather conditions, that is, the radar range may increase or decrease depending upon those conditions.

6─3

6.2 STRENGTH OF REFLECTION FROM THE TARGET yyy yyy

6.2

STRENGTH OF REFLECTION FROM THE

TARGET

The signal intensity reflected from a target depends not only on the height and size of the target but also on its material and shape. The echo intensity from a higher and larger target is not always higher in general.

In particular, the echo from a coast line is affected by the geographic conditions of the coast.

If the coast has a very gentle slop, the echo from a mountain of the inland appears on the radar display.

Therefore, the distance to the coast line should be measured carefully.

Figure 6.2

Table 6.1 shows the graph indicating the relation between the target detection distance and the radar reflection cross-sectional area (RCS) with regard to the type and the height of the target in a situation in which the weather is good, the sea state is calm and the radio wave propagation is normal. As revealed by this table, even on the same sea shore line, detection distance greatly differs depending on the height of the target from the surface of the sea. Furthermore, because the target detection distance is greatly influenced by the shape and material of the target and environmental conditions, such as the sea state, weather, and radio wave propagation, caution should be taken when detecting distance of target.

6

6─4

Table 6.1 Relation between type and height of target and detection distance and RCS

Type of target

Sea shore line

Sea shore line

Sea shore line

SOLAS target ship (>5000GT)

SOLAS target ship (>500GT)

Small boat with IMO standard compatible radar reflector

Marine buoy with corner reflector

Standard marine buoy

10-meter small boat without radar reflector

Height from sea surface

(m)

60

6

3

10

5

3.5

3.5

Detection distance (NM)

20

8

6

11

8

4.9

4.6

20

8

6

11

8

3.6

3.0

50,000

5000

2500

50,000

1800

10

5

RCS (m²)

50,000

5000

2500

30,000

1000

1

0.5

Caution: Detection distance shown in the above table may greatly decrease depending on the shape of the target, sea state, weather and radio wave propagation conditions.

6─5

6.3 SEA CLUTTERS yyy yyy

6.3

SEA

In addition to the echo required for observing ships and land radar video image also includes unnecessary echo, such as reflection from waves on the sea surface and reflection from rain and snow. Reflection from the sea surface is called "sea clutter," and reflection from rain and snow is called "rain and snow clutter," and those spurious waves must be eliminated by the clutter rejection function.

clutter

Sea clutter appears as an image radiating outwardly from the center of the radar display and changing depending on the size and the shape of waves. Generally, as waves become larger, image level of the sea clutter is intensified and the clutter far away is also displayed. When waves are large and the sea clutter level is high, it is difficult to distinguish sea clutter from a small boat whose reflection intensity is weak.

Accordingly, it is necessary to properly adjust the sea clutter rejection function. Table 6.2 shows the relation between the sea state (SS) showing the size of waves generated by wind and the radar's detection probability.

Table 6.2 Sea state and probability of target detection

RCS SS1 to 2 SS2 to 3 SS3 to 4 SS4 to 5

0.1m

2

0.5 m

2

V

1 m

2

V V V

S band radar (probability to detect a target at a distance of 0.4 NM)

RCS SS1 to 2 SS2 to 3 SS3 to 4 SS4 to 5

1m

2

5 m

2

10 m

2

V-M

X band radar (probability to detect a target at a distance of 0.7 NM)

V: Detection probability of 80 %

M: Detection probability of 50 %

NV: Detection probability of less than 50 %

6

6─6

As shown in Table 6.3, the number of SS increases as the wind speed becomes high and the waves become large. Table 6.2 reveals that detection probability decreases from V (80 %) to NV (less than 50 %) as the number of SS increases. Therefore, even if the sea state is calm and a target clearly appears on the radar display, when the sea state becomes rough, target detection probability decreases resulting in difficulty of target detection by the radar.

Table 6.3 Relation between Douglas sea state and average wind speed and significant wave height

Sea state Average wind speed (kn) Significant wave height (m)

0 <4

1 5-7

<0.2

0.6

2 7-11

3 12-16

0.9

1.2

4 17-19 2.0

5 20-25

6 26-33

3.0

4.0

Significant wave height: an average of top N/3 higher waves when the number of waves detected within a constant time duration is N

For example, in the case of a standard marine buoy, RCS of X band radar is 5 m2 as shown in Table 6.1.

When observing such a target in the sea state (SS3) in which significant wave height exceeds 1.2 meters, detection probability is M-NV, as shown in Table 6.2, which indicates 50 % or less.

[II] Rain and snow clutter

Rain and snow clutter is a video image that appears in a location where rain or snow is falling. The image changes according to the amount of rain (or the amount of snowfall). As precipitation increases, the image of rain and snow clutter becomes intensified on the radar display, and in the case of localized heavy rain, an image similar to the image indicating land is displayed in some cases. Furthermore, because radio waves tend to attenuate due to rain and snow, the ability to detect a target in the rain and snow clutter or a target beyond the rain and snow clutter may decrease. The amount of attenuation depends on the transmission frequency, antenna beam width, and the pulse length. Figure 6.3 and Figure 6.4 show examples in which detection distance is reduced due to the influence of precipitation. Because of this, a target, which clearly appeared up to 10 NM by an X band radar (pulse width of 0.8

μs) when it was not raining, may become dimly visible up to 5 NM when the amount of rain becomes 4 millimeters per hour.

Furthermore, when comparing the X band radar with the S band radar, target detection distance decreases less when an S band radar is used, which means it is influenced less by precipitation.

6─7

6.3 SEA CLUTTERS yyy yyy

16

14

12

10

8

Precipitation of 16 mm/hr Pulse width 0.05

μs

Precipitation of 4 mm/hr Pulse width 0.05

μs

Precipitation of 16 mm/hr Pulse width 0.8 μs

Precipitation of 4 mm/hr Pulse width 0.8

μs

0

0 2 4 6 8 10 12

Detection distance while it is not raining (NM)

14 16

Figure 6.3 Decreased target detection distance by S band radar due to precipitation

16

6

4

2

Precipitation of 16 mm/hr Pulse width 0.05 μs

14

Precipitation of 4 mm/hr Pulse width 0.05

μs

12

10

8

Precipitation of 16 mm/hr Pulse width 0.8

μs

Precipitation of 4 mm/hr Pulse width 0.8

μs

6

4

2

0

0 2 4 6 8 1 12 14 16

Detection distance while it is not raining (NM)

Figure 6.4 Decreased target detection distance by X band radar due to precipitation

6

6─8

[III] Coping with sea clutter and rain and snow clutter

When the weather is bad and the ocean is rough, the use of an S band radar is effective because the radar is not influenced by sea clutter so much and attenuation due to rain drops is small. When an X band radar is used, reducing the pulse width will reduce the influence by spurious waves, and also the spurious wave rejection function effectively works; therefore, the use of short pulse is effective when the weather is bad.

By using image processing functions PROCl 1 to 3, it is expected that spurious waves are further suppressed. Since optimal settings for those items can be automatically made by using the function mode, it is recommended that STORM or RAIN be used by selecting the function mode when the weather is bad.

For details of the function mode, see Section 3.10 “USE FUNCTION SWITCH [FUNC]”.

6─9

6.4 FALSE ECHOES yyy yyy

6.4

FALSE

The radar observer may be embarrassed with some echoes that do not exist actually. These false echoes appear by the following causes that are well known:

[I] Shadow

When the radar scanner is installed near a funnel or mast, the echo of a target that exists in the direction of the funnel or mast cannot appear on the radar display because the radar beam is reflected on the funnel or mast. Whether there are some false echoes due to shadows can be checked monitoring the sea clutter returns, in which there may be a part of weak or no returns.

Such shadows appear always in the same directions, which the operator should have in mind in radar operation.

[II] Side Lobe Effect

A broken-line circular arc may appear at the same range as the main lobe of the radar beam on the radar display. This type of false echo can easily be discriminated when a target echo appears isolated. (See

Figure 6.5.)

HL

6

Figure 6.5

[III] False Echo by Secondary Reflection

When a target exists near own ship, two echoes from the single target may appear on the radar display.

One of those echoes is the direct echo return from the target and the other is the secondary reflection return from a mast or funnel that stands in the same direction as shown in Figure 6.6.

Direct microwave

HL

Actual target

Radar scanner

False echo from funnel

Funnel

Secondary reflection of microwave

Figure 6.6

6─10

False echo from funnel

[IV] False Echo by Multiple Reflection

When there is a large structure or ship with a high vertical surface near own ship as shown in Figure 6.7, multiple refection returns may appear on the radar display. These echoes appear in the same intervals, of which the nearest echo is the true echo of the target.

Figure 6.7

[V] Abnormal Propagation

The maximum radar detection range depends upon the height of the scanner and the height of a target as described in the Section 6.1 “RADAR WAVE WITH THE HORIZON”. If a so-called “duct” occurs on the sea surface due to a certain weather condition, however, the radar beam may propagate to a abnormally long distance, at which a target may be detected by the radar.

For instance, assuming that the radar range is 6 NM (on the repetition frequency of 1100 Hz), the first pulse is reflected from a target at about 76 NM or more and received during the next pulse repetition time.

In this case, a false echo appears at a position that is about 76 NM shorter than the actual distance.

If the false echo appears at 5 NM on the radar display, the true distance of the target is 5+76=81 NM. On the radar range scale of 1.5 NM (on the repetition frequency of 1900 Hz), a false echo may appear at a position that is about 43 NM shorter than the actual distance.

This type of false echo can be discriminated by changing over the range scale (the repetition frequency), because the distance of the target changes accordingly.

6─11

6.4 FALSE ECHOES yyy yyy

[VI] Radar Interference

When another radar equipment using the same frequency band as that on own ship is near own ship, a radar interference pattern may appear on the radar display. This interference pattern consists of a number of spots which appear in various forms. In many cases, these spots do not always appear at the same places, so that they can be discriminated from the target echoes. (See Figure 6.8.)

HL HL

Figure 6.8

If radar equipment causing an interference pattern and this radar are of the same model, their transmitting repetition frequency is nearly the same. As a result, interference patterns may be displayed concentrically.

In this case, the interference patterns cannot be eliminated by using only the interference reflector function, so press [TX/PRF] several times to fine-tune the transmitting repetition frequency.

An interference suppressing effect can be heightened by applying a different transmitting repetition frequency to the interference pattern source radar and this radar.

6

6─12

6.5

DISPLAY OF RADAR TRANSPONDER

(SART)

The SART (Search and rescue Radar Transponder) is a survival device authorized by the GMDSS (Global

Maritime Distress and Safety System), which is used for locating survivors in case that a distress accident occurs at sea. The SART is designed to operate in the 9 GHz frequency band.

When receiving the 9 GHz radar signal (interrogating signal) transmitted from the radar equipment on a rescue ship or search aircraft, the SART transmit a series of response signals to inform the distress position to the rescue and search party.

* This radar provides a shortcut item to make settings for SART signal reception. Execution of this item automatically switches to the setting for SART reception.

Procedure 1 Press [RANGE +] or [RANGE -] to set the radar range to 6 NM or 12 NM.

2 Press [RADAR MENU] twice.

The RADAR Menu will appear.

3 Press

Each time the key is pressed, switching between

ON and OFF takes place.

6─13

6.5 DISPLAY OF RADAR TRANSPONDER yyy yyy

With the SART display mode set to ON, settings as shown below are made automatically.

(1) Sea clutter control: Minimum (Most counterclockwise)

(2) AUTO SEA function:

(3) Rain and Snow Clutter Control (RAIN):

OFF minimum

(4) Auto Rain and Snow Clutter function (AUTO RAIN): OFF

(5) TUNE control: No tuning (to weaken clutter echoes) rejector

(7) PROCESS:

OFF

OFF

SART code

Position of SART

Position of the rescue craft

Land

Other ships

Attention

[Example of Display]

z When the SART function is set to ON to detect the SART signal, small

targets around own ship will disappear from the radar display. So it is necessary to exercise full surveillance over the conditions around own ship by visual watch in order to avoid any collision or stranding.

If two or more sets of radar equipment are installed on own ship, use one set of 9 GHz band radar for detection of the SART signal and operate others as normal radars for avoiding collision, monitoring targets around own ship, and checking on own ship’s position and avoidance of stranding.

After end of detecting the START signal, turn the START display off.

Then the radar returns normally to the nautical mode.

6

6─14

6─15

SECTION 7

SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION

7.1.1 How to open the Adjust Menu ............................. 7-2

7.3.1.3 Reception Sentence Setting

(RX Sentence) ............................................ 7-26

7.3.1.4 Transmission Port Setting (TX Port)........ 7-28

7.3.2 Sector Blank Setting (Sector Blank) ................. 7-30

7.3.3 TNI Blank Setting (TNI Blank) ............................ 7-32

7.1.5 Antenna Height Setting (Antenna Hight)............ 7-8

7.1.6 Setting of CCRP/Antenna/GPS Antenna Position

(CCRP Setting)...................................................... 7-9

7.2.1 Ship Heading Equipment Setting

(Heading Equipment) ......................................... 7-14

7.2.2 NSK Unit Setting................................................. 7-15

7.2.3 True Bearing Value Setting (Set GYRO) ........... 7-17

7.2.5 Ship Speed Equipment Setting

(Speed Equipment)............................................. 7-19

7.2.6 Manual Speed Setting (Manual Speed)............. 7-20

7.2.7 Current Correction (SET/DRIFT) Setting .......... 7-21

7.3 SETTINGS .................................................................. 7-23

7.3.1 Communication Port Setting

(COM Port Setting) ............................................. 7-23

(Output Pulse) ..................................................... 7-33

7.3.5 Language Setting (Language) ........................... 7-34

7.3.6 Date/Time Display Setting

(Date/Time Setting) ............................................. 7-35

7.4 ADJUSTMENT............................................................ 7-36

7.4.1 Noise Level Adjustment (Noise Level) .............. 7-37

7.4.2 Adjustment of Target Tracking Function (TT) .. 7-39

7.4.3 Main Bang Suppression Adjustment

(MBS Level) ......................................................... 7-43

7.4.4 Adjustment of Performance Monitor

(NJU-85) ............................................................... 7-45

7.3.1.2 Reception Port Setting (RX Port)............. 7-25

7.5.1 Scanner Safety Switch Setting

(Safety Switch) .................................................... 7-48

7.5.2 Initialization of Memory Area (Area Initial) ....... 7-49

7.5.3 Save of Internal Memory Data (Card2) .............. 7-50

7.5.4 Update of Character String Data

(String Data Update)............................................ 7-52

7.1

SETTINGS

This section describes the electrical adjustments of the equipment as the adjustment procedures to be carried out by service persons at the time of installation.

CAUTION

Do not carry out the adjustments of the equipment except authorized service persons. If wrong setting is carried out, this may cause unstable operation.

Do not carry out the adjustments during navigation. Otherwise, the radar performance may be affected, resulting in an accident or trouble.

Tuning, bearing and range adjustments can be made from the operation panel. Start the adjustment mode in the following procedures.

7─1

7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION yyy yyyy

7.1.1 How to open the Adjust Menu

Procedure

Exit

1 Continue to press [RADAR MENU] key.

The Code Input Menu will appear.

2 Press [0] key.

3 Move the cursor onto the “ENT” button in the Code Input menu, and press

[ENT] key.

The Adjust Menu will appear.

4 Press [1] key.

The Equipment Setup Menu will appear.

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The Main Menu will reappear.

7

7─2

7.1.2 Tuning Adjustment

Adjust the tuning control for the transmitter and receiver.

The turning control should be adjusted when the system is installed or when the magnetron is replaced.

Procedure 1 Set a range of 24 NM or more.

2 Hold down [RADAR MENU] key.

The CODE Input screen opens.

3 Press [0] key.

The numeric keypad screen opens.

Exit

4 Place the cursor over the “ENT” button of the numeric keypad and press [ENT] key.

Adjust Menu opens.

5 Press [1] key.

Equipment Setup menu opens.

6 Press [3] key.

A numeric keypad screen for Tune Adjustment opens.

7 Adjust the value until the tuning state gauge reaches maximum by inputting a value with the number keys or by turning the multi-dial to change the value.

8 When the adjustment is complete, place the cursor over the “ENT” button of the numeric keypad and press [ENT] key.

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The Main Menu will reappear.

The adjustment value is memorized and the adjustment is complete.

7─3

7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION yyy yyyy

[I] Tune Indicator Adjustment

Set the scale mark when the tune indicator bar reaches the maximum point.

Procedure 1 Set the range to 24 NM or more.

2 Hold down [RADAR MENU] key.

The CODE Input screen opens.

3 Press [0] key.

The numeric keypad screen opens.

4 Place the cursor over the “ENT” button of the numeric keypad and press [ENT] key.

Adjust Menu opens.

5 Press [4] key.

TXRX Setting menu opens.

6 Press [3] key.

The Tune Indicator numeric keypad screen opens.

7 Adjust the value until the tune indicator bar at the top left corner of the screen reads 80% to 90% by inputting a value with the number keys or by turning the multi-dial to change the value.

8 Place the cursor over the “ENT” button and press [ENT] key.

The tune level value is memorized and the level adjustment is complete.

Note: Do not let the tune indicator bar reach 100% while adjusting the tune level. The automatic tuning function may not perform properly if the bar reaches 100%.

Set the level such that the tune indicator bar always reads 80% to 90%.

7

7─4

With the JMA-5212 radar:

For this model, perform Tune Peak Adjustment and Tune Indicator Adjustment explained below.

After the above adjustment procedure, perform the adjustment procedure below.

[II] Tune Peak Adjustment

Adjust the tune indicator and echo peak.

Procedure 1 Set the range to 24 NM or more.

2 Hold down [RADAR MENU] key.

The CODE Input screen opens.

3 Press [0] key.

The numeric keypad screen opens.

4 Place the cursor over the “ENT” button of the numeric keypad and press [ENT] key.

Adjust Menu opens.

5 Press [4] key.

TXRX Setting menu opens.

6 Press [2] key.

The Tune Indicator numeric keypad screen opens.

7 Adjust the tune peak value until the tune indicator bar at the top left corner of the screen reaches maximum by inputting a value with the number keys or by turning the multi-dial to change the value.

8 Place the cursor over the “ENT” button and press [ENT] key.

The tune peak value is memorized and the peak adjustment is complete.

Note: Always set the tune peak adjustment value to 64.

When the equipment is used for a long time and the automatic tuning function no longer works properly, adjusting the tune peak adjustment value may result in improvement of the automatic tuning function.

It should be noted that an optimal adjustment value is required for proper operation of the automatic tuning function.

7─5

7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION yyy yyyy

7.1.3 Bearing Adjustment

Adjust the bearing so that bearing of the target measured with the ship’s compass matches that of the target echo on the radar display.

Procedure 1 Press AZI MODE to select the relative bearing presentation [H UP] mode. Set

Image Processing to OFF.

[AZI MODE]

→ Software button ⑧ located at the top left corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.1

→ Software button ④ located at the bottom left corner of the radar display described in Section 2.3.2.

2 Measure the bearing of an adequate target (for example, a ship at anchor, a breakwater or a buoy) relative to own ship’s heading.

3 Open the Equipment Setup Menu.

4 Press [1] key.

The Code Input Menu will appear.

Exit

5 Using numeric key, enter the value and then press “ENT” button, and press “EXIT” button to determine the value.

The multi-function control can also be used to enter the value.

6 Repeat Step 5 above, and adjust to display the target measured in Step 2 to the measured bearing.

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The Main Menu will reappear.

7

7─6

7.1.4 Range Adjustment

Adjust the range so that the range of the target on the radar video is indicated correctly.

Procedure 1 Search the radar display for a target of which range is already known.

2 Open the Equipment Setup Menu.

3 Press [2] key.

The Code Input Menu will appear.

4 Using numeric pad, enter the value and then press “ENT” button, and press

Exit

“EXIT” button to determine the value.

The multi-function control can also be used to enter the value.

5 Repeat step 4, and adjust until the target range measured in step 1 and the range on the radar display become identical.

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The Main Menu will reappear.

7─7

7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION yyy yyyy

7.1.5 Antenna Height Setting (Antenna Hight)

Set the antenna height above the sea level, but change this setting carelessly.

Procedure 1 Measure the height from the sea level to the antenna in advance.

2 Open the Adjust Menu.

3 Press [4] key.

The TXRX Setting Menu will appear.

Exit

4 Press [1] key.

The Antenna Height Set Value window will appear.

5 Select the antenna height measured in step 1 from the pull-down menu by pressing the numeric key [1] to [4].

The antenna height will be determined.

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The Main Menu will reappear.

7

7─8

7.1.6 Setting of CCRP/Antenna/GPS Antenna Position (CCRP Setting)

Set the own ship's CCRP location, radar antenna installation location, and GPS installation location.

GPS : Up to 4 locations can be inputted (select one through the receiving port setting when using the

GPS).

Radar antenna : 1 location can be inputted (one master and one slave).

CCRP : 1 location can be inputted (another location is reserved as an antenna location).

Procedure 1 Measure the CCRP, radar antenna, and

GPS antenna positions beforehand.

2 Open

3 Press the following keys.

7 Hull Display Setting

1 CCRP Setting

4 Input the vessel length in the Length field and the vessel width in the Beam field at the top right corner of the CCRP

Setting screen.

5 Move the cursor to the X and Y values of CCRP1. Press the ENT key and input the CCRP1 position.

CCRP is on the starboard side of the ship when X>0 and is on the port side of the ship when X<0.

6 In the same manner, input the GPS antenna and radar antenna positions.

7 Press [0] key and exit the CCRP setting screen.

7─9

7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION yyy yyyy

GPS position :

If you wish to connect multiple GPS systems to a COM port and select a GPS position to be used, select it through the receiving port setting of the GPS you wish to use.

Reference: Section 7.3.1.2 “Reception Port Setting (RX Port)”

Radar antenna position :

The radar antenna position changes as the antenna mode is switched between the master mode and the slave mode by the simplified inter-switch.

CCRP position :

Only one position can be set.

If CCRP1 is outside the display area, CCRP2 (antenna position) becomes the CCRP.

7

7─10

7.2

NAVIGATOR

This section describes the electrical adjustment procedures to be performed by service engineers during system installation.

CAUTION

Do not carry out the adjustments of the equipment except authorized service persons. If wrong setting is carried out, this may cause unstable operation.

Do not carry out the adjustments during navigation.

Otherwise, the radar performance may be affected,

resulting in an accident or trouble.

Make an appropriate setting for each type of equipment when inputting true bearing signals, true bearing data, and speed data.

Settings and parameters are different for each type of equipment.

Make settings for the type of equipment to be connected.

[I] Inputting analog true bearing signals from a gyro system through synchronization and steps

By following the procedure described in the INSTALLATION MANUAL, connect the optional NSK unit

(NCT-4106A) to this equipment. Then, follow the steps below to make settings.

In Section 7.2.1 “Ship Heading Equipment Setting (Heading Equipment),” select 1: GYRO (NCT-4106A,

JLR10, JRL20/30).

By referring to Section 7.2.2 “NSK Unit Setting,” make a setting for the gyro system.

By referring to Section 7.2.3 “True Bearing Value Setting (Set GYRO),” make a setting such that the gyro azimuth and the radar azimuth are the same.

Refer to an applicable page for details.

7─11

7.2 NAVIGATOR SETTING yyy yyyy

[II] Inputting digital true bearing signals from a gyro system (IEC61162, NMEA0183)

By following the procedure described in the INSTALLATION MANUAL, connect the gyro system to this equipment. Then, follow the steps below to make settings.

In Section 7.2.1 “Ship Heading Equipment Setting (Heading Equipment),” select 2: COMPASS (IEC61162).

In Section 7.3.1.1 “Baud Rate Setting,” select 5. COM5 (COMPASS).

Select either 38400 bps or 48000 bps depending on the data baud rate outputted from the GPS compass.

(*) For digital signal output from the gyro system

Select 38400 bps if possible. A higher baud rate means shorter data output cycle, which results in better course following performance.

If the system allows setting of data output cycle, set it to 10 ms to 20 ms.

A longer data output cycle results in lower course following performance. This may affect the radar performance level and the target tracking performance level.

Refer to an applicable page for details.

[III] Inputting true bearing data from GPS Compass JLR10 or JLR20/30

By following the procedure described in the INSTALLATION MANUAL, connect GPS Compass JLR10 or

JLR20/30 to this equipment. Then, follow the steps below to make settings.

In Section 7.2.1 “Ship Heading Equipment Setting (Heading Equipment),” select 1: GYRO (NCT-4106A,

JLR10, JRL20/30).

True bearing value setting described in Section 7.2.3 is not required when using the GPS compass.

If the GPS compass azimuth and the radar azimuth are not the same, use the GPS compass to adjust the azimuth.

Refer to an applicable page for details.

[IV] Inputting digital true bearing data from a GPS compass (other than JLR10 and

JLR20/30) or other true bearing systems (IEC61162 or NMEA0183)

By following the procedure described in the INSTALLATION MANUAL, connect a GPS compass or other true bearing system to this equipment. Then, follow the steps below to make settings.

In Section 7.2.1 “Ship Heading Equipment Setting (Heading Equipment),” select 2: COMPASS (IEC61162).

In Section 7.3.1.1 “Baud Rate Setting,” select 5. COM5 (COMPASS).

Select either 38400 bps or 48000 bps depending on the data baud rate outputted from the GPS compass.

(*) For the GPS compass or other true bearing systems

・ Select 38400 bps if possible. A higher baud rate means shorter data output cycle, which results in better course following performance.

・ If the system allows setting of data output cycle, set it to 10 ms to 20 ms.

A longer data output cycle results in lower course following performance. This may affect the radar performance level and the target tracking performance level.

Refer to an applicable page for details.

7

7─12

[V] Inputting analog speed signals from a log system through synchronization and steps

By following the procedure described in the INSTALLATION MANUAL, connect the optional NSK unit

(NCT-4106A) to this equipment. Then, follow the steps below to make settings.

In Section 7.2.5 “Ship Speed Equipment Setting (Speed Equipment),” select 2: LOG.

Refer to an applicable page for details.

[VI] Inputting digital speed data using a current meter or a Doppler sonar

(IEC61162 or NMEA0183)

By following the procedure described in the INSTALLATION MANUAL, connect speed equipment to this equipment. Then, follow the steps below to make settings.

In Section 7.2.5 “Ship Speed Equipment Setting (Speed Equipment),” select 3: 2 AXIS W to use the sea speed.

Select 4: 2 AXIS G to use the ground speed.

Refer to an applicable page for details.

[VII] Inputting GPS speed data (IEC61162 or NMEA0183)

By following the procedure described in the INSTALLATION MANUAL, connect speed equipment to this equipment. Then, follow the steps below to make settings.

In Section 7.2.5 “Ship Speed Equipment Setting (Speed Equipment),” select 5: GPS.

Refer to an applicable page for details.

[VIII] Inputting speed data manually

In Section 7.2.5 “Ship Speed Equipment Setting (Speed Equipment),” select 1: Manual.

In Section 7.2.6 “Manual Speed Setting (Manual Speed),” input the speed manually using the numeric keypad or multi-dial.

Refer to an applicable page for details.

7─13

7.2 NAVIGATOR SETTING yyy yyyy

7.2.1 Ship Heading Equipment Setting (Heading Equipment)

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Main Menu opens.

2 Press [7] key.

NAV Equipment Setting menu opens.

3 Press [2] key.

Heading Equipment settings are displayed.

4 From the pull-down menu, select heading equipment.

1 : GYRO (NCT-4106A, JLR10, JLR20/30)

2 : COMPASS (IEC61162)

<The alternative procedure for steps above>

1 Hold down [RADAR MENU] key.

The Code Input Menu will appear.

2 Press [0] key.

3 Move the cursor onto the “ENT” button in the Code Input menu, and press [ENT] key.

The Adjust Menu will appear.

4 Press [6] key.

NAV Equipment Setting menu opens.

5 Perform steps 3 and 4 in the “Procedure” above.

Exit 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Menu closes.

7

7─14

7.2.2 NSK Unit Setting

The NSK Unit circuit of the system is designed to be compatible with most types of gyro compasses by simply setting the switches.

Step motor type: 20 to 170 VDC

Synchro-motor type: Primary excitation voltage 35 to 120 VAC

Before power-on operation can be performed, the switches S1 to S5 on the NSK Unit circuit (PC4201) must be set in accordance with the type of your gyro compass by performing the procedure below. The switches are factory-set for a gyration ratio of 180X and the step motor type. Make sure of the type of the gyro compass installed on the own ship before starting the procedure below.

Procedure 1 Set S1 to "OFF."

The gyro compass and NSK Unit are turned off.

2 Set S2 and S3 in accordance with the type of your gyro compass.

There are two types of gyro compasses: one type outputs a step signal, and the other type outputs a synchro signal. Make sure of the type of the gyro compass installed on the own ship before setting the switches S2 and S3.

Synchro signal: Set the switches to [SYNC].

Step signal: Set the switches to [STEP].

3 Set the DIP switch S4.

The items to be set are listed below. For the settings, refer to Table 7-1.

S4-1: LOG alarm ON/OFF

S4-2: GYRO simulator ON/OFF

S4-3: LOG simulator ON/OFF

S4-5: Time

4 Set the DIP switch S5.

S4-6: Sensor to be used (GYRO/NMEA)

S4-7/8: Baud rate when NMEA is used

The items to be set are listed below. For the setting, refer to Table 7-2.

S5-1: Type of gyro signal (step/synchro)

S5-2/3: Gyration ratio of gyro compass

S5-4: Gyration direction of gyro compass

S5-5: Type of log signal (pulse/synchro)

S5-7/8: Ratio of log signal

5 Connect the gyro signal and log signal cables to the terminal block.

6 Set S1 to "ON."

The gyro compass and NSK Unit are connected.

7 After power-on operation, set the true bearing according to Section 7.2.3.

8 Make sure of the radar video and the operation with the true bearing value.

9 If the true bearing value of the radar equipment is reversed, change the setting of the switch S5-4.

7─15

7.2 NAVIGATOR SETTING yyy yyyy

Table 7-1 Setting Table (S4 DIP Switch)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON

LOG ALARM

OFF

GYRO SIMULATOR

ON

OFF

ON

LOG SIMULATOR

OFF

N.C.

GYRO ALARM

Don't care

TIME

HEADING SENSOR

SOURCE

5s

0.5s

any

ON

OFF

NMEA(HDT/THS)

GYRO SIGNAL

NMEA BAUDRATE

SETTING

4800

9600

19200

38400

ON

OFF

OFF OFF

ON OFF

OFF ON

ON ON

Table 7-2 Setting Table (S5 DIP Switch)

TYPE

RATIO

DIRECTION

TYPE

N.C.

PULSE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

STEP

ON

SYNC

OFF

36×

90×

ON ON

OFF ON

180×

360×

ON OFF

OFF OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Don't care

100P/30×

200P/90×

400P/180×

800P/360× any

ON ON

OFF ON

ON OFF

OFF OFF

7

7─16

7.2.3 True Bearing Value Setting (Set GYRO)

Adjust the bearing that the bearing angle of the radar is the same as that of the gyro.

When the NSK unit is used to input gyro signals, in rare cases, the true bearing value indicated by the master gyro and the true bearing value indicated by this equipment do not agree with each other. If this occurs, make the setting described below to adjust the true bearing value of this equipment to the value indicated by the master gyro.

This setting is available only when the NSK unit NCT-4106A is used.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key twice.

The Main Menu will appear.

2 Press [7] key.

The NAV Equipment Setting Menu will appear.

3 Press [1] key.

The Code Input Menu will appear.

4 Adjust true bearing value.

Adjust the bearing that the bearing angle of the radar is the same as that of the gyro.

The multi-function control can also be used to enter the value.

After having entered the value, press ENT.

<The alternative procedure for steps above>

1 Hold down [RADAR MENU] key.

The Code Input Menu will appear.

Exit

2 Press [0] key.

3 Move the cursor onto the “ENT” button in the Code Input menu, and press [ENT] key.

The Adjust Menu will appear.

4 Press [6] key.

NAV Equipment Setting menu opens.

5 Perform steps 3 and 4 in the “Procedure” above.

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The menu will be closed.

7─17

7.2 NAVIGATOR SETTING yyy yyyy

7.2.4 MAG Compass Setting

Set the MAG compass.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key twice.

The Main Menu will appear.

2 Press [7] key.

NAV Equipment Setting Menu will appear.

3 Press [5] key.

MAG Compass Setting Menu will appear.

4 Press [1] key.

This item is set as to whether or not the heading bearing is to be corrected. Switching between

ON and OFF is done each time you press [1] key.

5 Press [2] key.

The Code Input Menu will appear.

Exit

6 Pressing a numeric key, enter the value. Select “ENT” and then determine the value.

The correction direction and angle will be set. On the screen, press “+” to make correction in the eastern direction, and press “-” to make correction in the western direction. Also enter a correction angle, pressing the numeric key.

The multi-function control is also available for the entry. To do so, enter the correction direction, press the multi-function control, enter the correction angle, and then set ENT in order.

<The alternative procedure for steps above>

1 Hold down [RADAR MENU] key.

The Code Input Menu will appear.

2 Press [0] key.

3 Move the cursor onto the “ENT” button in the Code Input menu, and press [ENT] key.

The Adjust Menu will appear.

4 Press [6] key.

NAV Equipment Setting menu opens.

5 Perform steps 3 to 6 in the “Procedure” above.

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The menu will be closed.

7

7─18

7.2.5 Ship Speed Equipment Setting (Speed Equipment)

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key twice.

The Main Menu will appear.

2 Press [7] key.

The NAV Equipment Setting Menu will appear.

3 Press [3] key.

4 Select a ship speed sensor from the pull-down menu.

Types of selectable speed sensors:

1: Manual

2: Log

3: 2-axis log (NMEA signal: Speed over water)

4: 2-axis log (NMEA signal: Speed over ground)

<The alternative procedure for steps above>

5: GPS

1 Hold down [RADAR MENU] key.

The Code Input Menu will appear.

2 Press [0] key.

3 Move the cursor onto the “ENT” button in the Code Input menu, and press [ENT] key.

The Adjust Menu will appear.

4 Press [6] key.

NAV Equipment Setting menu opens.

5 Perform steps 3 and 4 in the “Procedure” above.

Exit 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The menu will be closed.

Attention z The manually entered speed is effective only when z

“Manual” is set.

2-axis log cannot be effective when the sentence

VBW of NMEA0183 is not entered.

7─19

7.2 NAVIGATOR SETTING yyy yyyy

7.2.6 Manual Speed Setting (Manual Speed)

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key twice.

The Main Menu will appear.

2 Press [7] key.

NAV Equipment Setting Menu will appear.

3 Press [4] key.

The Code Input menu will appear.

4 Pressing a numeric key, enter the value and select “ENT.”

The multi-function control is also available for the entry.

<The alternative procedure for steps above>

1 Hold down [RADAR MENU] key.

The Code Input Menu will appear.

2 Press [0] key.

3 Move the cursor onto the “ENT” button in the Code Input menu, and press [ENT] key.

The Adjust Menu will appear.

4 Press [6] key.

5 Perform steps 3 and 4 in the “Procedure” above.

NAV Equipment Setting menu opens.

Note: The manually entered speed is effective only when “Manual” is set.

7

7─20

7.2.7 Current Correction (SET/DRIFT) Setting

The current set and drift will be set.

Attention z The manually entered speed is effective only when

Procedure

“Speed Equipment” is set to “Manual” or “LOG”.

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key twice.

The Main Menu will appear.

2 Press [7] key.

The NAV Equipment Setting Menu will appear.

3 Press [6] key.

The Set/Drift Setting Menu will appear.

4 Press [1] key to enable Correction.

The setting of Correction is switched back and forth between ON and OFF each time [1] key is pressed.

Off : Do not perform current correction.

On : Perform current correction.

5 Press [2] key.

The Code Input Menu will appear.

6 Enter the direction of tendency.

The direction of tendency will be set. The multi-function control is also available for the entry.

After having entered the direction, press ENT.

7 Press [3] key.

The Code Input Menu will appear.

8 Enter the speed of tendency.

The speed of tendency will be set. The multi-function control is also available for the entry.

After having enter the value, press ENT.

7─21

Exit

7.2 NAVIGATOR SETTING yyy yyyy

<The alternative procedure for steps above>

1 Hold down [RADAR MENU] key.

The Code Input Menu will appear.

2 Press [0] key.

3 Move the cursor onto the “ENT” button in the Code Input menu, and press [ENT] key.

The Adjust Menu will appear.

4 Press [6] key.

NAV Equipment Setting menu opens.

5 Perform steps 3 to 8 in the “Procedure” above.

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The menu will be closed.

7

7─22

7.3

SETTINGS

This section describes the electrical adjustment procedures to be performed by service engineers during system installation.

CAUTION

Do not carry out the adjustments of the equipment except authorized service persons. If wrong setting is carried out, this may cause unstable operation.

Do not carry out the adjustments during navigation.

Otherwise, the radar performance may be affected,

resulting in an accident or trouble.

7.3.1 Communication Port Setting (COM Port Setting)

External sensor signals are input to the radar equipment through a communication port. The radar equipment has five communication ports. For signals to be input from sensors or to be output to the sensors, communication ports need to be set in accordance with the sensors.

7─23

7.3 SETTINGS yyy yyyy

7.3.1.1 Baud Rate Setting

Set the baud rate of the signal to be entered into the COM port.

Each ports on the menu represents following connectors.

GPS

COM2(PC) J8

AIS/NMEA

COM4(NAV2) J9

Procedure

Exit

1 Open the Adjust Menu.

2 Press [5] key.

The COM Port Setting Menu will appear.

3 Press [1] key.

The Baud Rate Setting Menu will appear.

4 Select the port number you want to set, pressing the numeric keys [1] to [5].

The Baud Rate Selection menu will appear.

5 In the selection menu, select the baud rate you want to set, pressing the numeric key.

Selection value

1. COM1 (GPS):

2. COM2 (PC):

1200/4800/*38400/9600 bps

1200/4800/38400/115200/9600 bps

3. COM3 (NAV1): 1200/4800/38400/9600 bps

4. COM4 (NAV2): 1200/4800/*38400/9600 bps

5. COM5 (COMPASS): 4800/38400 bps

* If COM1/COM4 is set to 38400 bps, signals can only be transmitted. The baud rate for reception can be set to up to 4800 bps.

COM5 can be used for receive port only. It is dedicated for COMPASS signal. This means that the port is unavailable for other signals.

The GPS, PC, NAV1, NAV2, COMPASS in the parentheses are the standard ports connecting to the external sensors.

When an AIS unit is used, COM3 is used exclusively for the AIS.

Connect the AIS to COM3.

Use a port other than COM3 when connecting a device other than an AIS unit.

An external device can be connected to COM3 when an AIS unit is not used.

When a baud rate of 1200 bps is selected, a 1200 bps JRC format is used.

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The Main Menu will reappear.

7

7─24

7.3.1.2 Reception Port Setting (RX Port)

Set the number of the port via which signals are received from sensors.

There are two methods for receiving signals: specifying a port for each sensor, or using the automatic recognition function without specifying ports.

Procedure 1 Open the Adjust Menu.

2 Press [5] key.

The COM Port Setting Menu will appear.

3 Press [4] key.

The RX Port Menu will appear.

4 Select the signal you want to set, pressing the numeric keys [1] to [6].

The Reception Port Setting Menu for each signal will appear.

Settable signals

1. GPS

2. DLOG

3. Depth

4. Temperature

5. Wind

6. Current

7. Rate of Turn

8. Rudder

5 Select which port you want to use for output.

Types of ports to be used

1. AUTO

2. COM1 (GPS)

3. COM2 (PC)

4. COM3 (NAV1)

5. COM4 (NAV2)

* For AUTO, the initial value will be selected.

Select the number of the port to be used, pressing the numeric key.

Exit 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The Main Menu will reappear.

7─25

7.3 SETTINGS yyy yyyy

7.3.1.3 Reception Sentence Setting (RX Sentence)

Set signal sentences to be received from sensors.

Procedure 1 Open the Adjust Menu.

2 Press [5] key.

The COM Port Setting Menu will appear.

3 Press [2] key.

The RX Sentence Menu will appear.

4 Select the signal you want to set, pressing the numeric keys [1] to [3].

The Setting Menu for each signal will appear.

Settable signal

1. GPS (LL/COG/SOG)

2. GPS (WPT/Time)

3. Depth

4. Wind

5. Current

5 Select whether or not you want to use sentence for the signal.

Types of sentences to be used

GPS (LL/COG/SOG): GGA/RMC/RMA/GNS/

GLL/VTG

GPS (WPT/Time): GGA/RMC/RMB/

BWC/BWR/ZDA

Depth:

Wind:

DPT/DBK/DBT/DBS

MWV/MWD

Current: CUR

After having selected a signal, choose the number of the sentence for which you want to set whether or not it is used, pressing the numeric key.

As concerns current, set data set number and layer number of CUR sentence.

Data Set Number:

0-9. Set the number of the sentence to be used by Data Set Number. (Initial value 0)

Layer A:

0-999. Set the number of the sentence to be used with layer A by Layer Number.

(Initial value 3)

Layer B:

0-999. Set the number of the sentence to be used with layer B by Layer Number.

(Initial value 4)

Layer C:

0-999. Set the number of the sentence to be used with layer C by Layer Number.

(Initial value 5)

7

7─26

Exit 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The Main Menu will reappear.

7─27

7.3 SETTINGS yyy yyyy

7.3.1.4 Transmission Port Setting (TX Port)

For each sentence, set a communication port through which signals are transmitted to sensors.

Procedure 1 Open the Adjust Menu.

2 Press [5] key.

Press [3] key.

3 Select the signal you want to set, pressing the numeric keys [1] to [9].

The TX Port Menu will appear.

The Output Port Setting Menu for each signal will appear.

Settable sentences

1. TTM(TT Target)

2. TLL(TT Target)

3. TTD(TT Target)

4. TLB(TT Target)

5. TTM(AIS Target)

6. TLL(AIS Target)

7. TTD(AIS Target)

8. TLB(AIS Target)

1.

2.

3. OSD

4. RSD

5. ALR

6. AIS

7.

8.

1. Remote Maintenance

2. NMEA0183 Output Format

3. NMEA0183 Talker

4. NMEA0183 TX Interval

5. APB

6. BOD

7. GGA

8. GLL

1. RMC

2. RMB

3. VTG

4. XTE

5. BWC

6. HDT

7. THS

7

7─28

4 Select which port you want to use for output.

Types of ports to be used

1. OFF

2. COM1 (GPS)

3. COM2 (PC)

4. COM3 (NAV1)

5. COM4 (NAV2)

Select the number of the port to be used,

5 Select the output format, talker, and transmission interval.

pressing the numeric key.

Signals for which the above items can be set:

• NMEA0183 Output Format

Signal names: APB, BOD, GGA, GLL, RMC, RMB,VTG, XTE, BWC, HDT, THS

Selection Value: V1.5, V2.0, and V2.3

• NMEA0183 Talker

Signal names: APB, BOD,RMB, XTE, BWC,

HDT, THS

Value:

Standard: The talker is RA.

GP: The talker is GP.

For TTM, TLL, TTD, TLB, OSD, RSD, ALR, and AIS, the talker is always RA .

For GGA, GLL, RMC, and VTG, the talker is always GP.

• NMEA0183 TX Interval

Signal names: APB, BOD, GGA, GLL, RMC,

RMB,VTG, XTE, BWC, HDT, THS

Selection Value: Set an interval in the range 1 to 9 seconds.

Note: When multiple output sentences are selected, data may not be transmitted at the selected transmission interval.

In particular, the volume of TTM, TLL, TLB, and TTD data containing TT and AIS target information increases as the number of targets increases, and as a result, the transmission interval becomes longer.

Exit 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The Main Menu will reappear.

* Note that, if you set COM1 and COM4 for transmission, they cannot be used as reception ports.

7─29

7.3 SETTINGS yyy yyyy

7.3.2 Sector Blank Setting (Sector Blank)

Set a sector range, preventing displaying the radar echo only within the area. Three types of sector can be created.

The sector blank function operates in the relative bearing with the bow.

[I] Turning ON/OFF the Sector function (Sector 1, 2 and 3)

Procedure 1 Open the Adjust Menu.

2 Press [4] key.

Press [6] key.

The Sector Blank Menu will appear.

3 Select the number you want to excuted sector blank, Pressing the numeric keys [1] to [3].

The system allows the use of up to three sector

Exit

blank areas.

Set each sector blank area to on or off.

On: The sector blank function is operated.

Off: The sector blank function is stopped.

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The Main Menu will reappear.

Note: This function can be performed only when the scanner is connected to NKE-2103 and NKE-2254.

7

7─30

[II] Making Sector Function (Make Sector 1, 2, 3)

Procedure 1 Transmit the radar.

2 Open the Adjust Menu.

3 Press [4] key.

Press [6] key.

The Sector Blank Menu will appear.

4 Slect the number you want to make

sector blank, pressing the numeric

keys [4] to [6].

The sector blank for the numeric key pressed will be made.

Exit

5 Set the start point of the sector blank by operating the [EBL] dial, and then press ENT.

The start angle of the sector blank will be set.

6 Set the end point of the sector blank by operating the [EBL] dial, and then press ENT.

The end angle of the sector blank will be set.

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The Main Menu will reappear.

7─31

7.3 SETTINGS yyy yyyy

7.3.3 TNI Blank Setting (TNI Blank)

Set a sector and stop tuning operation in the bearing.

If a structure such as the mast is close to the radar antenna, automatic tuning operation may become unstable. In this case, set a TNI blank in the direction of the structure in order to stabilize the tuning operation.

Only one TNI blank sector can be created. The TNI blank function operates in the relative bearing with the bow.

[I] TNI Blank Function On/Off (Sector)

Procedure 1 Open

2 Press the following keys.

4 TXRX Setting

9 TNI Blank

1 TNI Blank

On: The TNI blank function is operated.

Off: The TNI blank function is stopped.

[II] TNI Blank Area Creation (Make Sector)

Procedure 1. Transmit the radar.

2 Open

3 Press the following keys.

4 TXRX Setting

9 TNI Blank

2 Create sector

4 Set the starting bearing of the TNI blank by operating the [EBL] dial, and press the [ENT] key.

5 Set the ending bearing of the TNI blank by operating the [EBL] dial, and press the [ENT] key.

The TNI blank area is set.

7

7─32

7.3.4 Bearing Pulse Output Adjustment (Output Pulse)

Set the output value of bearing pulse. This radar can set the output value to 2048 pulses and 4096 pulses.

This setting is allowed only when a 25 kw antenna is used.

Procedure 1 Open the Adjust Menu.

2 Press [4] key.

The TXRX Setting Menu will appear.

Exit

3 Press [7] key.

4 Select a set value to be used.

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The Main Menu will reappear.

7─33

7.3 SETTINGS yyy yyyy

7.3.5 Language Setting (Language)

You can switch between Japanese and English.

Procedure 1 Open the Equipment Setup Menu.

2 Press

The Language Selection window will appear.

3 Select the language you want to display, pressing the numeric keys [1] to [3].

1. English

2. Japanese

3. Other

Exit

“Other” in 3. is a language corresponding to characters created in overseas agents.

To confirm whether or not your language is supported, contact overseas agents or our sales department.

To make the set language effective, turn off the power supply and then restart.

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The Main Menu will reappear.

7

7─34

7.3.6 Date/Time Display Setting (Date/Time Setting)

In displaying the time, it is necessary to set the LOCAL TIME, LOCAL DATE and TIME ZONE.

When the “ZDA” sentence of NMEA0183 is received, Date/Time is displayed automatically.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key twice.

The RADAR Menu will appear.

2 Open the following windows.

8 Open the Radar Sub Menu window.

4 Open the Data/Time Setting window.

3 Set information about date and time.

[1] UTC/LOCAL (Time display system)

Press [1] to switch the time mode between:

UTC: Universal Time Coordinate

LMT: Local Time

[2] Local Date

Input the date in local time.

Press [2] key and call up the numeric keypad.

Input the date using the numeric keypad or the multi-dial.

Then, press [ENT] button.

[3] Local Time

Input the time in local time.

Input the time using the numeric keypad or the multi-dial.

Then, press [ENT] button.

[4] Time Zone

Input the time-zone difference between the universal time and local time.

Input the time difference using the numeric keypad or the multi-dial.

Then, press [ENT] button.

[5] Display Style

Set one of the following date display formats.

Press [5] key and select a date display format.

YYYY-MM-DD

MMM DD, YYYY Example: Dec 31, 2007

DD MMM, YYYY Example: 31 Dec, 2007

Exit 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The menu will be closed.

Attention z The “ZDA” sentence of NMEA0183 take presedence

of the above setting.

7─35

7.4 ADJUSTMENT yyy yyyy

7.4

ADJUSTMENT

This section describes the electrical adjustment procedures to be performed by service engineers during system installation.

CAUTION

Do not carry out the adjustments of the equipment except authorized service persons. If wrong setting is carried out, this may cause unstable operation.

Do not carry out the adjustments during navigation.

Otherwise, the radar performance may be affected,

resulting in an accident or trouble.

7

7─36

7.4.1 Noise Level Adjustment (Noise Level)

[I] Noise Level Adjustment for Signal Processing

Procedure 1 When the Adjust Menu appears, press

[8] key.

The SP/TT INIT Setup Menu will appear.

2 Press [1] key.

The Noise Level Menu will appear.

3 Press [1] key.

The Code Input Menu will open to change the noise level value.

4 Change the value to display echo correctly.

In addition to the entry on the Code Input menu, the Multi-functional Dial Control is available to change the value.

Note: The noise level is factory-set.

After system installation, a great change in the noise level adjustment value should be avoided; it should be fine adjusted within

±5.

Exit 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The Main Menu will reappear.

7─37

7.4 ADJUSTMENT yyy yyyy

[II] Noise Level Adjustment Mode (Setting Mode)

Procedure 1 When the Adjust Menu appears, press

[8] key.

The SP/TT INIT Setup Menu will appear.

2 Press [1] key.

Noise Level Menu will appear.

3 Press [2] key.

The noise level adjustment mode is switched between on and off.

Exit

Factory-adjustment method

• The GAIN control is set to the maximum position, the SEA control is set to the minimum position, the RAIN control is set to the minimum position, and IR, AUTO-SEA,

AUTO-RAIN, PROC, FUNC, and TRAILS are all set to off.

• The noise level adjustment mode is turned on.

• While the noise level adjustment value is decreased gradually, the value with which radar echoes no longer appear is determined as the set value.

• Ten is added to the set value (with which radar echoes no longer appear), and the result is set as the final noise level adjustment value.

• The noise level adjustment mode is turned off when the adjustment is finished.

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The Main Menu will reappear.

7

7─38

7.4.2 Adjustment of Target Tracking Function (TT)

[I] Vector Constant Adjustment (Vector Constant)

Adjust the vector follow-up performance of the target tracking function.

The vector constant is adjusted to an optimal value, so do not change it carelessly. z Do not change the set value carelessly.

The vector constant shall be set to 5 normally. If the

Attention

vector constant value is higher, a target’s vector will be better followed up when the target and own ship change their course or speed, but the vector accuracy will be lower on the contrary.

Procedure

Exit

1 Press [8] key while the Adjust Menu is open.

The SP/TT INIT Setup Menu will appear.

2 Press [2] key.

The TT Menu will appear.

3 Press [1] key.

The window for setting vector constants will appear.

4 Select the value you want to set, pressing the numeric keys [1] to [8].

To improve vector follow-up performance, increase the set value.

To stabilize vectors, decrease the set value.

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The Main Menu will reappear.

7─39

7.4 ADJUSTMENT yyy yyyy

[II] Quantization Level Adjustment (Video Level)

Use the target tracking function (TT) to adjust the level of the signal to be recognized as a target. If a small value is set, even weak target signals will be input to the target detection circuit of the target tracking function.

However, many unnecessary signals are also input, which may cause unstable target acquisition or tracking. It is important to set a value four or five greater than the value with which unnecessary signals are detected.

The quantization level is adjusted to an optimal value, so do not change it carelessly.

CAUTION

Procedure

Do not change the set quantization level carelessly.

If the level deviates from the proper value, the TT acquisition and tracking functions will deteriorate.

Otherwise, this may cause accidents.

1 Press [8] key while the Adjust Menu is open.

The SP/TT INIT Setup Menu will appear.

2 Press [2] key.

The TT Menu will appear.

To change the quantization level of the

automatic acquisition area

3 Press [2] key.

The numeric keypad for inputting the quantization level of the automatic acquisition area opens.

4 Enter the Video TD Level value.

The multi-function control can also be used to enter the value.

After having entered the value, press ENT.

To change the quantization level of tracking and manual acquisition

3 Press [3] key.

The numeric keypad for inputting the quantization level of tracking and manual acquisition opens.

7

7─40

4 Enter the Video High Level value.

The multi-function control can also be used to enter the value.

After having entered the value, press ENT.

Exit 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The Main Menu will reappear.

[III] Gate Size Adjustment (Gate Size)

Use the target tracking function (TT) to set a target search area.

The gate size is adjusted to an optimal value, so do not change it carelessly.

Procedure 1 Press [8] key while Adjust Menu is open.

SP/TT INIT Setup menu opens.

2 Press [2] key.

TT menu opens.

3 Press [5] key and select a desired gate size.

Narrow: Small gate size

Normal: Medium gate size

Exit 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

Wide: Large gate size

The Main Menu will reappear.

7─41

7.4 ADJUSTMENT yyy yyyy

[IV] CPA Limit Ring Display On/Off (Limit Ring)

Use the target tracking function (TT) to determine whether to display the CPA limit for determining a dangerous ship. When the CPA limit ring display function is turned on and a relative vector is used, the CPA limit ring is displayed as a red circle.

Procedure 1 Press [8] key while Adjust Menu is open.

SP/TT INIT Setup menu opens.

2 Press [2] key.

TT menu opens.

3 Press [6] key.

Activate or deactivate the CPA limit ring display function.

Exit

Off: Limit ring not displayed

On: Limit ring displayed

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The Main Menu will reappear.

7

7─42

7.4.3 Main Bang Suppression Adjustment (MBS Level)

Main Bang Suppression is adjusted to suppress main bang, a reflection signal from 3D circuit including wave guide tube, that generally appears as a circular image focusing on the center of the radar display. Optimum adjustment allows main bang image to remain lightly on the display.

This adjustment is made for settings in the processing circuit of the display unit.

WARNING

Do not change this adjusted level carelessly.

Procedure

Incorrect adjustment may erase targets in point-blank range and cause collision, resulting in death or serious injury.

1 Perform the following operation before setting.

• Set the range to 0.125 nm.

• Set the radar video enhance function (ENH).

• Set the correlation processing function

(PROC) to OFF.

• Rotate [AUTO-RAIN] control to the minimum position (counterclockwise fully).

• Rotate [GAIN/PL] control to the maximum position (clockwise fully).

• Rotate the [AUTO-SEA] control to achieve the strength with which main bang can be judged.

2 Display the RADAR/TT INIT Setup

Menu.

3 Press [3] key.

The MBS Menu will appear.

4 Press [2] key.

The numeric keypad to be used in MBS Area menu opens.

5 Input “20” as an MBS Area setting value.

The value can also be entered with the multi-dial.

Press [ENT] key after inputting the value.

6 Input [1] key.

The numeric keypad to be used in MBS Area menu opens.

7─43

Exit

7.4 ADJUSTMENT yyy yyyy

7 Input an MBS area setting value such that the main bang image remains lightly on the display.

8 Press [2] key.

The value can also be entered with the multi-dial.

Press [ENT] key after inputting the value.

9 Input an MBS area setting value such that the suppression area and the main bang image completely overlap with each other.

The numeric keypad to be used in MBS Area menu opens.

The value can also be entered with the multi-dial.

Press [ENT] key after inputting the value.

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The Main Menu will reappear.

7

7─44

7.4.4 Adjustment of Performance Monitor (NJU-85)

After replacement of either of the following units, adjust the performance monitor according to the procedure in this section:

• Performance monitor

• Antenna unit

[I] Transmission Monitor Adjustment (MON Adjustment)

Adjust the circuit for monitoring the transmission performance of the radar equipment.

Procedure 1

4 TXRX Setting

4 MON

2 MON Adjustment

2 Increase or decrease the adjustment value so that the farthest point of the performance monitor pattern touches the 18.0 nm line.

7─45

7.4 ADJUSTMENT yyy yyyy

[II] Reception Monitor Adjustment (MON Indicator Adjustment)

Adjust the circuit for monitoring the reception performance of the radar equipment.

Procedure 1 Open

4 TXRX Setting

4 MON

3 MON Indicator Adjustment

2 Increase or decrease the adjustment value so that the performance monitor level indicator will be adjusted to "8."

3 Press the EXIT button to close the adjustment menu.

Note: During performance monitor adjustment, all acquisitions by the target tracking function are released.

The released target acquisitions are not recovered.

7

7─46

7.5

MAINTENANCE

This item is provided for equipment maintenance, including settings of antenna safety switch, master reset, etc.

CAUTION

Only our service engineers are to make the adjustment. Neglecting this caution may cause accidents and failures.

Do not make the adjustments during navigation.

Otherwise, adjustments may affect the radar functions, causing accidents and failures.

7─47

7.5 MAINTENANCE MENU yyy yyyy

7.5.1 Scanner Safety Switch Setting (Safety Switch)

Use this switch to measure the transmission/reception performance while the antenna is in stopped state.

Procedure 1 Open the Adjust Menu.

2 Press [2] key.

The Maintenance Menu will appear.

3 Press [1] key.

Setting items for the scanner safety switch will appear.

4 Select the item you want to set, pressing the numeric key [1] to [4].

1. TX OFF:

Exit

Stops transmission. (The screen remains in the transmission status.)

2. STANDBY: (Normal setting)

Stops transmission. (The screen switches to the standby status)

3. TX-ON:

Continues transmission without changes. (The display unit remains in transmission state.)

(However, errors in bearing signals etc. are to occur due to safety switch-off.)

4. IGNORE ERROR:

Continues transmission without changes.(Errors in bearing signals etc. due to safety switch-off are also ignored.)

5 Change the setting back to 2. Standby when the work is finished.

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The Main Menu will reappear.

7

7─48

7.5.2 Initialization of Memory Area (Area Initial)

If system operation is unstable, it may be stabilized by initializing the memory area. To initialize the memory area, follow the procedure in this section. The memory area is reset to the factory setting when initialized.

[I] Partial Master Reset

Procedure 1 Open the Maintenance Menu.

2 Press [2] key.

The Partial Master Reset Execution Check window will appear.

1 YES: Execution of Partial Master Reset

2 NO: Cancellation

The memory areas of specified items are initialized, and the system is restarted.

[II] All Master Reset (All Master Reset)

Procedure 1 Open the Maintenance Menu.

2 Press [3] key.

The All Master Reset Execution Check window will appear.

1 YES: Execution of All Master Reset

2 NO: Cancellation

The whole memory area is initialized, and the system is restarted.

7─49

7.5 MAINTENANCE MENU yyy yyyy

7.5.3 Save of Internal Memory Data (Card2)

The system can save internal memory data such as item settings in menus onto a flash memory card. If the radar processing circuit in the system has been replaced, the set values before the circuit replacement can be restored by reading the set values you saved before the replacement.

To save the internal memory data onto a flash memory card (option), the card must be inserted in card slot beforehand.

[I] Copying of Internal Settings onto Card (Internal to Card)

Save the internal memory data, such as item settings in menus, onto a flash memory card.

The internal memory data should be saved at completion of system setting, and the operation condition should be saved periodically.

Procedure 1 Insert a flash memory card into the

CARD slot 2.

The lower slot is slot 1; the upper slot is slot 2.

2 Open the Maintenance Menu.

Exit

3 Press [4] key.

The execution check window will open to check whether or not you want to copy the internal settings to Card2.

1 YES: Execution of copy

2 NO: Cancellation

If YES is selected, the internal memory data is saved on the flash memory card.

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The Main Menu will reappear.

7

7─50

[II] Reading of Internal Settings from Card (Card to Internal)

Read the saved memory data from the flash memory card into the system memory.

Perform the read operation in order to return the system to the previous operation condition after replacement of the radar processing circuit in the system.

Procedure 1 Insert the memory flash card, in which internal settings have been saved, into

Card slot 2.

The lower slot is slot 1; the upper slot is slot 2.

2 Open the Maintenance Menu.

3 Press [5] key.

The execution check window will open to check whether or not you want to read the internal settings from Card2.

1 YES: Read

2 NO: Cancellation

If YES is selected, the memory data is read from the flash memory card into the system memory.

After the internal memory area is updated, the system is restarted.

7─51

7.5 MAINTENANCE MENU yyy yyyy

7.5.4 Update of Character String Data (String Data Update)

The system is designed to transfer and display external character strings as the second language display. The second language is factory-set to "Japanese."

Ask our agent or sales department for the supply of character strings to be updated.

To update character strings, the flash memory card (option) containing the character string file must be inserted in card slot 2.

Procedure 1 Insert a flash memory card containing character string data into CARD slot 2.

2 Open Maintenance Menu.

3 Press [7] key.

A dialog appears asking if you wish to load the character string data from Card2.

2 NO

If YES is selected, the character string file on the flash memory card is read into the system, and the second language area is updated.

To display the read character strings in the second language, select Other in the menu shown in Section 7.3.5 “Language Setting

(Language)”.

7

7─52

7─53

SECTION 8

MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

MAINTENANCE ................................................. 8-1

8.2 MAINTENANCE

8.2.1 Scanner Unit NKE-2103/2254 ....................................... 8-2

8.2.2 Display Unit NCD-4380 ................................................. 8-5

8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK ................................................... 8-6

8.3.1 Test Menu....................................................................... 8-7

8.3.1.1 Self-diagnosis function..................................... 8-8

8.3.1.2 Monitor Test ..................................................... 8-10

8.3.1.3 Operation

Display .................................................... 8-13

8.3.1.5 Alarm Logging ................................................. 8-14

8.3.1.6 System INFO .................................................... 8-17

8.3.1.7 MAGI ................................................................. 8-18

8.3.2 Line Monitor................................................................. 8-19

8.3.3 GPS Reception Status Display (GPS Status) ........... 8-21

OF

8.4.1 Parts Required for Periodic Replacement ................ 8-24

8.4.2 Replacement of magnetron........................................ 8-24

8.4.3 Motor Replacement..................................................... 8-30

8.4.4 Replacement of Diode Limiter (A303)

(JMA-5212-4/6, 5222-7/9) ............................................ 8-36

8.1

ROUTINE

DANGER

Never carry out internal inspection or repair work of the equipment by users.

Inspection or repair work by unauthorized personnel may result in fire hazard or electric shock.

Ask the nearest branch, business office or a dealer for inspection and repair.

Turn off the main power before maintenance work.

Otherwise, an electric shock may result.

Turn off the main power before cleaning the equipment. Especially, make sure to turn off the indicator if a rectifier is used. Otherwise, equipment failure, or death or serious injury due to electric shock may result, because voltage is outputted from the

rectifier even when the radar is not operating.

For operating the radar equipment in the good conditions, it is necessary to make the maintenance work as described below. If maintenance is made properly, troubles will reduce. It is recommended to make regular maintenance work.

Common points of maintenance for each unit are as follow:

Clean the equipment.

Remove the dust, dirt, and sea water rest on the equipment cabinet with a piece of dry cloth.

Especially, clean the air vents with a brush for good ventilation.

8─1

8.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT yyyy yyyy

8.2

MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT

8.2.1 Scanner Unit NKE-2103/2254

DANGER

When conducting maintenance work on the antenna, make sure to turn its main power off.

Failure to comply may result in electrocution or injuries.

Make sure to turn off the antenna operation switch.

Failure to comply may result in injuries caused by physical contact with the rotating antenna.

WARNING

Do not touch the radiator. Even if the power is turned

off, the radiator may be rotated by the wind.

After the work, turn "ON" the scanner unit safety switch.

8

8─2

Precautions in Mounting the Cover

When the cover is removed for regular checkup and replacement of parts and refitted after such work, the procedure of fastening bolts shall be taken with the following precautions:

(a) The proper fastening torque of the fitting bolts (M8) is 1176 to 1470 N•cm (120 to 150kgf•cm) (which makes the inside water-tight and protects the packings against permanent compressive strain).

The packings start producing from the cover at a torque of approximately 1470N•cm (150kgf•cm).

Do not fasten the bolts with a torque exceeding the specified value. Otherwise, the screws may be broken.

(b) Use an offset wrench of 11 mm

× 13 mm or a double-ended wrench of 13 mm × 17 mm (not longer than

200 mm).

(c) Screw all the bolts by hand first to prevent them playing, then fasten them evenly in order not to cause one-sided fastening. (Fasten the bolts with 25% of the required torque at the first step.)

*: Fasten the bolts in the diagonal order.

1

4

4-M8 (stainless steel) bolt

Tightening torque: 120 to 150 kgf/cm

3

2

5

3

8

8-M8 (stainless steel) bolt

Tightening torque: 120 to 150 kgf/cm

1

2

4-M8 (stainless steel) bolt

7

4

6

Tightening torque: 120 to 150 kgf/cm

Bolt Tightening Procedure of NKE-2103 Cover

8─3

8.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT yyyy yyyy

(1) Radiator

z

If the radiator front face (radiation plane) is soiled

with smoke, salt, dust, paint or birds’ droppings, wipe it with a piece of soft cloth wetted with alcohol or water and try to keep it clean at all times.

z

Attention

Otherwise, radar beam radiation may attenuate or reflect on it, resulting in deterioration of radar performance.

Never use solvents of gasoline, benzine,

trichloroethylene and ketone for cleaning.

Check up and clean the radiator.

(2) Rotating section

An S-band scanner unit without a grease nipple needs grease supply. Remove the cap of the grease nipple on the front of the radiator support, and supply grease with a grease gun.

Make the oiling every six months. The oil quantity shall be approximately 100 g, which is as much as the grease comes out of the oil seal. Use the grease of Mobilux 2 of Mobil Oil.

(b) Oiling

Apply grease evenly to the tooth surfaces of the main shaft drive gear and the encoder drive gear with a spreader or brush. Oiling in short intervals is more effective to prevent the gears from wear and tear and extend their service life, but oil at least every six months.

Use Mobilux2 of Mobile Oil. legs

Check the mounting legs and mounting bolts of the scanner unit case for corrosion at intervals and maintain them to prevent danger. Apply paint to them once a half year because painting is the best measure against corrosion.

8

8─4

8.2.2 Display Unit NCD-4380

WARNING

When cleaning the screen, do not wipe it too strongly with a dry cloth. Also, do not use gasoline or thinner to clean the screen. Otherwise the screen surface may

be damaged.

Dust accumulated on the screen will reduce clarity and darken the video. For cleaning it, wipe it with a piece of soft cloth (flannel or cotton). Do not wipe it strongly with a piece of dry cloth nor use gasoline or thinner.

8─5

8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK yyyy yyyy

8.3

PERFORMANCE

Make operational check on the radar equipment regularly and if any problem is found, investigate it immediately. Pay special attention to the high voltage sections in checking and take full care that no trouble is caused by any error or carelessness in measurement. Take note of the results of checking, which can be used effectively in the next check work.

Operational check shall be made in accordance with Table 8-1 Function Check List in the order as specified in it.

Table 8-1 Check List

Equipment Item to be checked Criteria Remarks

Transmitter-receiver

Unit

Tuning LED of Receiver

The LED is lighting during operation

48NM range

Display Unit

Video and echoes on the screen

Sensitivity

LCD brilliance can be controlled correctly

Various markers

Various numerical indications

Lighting

Safety Switch

Various Currents and Voltages

Communications Lines

Memory

Panel

Monitor

TT

Magnetron current

Performance Monitor

Error Logging Display

System Information Display

Can be correctly controlled

Refer to [II] in Section 8.3.1.1

Refer to [III] in Section 8.3.1.1

Refer to [I] in Section 8.3.1.1

Refer to Section 8.3.1.3

Refer to Section 8.3.1.2

Refer to Section 5.2.7

Refer to Section 8.3.1.7

Refer to Section 8.3.1.4

Refer to Section 8.3.1.5

Refer to Section 8.3.1.6

8

8─6

8.3.1 Test Menu

The performance status of this radar equipment can be checked on the TEST Menu.

Self Test

Monitor Test

[I] Self-diagnostic function

[II] Monitor check

Keyboard Test

MON Display

Error Logging

System INFO

MAGI

[III] Operation panel check

[IV] Performance monitor

[VI] System information display

[VII] Indication of magnetron current

* Execution of MON Display requires a performance monitor unit NJU-85.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key twice.

Press [8] key.

Press [9] key.

The TEST Menu will appear.

* Software button ⑥ located at the operation/message area in

Exit

Section 2.3.9 is also available.

2 Select the check item you want to check, pressing the numeric keys [1] to

[6] on Test Menu.

The list of check items will appear.

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The TEST Menu will be closed.

8─7

8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK yyyy yyyy

8.3.1.1 Self-diagnosis function

Check of Memory, Scanner Unit, and Communications Lines

Memory Test

Sensor Test

1) Memory check

2) Antenna check

3) Communication line check

Line Test

Procedure 1 Press [1] key while the Test Menu is open.

The SELF TEST Menu will appear.

2 Select the item you want to check, pressing numeric keys [1] to [3] .

The SELF CHECK Menu will appear.

Exit

[I] Memory Test

Checks for the performance of built-in memory.

SDRAM

SRAM

SDRAM check

SRAM check

FLASH ROM

GRAPHIC

Flash ROM check

Graphic check

Procedure

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The Self Test Menu will be closed.

Exit

1 Press [1] key while the Self Test menu is open.

The Memory Test Menu will appear.

2 Select the item you want to check, pressing numeric keys [1] to [4].

When no abnormality is found, OK is displayed.

When an abnormality is found, NG is displayed.

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The menu will be closed.

8

8─8

[II] Sensor Test

Checks for signals from the antenna.

Safety Switch

AZI Pulse

Antenna’s safety switch check

Antenna rotation signal check

HL Pulse

MH Current

Trigger

Video

Procedure

Heading line signal check

Check on the load current of high voltage in the modulator

Radar trigger signal check

Radar video check

1 Press [2] key while the Self Test menu is open.

The Sensor Test menu will appear.

When no abnormality is found, OK is displayed.

When an abnormality is found, NG is displayed.

In standby, ** will appear.

Exit 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The menu will be closed.

[III] Check of Communication Lines (Line Test)

Check communication with operational devices and external navigators.

MTR

NSK

Check on connection with the transmitter-receiver

Check on connection with the NSK unit

GPS Compass

COM1

COM2

COM3

Check on connection with the GPS compass

Check on connection with COM1

Check on connection with COM2

Check on connection with COM3

COM4

Plotter Key

Procedure

Check on connection with COM4

Check on connection with Plotter Key.

1 Press [3] key with the Self Test menu open.

The Line Test menu will appear.

When no abnormality is found, OK is displayed.

When an abnormality is found, NG is displayed.

The status display field of equipment not

Exit

connected is **.

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The menu will be closed.

8─9

8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK yyyy yyyy

8.3.1.2 Monitor Test

Checks for the display.

The test pattern will be shown on the display.

Procedure 1 Press [2] key while the Test Menu is open.

The Monitor Test Menu will appear.

2 Select the item number you want to display, pressing numeric keys [1] to [5] of the test pattern.

The selected test pattern will be displayed.

Pattern 1: All colors are filled with white.

Pattern 2: A white box is displayed on the black background of

1024

× 768 dots.

Pattern 3: Displays rectangle

× 2, circle × 2, and cross-shape× 13

(white lines on the black background).

Pattern 4: Displays “H” of 9 dots

× 9 dots on the entire screen

(white character on the black background).

Pattern 5: Gray scale display (16 levels)

Pattern 6: Displays a color bar.

Exit

3 To return to the original display, press any key.

If errors occur in the monitor, no test pattern will appear.

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The menu will be closed.

8

8─10

8.3.1.3 Operation Panel Test

Checks for the controls and switches of the operation panel.

Key Test

Buzzer Test

1) Key check

2) Buzzer check

3) Keyboard light check

Light

Procedure 1 Press [3] key while the Test Menu is open.

The Keyboard Test Menu will appear.

2 Select the item number you want to check, pressing numeric keys [1] to [3] of the item.

The check contents will be displayed.

Exit 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The menu will be closed.

[I] Key Check

Checks for the controls and switches of the operation panel.

Procedure 1 Press [1] key while the Keyboard Test menu is open.

The operation panel image will appear at the upper left of the display.

Exit

Each key on the operation panel on the display is shown in reverse video at the same time the key is pressed, and the name of the pressed key is displayed.

2 To return to the normal display, move the cursor onto “EXIT” on the left side of the display, and press [ENT] key.

1 Press [0] key.

The menu will be closed.

8─11

[II] Buzzer Test

Checks for the operation panel buzzer.

Procedure 1 Press [2] key while the Keyboard Test menu is open.

Exit

2 The buzzer automatically stops after it sounds for a specified length of time.

The buzzer will sound.

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The menu will be closed.

[III] Light

Checks for the operation panel light.

Procedure 1 Press [3] key while the Keyboard Test menu is open.

The brightness of the operation panel is gradually intensified at four levels.

Exit 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The menu will be closed.

8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK yyyy yyyy

8

8─12

8.3.1.4 MON Display

The performance monitor status is shown.

* A performance monitor unit is required.

Transmitter System

Value

Check attenuation in the transmitter system

Receiver System

MON Pattern Range

Check attenuation in the receiver system

Procedure

Exit

1 Press [4] key while Test Menu is open.

MON Display menu opens.

2 Turn [VRM] control to slide the VRM to the end of the performance monitor pattern.

Attenuation in the receiver system is displayed in

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The menu will be closed.

Attenuation Value of Receiver System.

8─13

8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK yyyy yyyy

8.3.1.5 Alarm Logging

Displays previously occurred system errors with the dates and times when they occurred.

The current error is displayed in reverse video.

Procedure 1 Press [5] key while the Test Menu is open.

2 Error logs will be displayed in the dotted area in the figure at right.

The Error Logging Menu will appear.

For the display contents, refer to Table 8-2, Table

8-3 and Table 8-4.

Press [1] key to switch the error log display

Exit 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The menu will be closed. modes between chronological display and reverse chronological display.

Press [2] key to switch between error log display and alarm list display.

Press [3] key to delete all error logs.

Press [4] key to see the next page.

Place the cursor over the listed error to see when it occurred.

8

8─14

Table 8-2 System alarm warning list 1: Antenna

Message Description

TXRX(SSW Off)

TXRX(AZI)

Antenna Safety switch is off

Antenna Rotation signal error

TXRX(HL)

TXRX(MHV)

TXRX(Time Out)

Antenna Reference rotation signal error

Antenna Abnormal modulated high voltage

Antenna No communication

TXRX(Heater)

TXRX(Reverse)

TXRX(Video)

TXRX(Trigger)

TXRX(Fan 1)

TXRX(Fan 2)

Antenna Abnormal MAG heater voltage

Antenna Abnormality in reverse rotation

Antenna Abnormality in the video

Antenna Abnormality in the trigger

Antenna Abnormality in Fan 1

Antenna Abnormality in Fan 2

Table 8-3 System alarm warning list 2: Display

Message Description

Keyboard(Time Out) Keyboard No communication

Keyboard2(Time Out) Keyboard 2 No communication

PROC(AZI) Signal processor Abnormal rotation signal

PROC(Reverse)

PROC(Video)

Signal processor Abnormality in reverse rotation

Signal processor Abnormality in the video

PROC(Trigger) Signal processor Abnormality in the trigger

ASIC(ASIC1 to RADAR) Abnormal interrupt from ASIC1 to RADAR DSP

AIS PROC(Time Out) AIS I/F No communication

AIS PROC(Data) AIS I/F Abnormality in communication data and abnormality in checksum

Indicator(Fan) Display Abnormality in the fan

8─15

8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK yyyy yyyy

Table 8-4 System alarm warning list 3: External device communication

Message Description

NSK(Time Out)

GYRO(Data)

NSK unit No communication

Gyro Abnormality in communication data (error bit detection)

Log(Data)

Heading(Time Out)

Heading(Data)

DLOG(Time Out)

Log Abnormality in communication data (error bit detection)

Course No communication

Course Abnormality in communication data and abnormality in checksum

2-axis log No communication

DLOG(Data)

GPS(Time Out)

GPS(Data)

GPS(Status)

L/L(Out of Bounds)

AIS(Time Out)

AIS(Data)

AIS(Alarm ***)

2-axis log Abnormality in communication data and abnormality in checksum

GPS No communication

GPS Abnormality in communication data and abnormality in checksum

GPS Abnormal position fixing status

L/L System operation beyond the latitude range

AIS No communication

AIS Abnormality in communication data and abnormality in checksum

AIS alarm and the alarm number

COM Port1(Open)

COM Port2(Open)

COM Port3(Open)

COM Port4(Open)

COM1 Abnormality in the port

COM2 Abnormality in the port

COM3 Abnormality in the port

COM4 Abnormality in the port

Depth(Time Out)

Depth(Data)

Water depth No communication

Water depth Abnormality in communication data and abnormality in checksum

Temperature(Time Out) Water temperature No communication

Wind(Time Out)

Wind(Data)

Current(Time Out)

Current(Data)

Wind direction / wind speed No communication

Wind direction / wind speed Abnormality in communication data and abnormality in checksum

Current No communication

Current Abnormality in communication data and abnormality in checksum

Rate of Turn(Time Out) Turning ratio No communication

Rate of Turn(Data) Turning ratio Abnormality in communication data and abnormality in checksum

Rudder(Time Out) Rudder angle No communication

8

Autopilot(Time Out) Automatic navigation No communication

Autopilot(Data) Automatic navigation Abnormality in communication data and abnormality in checksum

Reference: An error message and a warning will appear at the lower right of the radar display.

Position of message or warning indication

8─16

8.3.1.6 System INFO

Displays the current system information.

Indicator

TXRX

Processor software version information

Scanner software version information

System No.

TXRX Time

Total

Motor

System number

Total operating time of the scanner unit (Total power-on time of the antenna unit)

Total operating time (Total power-on time)

Transmit

System Time

Total transmitting time (Total time during which radar was transmitted)

Total Total operating time of the display unit (Total power-on time of the display unit)

Procedure

Exit

1 Press [6] key while the Test Menu is open.

The System INFO Menu will appear.

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The menu will be closed.

8─17

8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK yyyy yyyy

8.3.1.7 MAGI

Displays the MAGI bar indicating the magnetron current to check.

Procedure 1 Check if the MAGI bar in the Test Menu reads the value below in a range of 24

NM.

6kW: 4 to 5 scale marks

Exit

10 kW: 4 to 5 scale marks

25 kW: 5 to 8 scale marks

1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The menu will be closed.

8

8─18

8.3.2 Line Monitor

Serial communication data can be seen on the built-in Line monitor.

Line monitor can be used to make sure that the serial data are received properly.

Procedure 1 Open the Adjust Menu.

2 Press [5] key.

The COM Port Setting Menu will appear.

3 Press [7] key.

The LINE MONITOR menu will appear.

4 Select the Communication port you want to see, pressing the numeric keys

[1] to [8].

The LINE MONITOR appears.

Refer to the next page for the display.

Each ports on the menu repesets followingconnectors.

COM1(GPS)

COM2(PC)

COM3(NAV1)

COM4(NAV2)

COM5(NSK/COMPASS)

COM6(TXRX)

COM7(KEY BOARD1)

COM8(KEY BOARD2)

AUX

J5 GYRO / COMPASS

J4 KEY BOARD

J9 AUX (Optioon)

Exit 1 Press [0] key.

2 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The Main Menu will reappear.

8─19

8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK yyyy yyyy

LINE MONITOR display

Received data ; The received serial communication data are displayed.

Transmitted data ; The transmitted serial communication data are displayed.

On-screen controls ; Line monitor can be controled by the following soft keys on the upper right corner of the LINE MONITOR.

1. Port selection ; This key selects communication port to be displayed.

2. Data format selection ; This key switches the data format between ASCII format and binary fomat.

3. Play and Stop ; This key activates or deactivates data display renewing.

4. Clear ; The key clears all data.

8

8─20

8.3.3 GPS Reception Status Display (GPS Status)

Display the reception status of the GPS receiver (GPS, DGPS and WAAS receivers) currently connected.

Seize the status of satellites that are currently performing positioning.

Procedure 1 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The Radar Menu will appear.

2 Press [7] key.

NAV Equipment Setting Menu will appear.

3 Press [7] key.

GPS Setting Menu will appear.

4 Press [4] key.

GPS Status Menu will appear.

Exit

<The alternative procedure for steps above>

1 Hold down [RADAR MENU] key.

The Code Input Menu will appear.

2 Press [0] key.

3 Move the cursor onto the “ENT” button in the Code Input menu, and press [ENT] key.

The Adjust Menu will appear.

4 Press [6] key.

NAV Equipment Setting menu opens.

5 Perform steps 3 and 4 in the “Procedure” above.

1 Press [0] key.

The Status Menu will be closed.

2 Press [RADAR MENU] key.

The menu will be closed.

8─21

8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK yyyy yyyy

GPS Status Display

The following items are to appear on the Status display.

DATE/TIME : Local date and time

(UTC) :

L/L : Current latitude and longitude

FIX MODE

ALT

DOP LEVEL

: Fix Mode (2D positioning/3D positioning)

: Altitude of own ship. Setting the Fix Mode to 2D displays the antenna height initially set.

: Precision of positioning results. As the value is smaller, the indicated precision is higher.

SATELLITE No. : Satellite No.

FIX

AZIMUTH

: Is positioning data used?

: Azimuthal angle of satellite

ELEVATE

LEVEL

STATUS

RSSI

: Elevation angle of satellite

: Reception signal level

: Current status of satellite

: Reception intensity of Beacon station

8

8─22

8.4

REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS

The system includes parts that need periodic replacement. The parts should be replaced as scheduled. Use of parts over their service life can cause a system failure.

CAUTION

Turn off the main power source before replacing parts. Otherwise, an electric shock or trouble may be caused.

Before replacing the magnetron, turn off the main power source and wait for 5 minutes or more until the high voltage circuits are discharged.

Otherwise, an electric shock may be caused.

Take off your wrist watch when bringing your hands close to the magnetron.

Otherwise, your watch may be damaged because the magnetron is a strong magnet.

Two or more persons shall replace the liquid crystal monitor.

If only one person does this work, he may drop the

LCD, resulting in injury.

Even after the main power source is turned off, some high voltages remain for a while.

Do not contact the inverter circuit in the LCD with bare hands. Otherwise, an electric shock may be caused.

8─23

8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS yyyy yyyy

8.4.1 Parts Required for Periodic Replacement

Here are parts required for periodic replacement

Part name Interval

1. Magnetron

2. Motor

3. LCD backlight

4. Fan motor

4000 hours

10000 hours

50000 hours

20000 hours

5. Backup battery 5 years

8.4.2 Replacement of magnetron

Before replacing the magnetron, turn off the main power source, wait for five minutes or more, and confirm that no charge remains in the high-voltage modulator circuit.

When mounting a new magnetron, do not touch the magnet with a screwdriver or put it on an iron plate. After replacement, connect the lead wire correctly.

Handling of Magnetron under Long-Time Storage

The magnetron that has been kept in storage for a long time may cause sparks and operate unstably when its operation is started. Perform the aging in the following procedure:

(1) Warm up the cathode for a longer time than usually. (20 to 30 minutes in the STBY state.)

(2) Start the operation from the short pulse range and shift it gradually to the longer pulse ranges. If the operation becomes unstable during this process, return it to the standby mode immediately. Keep the state for 5 to 10 minutes until the operation is restarted.

8

8─24

How to replace a 10 kW antenna magnetron

Make sure that all radars are turned off before replacing the magnetron (if there are multiple radar devices, turn them all off). It is also recommended that the breaker be turned off for safety.

Step 1: Turn off the antenna safety switch.

When replacing a motor, make sure to first turn off the antenna safety switch.

The switch is at the rear bottom of the antenna.

Turn off the switch.

Safety switch

OFF

Step 2: Remove the bolts and open the top cover.

The top cover is fixed with 4 hexagon bolts

(M8 captive screw).

Remove the bolts and fully open the top cover such that the stopper of the joint fitting is locked.

Joint fitting

* When closing the top cover

Release the stopper of the joint fitting before closing the top cover.

Hexagon bolts (4 places)

8─25

8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS yyyy yyyy

Step 3: Remove the cable.

J210

J209

J1

J3

J2

J1502

J125

J4

J5

J1504

Cover

Screws (4 places)

Cable clamp screw

(1 place)

Loosen all the screws (4 places).

Slide the cover to the left and remove it.

Remove the encoder connector (1 place).

(J209)

Remove the equipment cable connectors

(5 places).

(J1 through J5)

Remove the safety switch connectors

(2 places).

(J210 and J1504)

Remove the motor connector (2 places).

(J1502 and J125)

Remove 10 connectors in total.

* When a PM monitor (optional) is installed, remove the connectors (2 places) and then remove the screwed ground terminal.

Remove the screw (1 place) and remove the cable clamp as well as the equipment cable.

8

8─26

Step 4: Remove the transmitter-receiver.

Transmitter-receiver

Step 5: Replace the magnetron.

Magnetron

Nut plate

Screws

(2 on the front side)

Yellow

Screws (2 places)

Hexagon bolts

(5 places)

Transmitter-receiver

Screws

(2 on the back side)

Green

Loosen all the hexagon bolts.

Slide upward and remove the transmitter-receiver.

Remove the screws (2 places) and remove the magnetron cable.

Use a shielded screw driver.

Metal (tools) may deteriorate if they come in contact with the magnetron.

Remove the screws (4 places) and remove the magnetron.

Set the new magnetron in place.

Fix the magnetron and pulse transformer cables (yellow and green, respectively) carefully in place.

Reverse the order to complete the procedure.

Make sure that all bolts and screws are tightened again, and all cables are properly re-connected.

This completes the magnetron replacement procedure.

8─27

8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS yyyy yyyy

How to replace a 25 kW antenna magnetron

Make sure that all radars are turned off before replacing the magnetron (if there are multiple radar devices, turn them all off). It is also recommended that the breaker be turned off for safety.

Step 1: Turn off the antenna safety switch.

When replacing a magnetron, make sure to first turn off the antenna safety switch.

The switch is at the rear bottom of the antenna.

Turn off the switch.

OFF

Step 2: Remove the cover.

Safety switch

The magnetron is placed on the right hand side

(starboard side) of the antenna. Therefore, remove the right cover.

The cover is fixed with 4 hexagon bolts (M8

Captive Screw).

Place the cover in a safe place.

Prevent dust from being attached to the gasket.

8

Hexagon bolts (4 places)

8─28

Step 3: Replace the magnetron.

Screws

(4 places)

Magnetron cover

Screws (4 places)

Magnetron

Remove the screws (M4X10, at 4 places) and remove the magnetron cover.

Remove the screws (M4X12, at 2 places) and remove the magnetron cable.

Use a shielded screw driver.

Metal (tools) may deteriorate if they come in contact with the magnetron.

Remove the screws (M4X12, at 4 places) and remove the magnetron.

Cable: yellow

Do not lose the removed screws.

Set the new magnetron and cable in place.

Cable: green

Screws

(2 places)

Reverse the order to complete the procedure.

Make sure that all bolts and screws are tightened again, and all cables are properly re-connected.

This completes the magnetron replacement procedure.

8─29

8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS yyyy yyyy

8.4.3 Motor Replacement

First remove the cover, and then remove the socket of the motor. Remove the screws that hold the motor, and remove the motor. Connect the leads correctly after replacing the motor.

How to replace a 10 kW antenna motor

Make sure that all radars are turned off before replacing the magnetron (if there are multiple radar devices, turn them all off). It is also recommended that the breaker be turned off for safety.

Step 1: Turn off the antenna safety switch.

Safety switch

OFF

Step 2: Remove the bolts and open the top cover.

When replacing a motor, make sure to first turn off the antenna safety switch.

The switch is at the rear bottom of the antenna.

Turn off the switch.

The top cover is fixed with 4 hexagon bolts

(M8 captive screw).

Remove the bolts and fully open the top cover such that the stopper of the joint fitting is locked.

Joint fitting

* When closing the top cover

Release the stopper of the joint fitting before closing the top cover.

8

Hexagon bolts (4 places)

8─30

Step 3: Remove the cable.

J210

J209

J1

J3

J2

J1502

J125

J4

J5

J1504

Cover

Screws (4 places)

Cable clamp screw

(1 place)

Loosen all the screws (4 places).

Slide the cover to the left and remove it.

Remove the encoder connector (1 place).

(J209)

Remove the equipment cable connectors

(5 places).

(J1 through J5)

Remove the safety switch connectors

(2 places).

(J210 and J1504)

Remove the motor connectors (2 places).

(J1502 and J125)

Remove 10 connectors in total.

* When a PM monitor (optional) is installed, remove the connectors (2 places) and then remove the screwed ground terminal.

Remove the screw (1 place) and remove the cable clamp as well as the equipment cable.

8─31

8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS yyyy yyyy

Step 4: Remove the transmitter-receiver.

Hexagon bolts

(5 places)

Transmitter-receiver

Step 5: Replace the motor.

Hexagon bolts

(4 places)

Cable clamp

Motor

Loosen all the hexagon bolts (5 places).

Slide upward and remove the transmitter-receiver.

Remove the motor cable from the cable clamp.

Remove the hexagon bolts (M6, at 4 places) and then remove the motor.

Apply grease to the gears of the new motor, and bolt the new motor.

Tighten the hexagonal bolts using a torque wrench (72 kgf·cm).

Reverse the order to complete the procedure.

The rotor of the motor rotates. Clamp the cable such that it will not touch the rotor.

Make sure that all bolts and screws are tightened again, and all cables are properly re-connected.

This completes the motor replacement procedure.

8

8─32

How to replace a 25 kW antenna motor

Make sure that all radars are turned off before replacing the magnetron (if there are multiple radar devices, turn them all off). It is also recommended that the breaker be turned off for safety.

Step 1: Turn off the antenna safety switch.

OFF

Step 2: Remove the cover.

Safety switch

When replacing a motor, make sure to first turn off the antenna safety switch.

The switch is at the rear bottom of the antenna.

Turn off the switch.

Hexagon bolts

(4 places)

The motor is placed on the left hand side (port side) of the antenna.

Therefore, remove the left cover.

The cover is fixed with 4 hexagon bolts (M8 captive screw).

Place the cover in a safe place.

Prevent dust from being attached to the gasket.

Step 3: Remove the motor cable.

Remove the motor cable connected to the motor control power circuit.

Motor control power circuit

8─33

8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS yyyy yyyy

Step 4: Replace the motor.

Hexagon bolts

(4 places)

Protrusions for adjusting the motor position

Motor

Hexagon bolts (4 places)

Torque wrench (210 kgf·cm)

Motor

Motor mounting plate

Hexagon bolts (4 places)

Torque wrench (140 kgf·cm)

The motor is fixed with 4 hexagon bolts (M8 x

20 SW W, embedded type).

Remove all the hexagon bolts (4 pieces).

Remove the motor.

The motor weighs about 6 kg.

Handle it carefully.

Attach the mounting plate to the new motor.

Remove the motor mounting plate from the removed motor. The mounting plate is fixed with 4 hexagon bolts (M8 x 30 SW W, embedded type).

Attach the removed parts to the new motor.

Make sure to properly tighten all the hexagon bolts at the optimal torque (210 kgf·cm).

Place the motor in the antenna.

Press the motor against the protrusions from the arms of the case, and adjust its position to minimize the backlash.

Make sure to properly tighten all the hexagon bolts at the optimal torque (140 kgf·cm).

Apply grease to the gear after placing the motor in the case.

8

8─34

Step 5: Connect the motor cables.

Step 6: Put the cover on.

Turn on the antenna safety switch.

This completes the motor replacement procedure.

Reconnect the cables to the motor control power circuit.

Before attaching the cover to the antenna, make sure that the gasket of the cover is not deformed or cracked.

Also, remove any dust attached to the gasket.

Fix the cover with 4 hexagon bolts.

Failure to tighten the bolts or loose bolts will affect waterproof property; therefore, make sure to tighten all the bolts at the optimal torque.

8─35

8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS yyyy yyyy

8.4.4 Replacement of Diode Limiter (A303) (JMA-5212-4/6, 5222-7/9)

Remove the 4 screws fixing the receiver. Remove the 4 screws fixing the diode and the limiter, and remove diode limiter. When mounting the diode limiter, take care of the mounting direction and mount it in the arrow direction facing it the receiver front end.

Connect the wiring in the same way as before the replacement.

8

8─36

8─37

SECTION 9

TROUBLESHOOTING AND

AFTER-SALES SERVICE

FINDING ................................................ 9-1

9.1.1 List of Alarms and other Indications......... 9-1

9.1.2 Fuse Checking............................................. 9-3

SHOOTING...................................... 9-4

9.2.1 Spares .......................................................... 9-5

9.2.2 Special Parts................................................ 9-6

9.2.3 Circuit Block to be Repaired...................... 9-6

9.3 AFTER-SALES SERVICE ................................. 9-8

9.3.1 Keeping period of maintenance parts....... 9-8

9.3.2 When you Request for Repair.................... 9-8

9.3.3 Recommended Maintenance ..................... 9-8

9.1

FAULT

In case of semiconductor circuits, it is deemed that there are few cases in which the used semiconductor devices have inferior quality or performance deterioration except due to insufficient design or inspection or by other external and artificial causes. In general, the relatively many causes are disconnection in a high-value resistor due to moisture, a defective variable resistor and poor contact of a switch or relay.

Some troubles are caused by defective parts, imperfect adjustment (such as tuning adjustment) or insufficient service (such as poor cable contact). It will also be effective to check and readjust these points.

9.1.1 List of Alarms and other Indications

The system automatically recognizes an internal alarm and displays the alarm message. If an event which is not trouble but must be reported to the operator occurs, the system notifies the operator of the event.

This section gives the list of alarms displayed by the system and other display lists.

Table 9-1 List of Notification

Message Description

Set GYRO

TM Reset

Set a course with the gyro.

TM reset will be executed shortly.

Position Reset

CCRP Changed

Weather Information

Copying

Own ship position has been reset.

The CCRP position has been changed.

Weather information has been received.

The card is saving the data.

GPS(Low Integrity)

TXRX(Standby)

PM Test

GPS Low integrity

Antenna Ready for transmission

Performance monitor Being tested

Table 9-2 List of Target Tracking Alarms and AIS Function Alarms

Message Description

AIS(CPA/TCPA) AIS Dangerous target

TT(CPA/TCPA) TT target

AIS(New Target) AIS Automatic new target acquisition in the automatic acquisition area

TT(New Target)

AIS(Lost)

TT(Lost)

REF TT(Lost)

TT Automatic new target acquisition in the automatic acquisition area

AIS Target has been lost

TT Target has been lost

Reference TT Target has been lost

AIS(ACT 95% Capacity) AIS 95% of the maximum number of activation targets has been achieved

AIS(ACT MAX) AIS Maximum number of activation targets has been achieved

TT(MAX 95% Capacity) TT 95% of the maximum number of acquisition targets has been achieved

TT(MAX Target) TT Maximum number of acquisition targets has been achieved

9─1

9.1 FAULT FINDING y yyyy yyyy

Table 9-3 List of Operational Error Messages and Warnings

Message Description

Radar Alarm(In)

Radar Alarm(Out)

Radar alarm (approaching)

Radar alarm (leaving)

WPT(Arrival)

WPT(Break Off)

Destination Arrival

Destination Leaving

Route(Break Off) Route Leaving

Table 9-4 List of System Operation Error Messages and Warnings

Message Description

Not Allowed

No Heading Data

The executed operation is invalid.

There is no bearing data.

No Position Data

Can't Transmit

Invalid Data

Out of Range

There is no position data.

Transmission cannot be executed.

The value is invalid.

Out of range.

No Card

Card Full

Invalid Card

Read Failed

Write Failed

Delete Failed

Format Failed

In Use

In Use

MAX Point

Out of Bounds

Out of Bounds

Card is not inserted.

Card is full.

Card is not valid.

Data load from the card failed.

Data write to the card failed.

Data deletion from the card failed.

Card format failed.

Data cannot be deleted / changed because it is being used now.

Data has been inputted.

The maximum number of points has been reached.

The latitude is outside the displayable latitude range.

The latitude cannot be displayed on the map.

9

9─2

9.1.2 Fuse Checking

Melted fuses are caused by any clear cause. When a fuse is replaced, it is necessary to check the related circuits even if there is no trouble. In checking, note that there is some dispersion in the fusing characteristics. Table 9-5 shows a list of fuses used in the equipment.

Table 9-5 Fuse List

Location

Radar processing circuit

Radar processing circuit

Radar processing circuit

Radar processing circuit

Parts No.

Current Rating

F2 5A

F3

F2

F3

10A

10A

10A

Type Protection Circuit

ST4-5AN1 I/F circuit

ST6-10AN1 I/F circuit

ST6-10AN1 I/F circuit

ST6-10AN1 I/F circuit

Scanner Unit

NKE-2103 (10kw)

NKE-2103 (10kw)

NKE-2254 (25kw)

NKE-2254 (25kw)

9─3

9.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING y yyyy yyyy

9.2

TROUBLE

As this radar equipment includes complicated circuits, it is necessary to request a specialist engineer for repair or instructions for remedy if any circuit is defective.

There are also troubles by the following causes, which should be referred to in checking or repair work.

1 Poor Contact in Terminal Board of Inter-Unit Cables

a) Poor contact in terminal board b) The cable end is not fully connected, that it, contacted with earthed another terminal.

2 Poor Contact of Connector within Unit

Reference: This radar equipment is provided with 8-13 standard spares. c) Disconnected cable wire

9

9─4

9.2.1 Spares

Table 9-6 Spares

7ZXRD0026 : Scanner NKE-2103 (10kw)

Name Type/Code Shape (mm) Number Parts No. Location

Fuse

ST4-5AN1

(5ZFCA00050)

31.8

Φ 6.35

Application

Inside processing unit

For the antenna motor

Fuse

ST6-10AN1

(5ZFCA00053)

31.8

Φ 6.35

7ZXRD0015 : Scanner NKE-2254 (25kw)

Name Type/Code Shape (mm)

Fuse

ST6-10AN1

(5ZFCA00053)

31.8

Inside

4 F3 unit

For the power supply to antenna

Φ

6.35

Number Parts No. Location Application

Inside

4 F2 unit

For the antenna motor

Fuse

ST6-10AN1

(5ZFCA00053)

31.8

Φ 6.35

Inside

4 F3 unit

For the power supply to antenna

9─5

9.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING y yyyy yyyy

7ZXRD0027 : Processor unit NDC-1460

Name Type/Cde Shape (mm) In use Spare Parts No. Loccation Application

LTWBD-

Connector 06BFFA-LL7001

(5JCDX00032)

44.0

Inside processing unit

Mainly for GPS connection

LTWBD-

Connector 08BFFA-LL7001

(5JCDX00034)

44.0

Inside processing unit

Mainly for connecting course equipment such as a

GPS compass

Connector 07BFFA-LL7001

Connector

LTWBD-

(5JCD00033)

LTWCD-

14BFFA-LL7001

(5JCDX0052)

44.0

Inside processing unit

For AIS connection

For connecting other external devices when the

AIS is not used

For connecting external devices

44.0

Inside processing unit

For acquiring 2-axis logs, current data, and wind direction data

9

9─6

9.2.2 Special Parts

Table 9-7 Special Parts

[I] JMA-5212-4/6

Parts No. Name Type

A101/A102 Circulator FCX68R

Manufacturer

Toshiba

Location Code

NJRC Scanner 5VHAA00102

5AJIX00027

A103 Dummy NJC4002 5ANDF00001

A301 Diode Limiter

[II] JMA-5222-7/9

NJS6930

NJRC Scanner 5AWAX00002

NJRC Scanner unit 5ATBT00006

Parts No. Name Type Manufacturer Location Code

A101/A102 Circulator NJC3901M NJRC 5AJBV00007

A103 Dummy NJC4002 5ANDF00001

A301 Diode Limiter NJS6930

NJRC Scanner 5AWAX00002

NJRC Scanner unit

9.2.3 Circuit Block to be Repaired

Table 9-8 Circuit Block to be Repaired (JMA-5212-4/6)

5ATBT00006

Scanner

Scanner

Motor with gear

Modulation circuit

Scanner Receiver

Scanner Power supply circuit

Scanner Encoder

7BDRD0048 DC brushless motor

CME-363 Excluding Magnetron

CBD-1783

CHT71A

CBD-1779

Processor

Processor

Operation panel unit

DSP circuit (TT) NCA-877A

Power supply terminal circuit unit NBD-866A

Operation circuit

Operation panel unit PS2 connector circuit

Display

NSK unit

Brilliance control circuit

Gyro IF circuit

CDC-1353

CCK-979

CQC-1204

CCK-970

CMJ-304E

Brilliance controller

9─7

9.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING y yyyy yyyy

Table 9-9 Circuit Block to be Repaired (JMA-5222-7/9)

Scanner Motor with gear

Scanner Motor with gear

Scanner Modulator

7BDRD0044A DC brushless motor (ordinary speed)

7BDRD0045A DC brushless motor (high speed)

Including CMB-404

Excluding Magnetron

Scanner Receiver

Scanner

Scanner

Power supply circuit

T/R control circuit

Scanner Encoder

Scanner Fan

CBD-1682A

CMC-1205R

CBD-1779

CHT71A

7BFRD0002

Processor

Processor

Operation panel unit

DSP circuit (TT) NCA-877A

Power supply terminal circuit unit NBD-866A

Operation circuit

Operation panel unit PS2 connector circuit

Display

NSK unit

Brilliance control circuit

Gyro IF circuit

CDC-1353

CCK-979

CQC-1204

CCK-970

CMJ-304E

Brilliance controller

9

9─8

9.3

AFTER-SALES

9.3.1 Keeping period of maintenance parts

Keeping period of maintenance parts is ten years from the production is discontinued.

9.3.2 When you Request for Repair

If you suppose the product may be out of order, read the description in Section 9.1 “FAULT

FINDING” and Section 9.2 “TROUBLE SHOOTING” carefully and check the suspected point again.

If it is still out of order, you are recommended to stop operation of the equipment and consult with the dealer from whom you purchased the product, or our branch office in your country or district, the sales department in our main office in Tokyo. z Repair within the Warranty Period

If any failure occurs in the product during its normal operation in accordance with the instruction manual, the dealer or JRC will repair free of charge. In case that any failure is caused due to misuse, faulty operation, negligence or force major such as natural disaster and fire, the product will be repaired with charges. z

Repair after the Warranty Period

If any defective function of the product is recoverable by repair, the repair of it will be made at your own charge upon your request. z

Necessary Information for Repair

Product name, model, manufacturing date and serial number

☆ Trouble conditions (as detailed as possible. Refer to “Radar Failure Check List” in page

9-10. )

Name of company/organization, address and telephone number

9.3.3 Recommended Maintenance

The performance of the product may deteriorate due to the secular change of the parts used in it, though such deterioration depends upon the conditions of operation.

So checkup and maintenance is recommendable for the product in addition to your daily care.

For maintenance, consult with the near-by dealer or our sales department.

Such maintenance will be made with charges.

For further details of after-sale service, contact the JRC Offices.

9─9

9.3 AFTER-SALES SERVICE y yyyy yyyy

Radar Failure Check List

When placing an order for repair of the product, it is requested that you could confirm the check items and fill the results and sent the sheet to our contact.

If there is any unclear items, contact the ship on which the product is installed, and give the correct information on the product.

Ship name:

Radar general model name: JMA-

(Write the full model name correctly)

Phone: Fax:

Serial No. :

(1)Check the following items in the order of the number, and circle the applicable answer between YES or NO. If the item cannot be determined as YES or NO, explain in detail in the item (18), others.

(2)If any of the items (1) to (5) is marked as NO, check the fuse of the product (refer to Section 9.1.2 and 9.2).

(3)Check the items (4) to (17) while the transmission (TX) is ON.

*Functions mentioned in the items (14), (15) and (17) may be optional, answer is not necessary.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

Power can be turned on. (The lamp on the Operation unit is lit)

A few minutes after powering-on, it will become standby status .

When powering-on (or TX ON), LCD monitor something is lit.

The antenna rotates at the transmission (TX) ON.

(Check the following items while transmission is ON)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

Current is supplied to the magnetron. (Refer to the instruction manual)

Turning is enabled. (Check with the range of 6 NM or more)

Fixed marker is displayed.

VRM is displayed.

While noise is displayed while set at SEA and RAIN minimum, GAIN maximum,

IR-OFF and range 48 NM.

(10) Target reflection echo is displayed.

(11) Sensitivity of reflection echo is normal.

(12) EBL is displayed.

(13) Cursor mark moves.

*(14) GYRO course can be set and normally displayed.

*(15) LOG speed can be normally displayed.

(16) Target tracking function works normally.

*(17)

If equipped with an interswitch, when switching from the straight mode (II) to (X), the failures (items marked NO) in the above (1) to (16), are switched over to the other unit.

(18)Others (Error message, etc. )

YES NO

YES NO

YES NO

YES NO

YES NO

YES NO

YES NO

YES NO

YES NO

YES NO

YES NO

YES NO

YES NO

YES NO

YES NO

YES NO

YES NO

9

9─10

9─11

SECTION 10

DISPOSAL

10.1 DISPOSAL OF THE UNIT........................ 10-1

10.2 DISPOSAL OF USED BATTERIES......... 10-2

10.1

DISPOSAL OF THE UNIT

When disposing of this unit, be sure to follow the local laws and regulations for the place of disposal.

10─1

10.2 DISPOSAL OF USED BATTERIES yy yyyy yyyy

10.2

DISPOSAL OF USED BATTERIES

WARNING

When disposing of used lithium batteries, be sure to insulate the batteries by taping the

Otherwise, heat generation, explosion or a fire may occur.

In this unit, Lithium batteries are used for the following parts:

Radar Processing circuit (CDC-1350): BT1 (Maxell: CR2450) z

Do not store used lithium batteries. Dispose of them in accordance with regulations of local government. z

When disposing of used lithium batteries be sure to insulate the batteries by taping the

⊕ and

○ terminals. For disposal of batteries, be sure to follow the local laws and regulations.

For detail, consult with the dealer you purchased the product our business office, or local government.

10

10─2

10.3

DISPOSAL OF USED MAGNETRON

Magnetron is used in the Scanner (NKE-2103/2254) z

When the magnetron is replaced with a new one, return the used magnetron to our dealer or business office.

For detail, consult with our dealer or business office.

10─3

SECTION 11

SPECIFICATIONS

11.1 JMA-5212-4/6 TYPE RADAR..........................................................11-1

11.2 JMA-5222-7/9 TYPE RADAR..........................................................11-2

(NKE-2103-4/6).............................................................11-3

(NKE-2254-7/9).............................................................11-4

11.5 DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-4380) ............................................................11-5

11.6 PROCESSOR UNIT (NDC-1460) ....................................................11-6

11.7 TARGET TRACKING UNIT (NCA-877A)........................................11-8

11.8 AIS UNIT (NQA-2155) .....................................................................11-9

UNIT.............................................................................11-10

11.10 KEYBOARD

11.11 PERFORMANCE

(NCE-7699A) ..................................................11-12

MONITOR (NJU-85).........................................11-13

11.12 INPUT ENABLE SIGNAL..............................................................11-13

ENABLE SIGNAL..........................................................11-14

11.14 STANDARD

11.15 EQUIPMENT DISTANCE BETWEEN OTHER INSTRUMENTS ..11-15

11.1

JMA-5212-4/6 TYPE RADAR

(1) Type of Emission P0N

(2) Display

(3) Screen

Color Raster Scan, PPI Method

15-inch Color LCD

Effective diameter of radar display, more than 180 mm

(4) Range Scale

(5) Range Resolution

(6) Minimum Detective Range

(7) Range Accuracy

0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1.5, 3, 6, 12, 24, 48, 96 nm

Less than 25m

Less than 28m

Less than 1% of the maximum distance of the range scale in use or less than 15m whichever is larger

(8) Bearing Accuracy

(9) Bearing Indication

(10) Ambient Condition

(11) Power Supply Input

Less than 1°

Relative Motion mode: Head-up/Course-up/North-up

True Motion mode: Course-up/North-up

According to IEC60945-4

Temperature

Scanner:

(Storage Temperature:

-25 to +55°C

-25 to +70°C)

Other Unit except Scanner: -15 to +55°C

Relative Humidity 93% at +40°C

Vibration 2 to 13.2Hz, amplitude ±1mm ±10%

13.2 to 100Hz, acceleration 7m/s

Velocity of the wind 51.5m/s (100kt)

2

+24VDC (Display Unit)

+24VDC

∗ Display Unit and Scanner correspond to

100/110/115/220/230/240VAC, 1 ϕ, 50/60Hz when use NBA-5111.

Approx. 600W (In maximum wind velocity) (12) Power Consumption

(13) Power Supply Voltage

Fluctuation

(14) Pre-heating Time

+24VDC –10/+30% (Display Unit)

+24VDC –10/+30% (Scanner Unit)

Approx. Within 1min30sec

11─1

11.2 JMA-5222-7/9 TYPE RADAR yyy yyyy yyyy

11.2

JMA-5222-7/9 TYPE RADAR

(1) Type of Emission

(2) Display

(3) Screen

P0N

Color Raster Scan, PPI Method

15-inch Color LCD

Effective diameter of radar display, more than 180 mm

(4) Range Scale

(5) Range Resolution

(6) Minimum Detective Range

(7) Range Accuracy

0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1.5, 3, 6, 12, 24, 48, 96 nm

Less than 25m

Less than 28m

Less than 1% of the maximum distance of the range scale in use or less than 15m whichever is larger

(8) Bearing Accuracy

(9) Bearing Indication

(10) Ambient Condition

Less than 1°

Relative Motion mode: Head-up/Course-up/North-up

True Motion mode: Course-up/North-up

(11) Power Supply Input

According to IEC60945-4

Temperature

Scanner:

(Storage Temperature:

-25 to +55°C

-25 to +70°C)

Other Unit except Scanner: -15 to +55°C

Relative Humidity 93% at +40°C

Vibration 2 to 13.2Hz, amplitude ±1mm ±10%

13.2 to 100Hz, acceleration 0.7m/s

2

Velocity of the wind 51.5m/s (100kt)

+24VDC (Display Unit)

+24VDC

∗ Display Unit and Scanner correspond to

100/110/115/220/230/240VAC, 1 ϕ, 50/60Hz when use NBA-5111.

Approx. 680W (In maximum wind velocity) (12) Power Consumption

(13) Power Supply Voltage

Fluctuation

(14) Pre-heating Time

+24VDC –10/+30% (Display Unit)

+24VDC –10/+30% (Scanner Unit)

Approx. Within 3min

11

11─2

11.3

SCANNER

(1) Dimensions

(2) Mass

(3) Polarization

(4) Directional Characteristic

10kW-4ft: Height 458mm

Height

10kW-4ft: Approx. 38 kg

10kW-6ft:

Horizontal Polarization

×Swing Circle 1285mm

×Swing Circle 1910mm

Horizontal Beam Width: 1.8° (4ft, –3dB width)

Vertical Beam Width:

Sidelobe Level:

1.2° (6ft, –3dB width)

20° (4/6ft, –3dB width)

Below –26dB (4/6ft, within

±10°)

Below –30dB (4/6ft, outside

±10°)

(5) Revolution

(6) Peak Power

Approx. 27rpm (4/6ft, Normal)

10kW ±50%

(7) Transmitting Frequency

(8) Transmitting Tube

9410

±30MHz

Magnetron [MAF1565N]

(9) Pulse width/Repetition Frequency

0.125nm

Middle

0.08

μS/2250Hz

(10) Duplexer

0.25nm

0.5nm

0.75nm

0.08

μS/2250Hz

0.08

μS/2250Hz

0.08

μS/2250Hz 0.25μS/1700Hz

0.08

μS/2250Hz 0.25μS/1700Hz 0.5μS/1200Hz

1.5nm

3nm 0.25

μS/1700Hz 0.5μS/1200Hz 0.8μS/750Hz

6nm 0.5

μS/1200Hz 0.8μS/750Hz 1.0μS/650Hz

0.5

μS/1200Hz 0.8μS/750Hz 1.0μS/650Hz

12nm

24nm

μS/650Hz

48nm

μS/650Hz

96nm

μS/650Hz

Circulator + Diode Limiter

(11) Mixer MIC Front End

(12) Intermediate Frequency Amplifier Intermediate Frequency: 60MHz

Width:

μS)

8MHz(0.25

μS,0.5μS)

3MHz(0.8

μS, 1μS)

Gain: More than 90dB

Amplifying Characteristics: Logarithmic Amplifier

(13) Overall Noise Figure 7.5dB (Average)

11─3

11.4 SCANNER (NKE-2254-7/9) yyy yyyy yyyy

11.4

SCANNER

(1) Dimensions 25kW-7ft: Height 536mm

Height

×Swing Circle 2270mm

×Swing Circle 2825mm

(2) Mass

(3) Polarization

(4) Directional Characteristics

25kW-7ft: Approx. 56 kg

25kW-9ft:

Horizontal Polarization

Horizontal Beam Width:

Vertical Beam Width

1.0° (7ft, –3dB width)

0.8° (9ft, –3dB width)

20° (7/9ft, –3dB width)

–26dB within

–30dB outside

(5) Revolution 24rpm (7/9ft, Normal)

(6) Peak Power 25kW

±50%

(7) Transmitting Frequency

(8) Transmitting Tube

9410

±30MHz

Magnetron [M1568B]

(9) Pulse Width/Repetition Frequency

0.125nm

Middle

0.07

μS/2250Hz

0.25nm

0.5nm

0.75nm

0.07

μS/2250Hz

0.07

μS/2250Hz

0.07

μS/2250Hz 0.2μS/2250Hz

0.07

μS/2250Hz 0.2μS/2250Hz 0.4μS/1400Hz

1.5nm

3nm 0.2

μS/2250Hz 0.4μS/1400Hz 0.8μS/750Hz

6nm 0.4

μS/1400Hz 0.8μS/750Hz 1.0μS/650Hz

0.4

μS/1400Hz 0.8μS/750Hz 1.0μS/650Hz

12nm

24nm

μS/650Hz

48nm

μS/650Hz

96nm

μS/510Hz

(10) Duplexer

(11) Mixer

Circulator + Diode Limiter

MIC Front End

(12) Intermediate Frequency Amplifier Intermediate Frequency: 60MHz

Width:

μS)

8MHz(0.2

μS, 0.4μS)

3MHz(0.8

μS, 1.0μS, 1.2μS)

Gain: More than 90dB

Amplifying Characteristics: Logarithmic Amplifier

(13) Overall Noise Figure 7.5dB (Average)

11

11─4

11.5

DISPLAY

(1) Structure Desk Top Type

(LCD Monitor Unit/Keyboard Unit/Processor Unit Separation Structure)

(2) Screen

(3) Display mode

(4) Range Scale

(5) Range Marker

(6) Bearing Indication

(7) Variable Range Maker

(8) Electric Bearing lines

(9) Cursor

15-inch Color LCD 1024x768 dot (XGA)

Radar mode

Synthesis mode (Synthesis Radar echo and Coastline)

Plotter mode (Require Plotter Unit (option))

0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1.5, 3, 6, 12, 24, 48, 96nm

0.025, 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16nm

Rader mode/Synthesis mode

Relative motion: North-up, Course-up, Head-up

True motion: North-up, Course-up

True motion (Plotter mode (Option)): N-up, C-up

2VRM (Digital Display)

VRM unit of Display: nm, km

VRM Range:0.000 to 97.7nm (0.000 to 181.1km)

2EBL(Digital Display)

Each EBL can be floating displayed.

EBL unit of Display: 0.1°

EBL Range: 0.000° to 359.9°

Bearing Indication: Relative bearing and True bearing can be switched.

Target Range, Bearing and Latitude presentation can be possible to move with trackball.

11─5

11.6 PROCESSOR UNIT (NDC-1460) yyy yyyy yyyy

11.6

PROCESSOR UNIT (NDC-1460)

(1) Structure Desk Top Type (Horizontal putting and length putting using combinedly)

(2) Dimensions

(3) Mass

(4) Tune Method

(5) STC (SEA)

(6) FTC (RAIN)

(7) Radar Interference Rejection

(8) Scan Correlation

(9) Bearing Marker

(10) Heading Line

(11) Radar Alarm

(12) Off Center

(13) True motion Unit

(14) True motion reset position

Height 125mm

×Width 340mm×Depth 347mm

Approx. 4kg

AUTO/MANUAL (Bar-graph indicate)

AUTO/MANUAL

AUTO/MANUAL

Built-in (The effect can be adjusted by three stages.)

Function1/2/3, 2 Peak Hold Processing1/2

Automatic change of processing method.

(Target range synchronize/Clutter synchronize)

360° in 1° digit.

Relative

True motion: Rewrite at a position correct in every scan.

Electronic (Stern Line can be displayed.)

Invasion, Secession, OFF can be Selected.

With buzzer sound.(Possible to output to External buzzer.)

Ring, operating in rθ space, relative position

∗Automatically acquisition by TT described in Section “TT”

Within 66% of the radius of any range. (Except 96nm)

Can be operated in all mode in relative motion.

Trail is succeed at Off Center mode.

Built-in (Except 96nm)

66% of radius of any range.

Possible to manual reset.

11

11─6

(15) Twice zoom

(16) Radar trails indication

(17) Variety of Pulse width

(18) Target enhance

(19) Correct position

(20) Display color

The zoom center is 66% radius of any range. (Except 0.125nm)

True motion: (Only true motion)

Relative

True motion trails and relative motion trails can be selected.

Trail time length:

15 sec/30 sec/1 min/3 min/6 min/10 min/15 min/30 min/60 min/Continuous/OFF

Arbitrary trail time length can be displayed at any time.

Possible to display time series trail and continuous trail by color classification.

Built-in

Trail function can be use at true motion reset.

When range is changed, Trail function can be use.

Trail function can be use at Off Center. (Relative motion)

When motion indication and bearing indication changed, Trail function can be use.(Only true motion trails indication.)

SP1/MP1/MP2/LP1/LP2 (NKE-2103)

SP1/SP2/MP1/MP2/MP3/LP1/LP2/LP3 (NKE-2254)

3 stages can be changed.

When synthesis Radar and Coastline is displayed, position can be corrected by manually.

Radar echo: 16 stages (Yellow, Green, Amber, Purple, Red)

Radar trails: 16 stages (White, Cyan, Green)

Fixed Maker: Monochrome (Cyan)

VRM1/VRM2/EBL1/EBL2: (Cyan)

Character/Bearing Marker: 5 stages (White, Green, Amber, Black,

Red)

Cursor: Monochrome (White)

Heading Line/Vector/TT/AIS: 3 stages (White, Cyan, Green)

Own Ship’s track/Another Ship’s track: 7 stages

Coastline/Isobaths: 16 stages

11─7

11.7 TARGET TRACKING UNIT (NCA-877A) yyy yyyy yyyy

11.7

TARGET TRACKING UNIT (NCA-877A)

Radar mode, synthesis mode

1) Acquisition

2) Tracking

MANUAL/AUTO (by automatic acquisition/activation zone)

3) Display

4) Alarm

30 target (Automatic tracking)

Maximum tracking range: 32nm

Tracking data: 2 at the same time. (Can be scroll.)

Naming function: Possible to name by the alphabet up to 8 characters to each target.

The range, bearing, CPA, TCPA, true course, true speed, BCR, BCT of target can be displayed.

(When naming is displayed, BCR/BCT can’t be displayed.)

Vector display: True/Relative

Past position

Automatic acquisition/activation zone

Danger ship: CPA limit 0.1 to 9.9 nm, TCPA limit 1 to 99 min

Synthesis mode

5) Another ship track 20 targets. 1500 point per one target can be displayed.

(including AIS targets)

Display color: 7 colors

(The display color of each target can be set.)

(The display color of all targets can be set by the batch. In this case, the display color is one color.)

Interval of save: 3/5/10/30 sec, 1/3/5/10/130/160 min, 1/3/5/10 nm

Possible to storage in memory card (Option).

11

11─8

11.8

AIS UNIT (NQA-2155)

Radar mode, synthesis mode

1) Activation

2) Display

30 target

MANUAL/AUTO (by automatic activation/activation zone)

130 target (sleeping target and activated target)

AIS data: 1 at the same time. (simple display)

Vector display: True/Relative

Past position

The message can be displayed. (broadcast message, addressed message)

Target information in numerical values: Select one of the following four screens:

3) Alarm

・ Navigation information screen

True bearing, Distance, Course, Speed, CPA, TCPA,

Heading bearing, Turning speed

・ Destination and position information screen

Destination, Estimated time of arrival, Latitude and longitude,

Position fixing equipment, RAIM, Position fixing accuracy

・ Ship information screen

Ship name, Call sign, MMSI, IMO number, Navigation status

AtoN information screen

AtoN class, AtoN type

Automatic activation/activation zone

Danger ship: CPA limit 0.1 to 9.9 nm, TCPA limit 1 to 99 min

Synthesis mode

4) Another ship track 20 targets. 1500 point per one target can be displayed. (including TTs)

Display color: 7 colors

(The display color of each target can be set.)

(The display color of all targets can be set by the batch. In this case, the display color is one color.)

Interval of save: 3/5/10/30 sec, 1/3/5/10/130/160 min, 1/3/5/10 nm

Possible to storage in memory card (Option).

11─9

11.9 PLOTTER UNIT yyy yyyy yyyy

11.9

PLOTTER

(1) Plotter (Normal) (Synthesis mode)

Projection:

Scale:

Own ship trail:

Cursor mark :

Coastline data :

Mercator projection (Latitude 70 degree or less.)

Radar synchronize range scale

Color of 1 stage.

Interval of storage 3/5/10/30 sec, 1/3/5/10/30/60 min or

every 0.1/0.2/0.3/0.5/1/3/5/10 nm and OFF

Storage Capacity 7,000 point

Coastline ROM Card (Option) (ERC, JRC, C-Map NT+)

One selected isobath can be displayed.

Painting out: ON/OFF can be selected.

(2) Plotter (Option NDB-34A) (Synthesis mode)

Projection: Mercator projection (Latitude 70 degree or less.)

Scale:

Own ship trail:

Synchronize range scale

Color of 7 stages.

Interval of storage: 3/5/10/30 sec, 1/3/5/10/30/60 min or every 0.1/0.2/0.3/0.5/1/3/5/10 nm and OFF

Storage capacity of own ship trail: 7,000 point

Color of 7 stages

Storage capacity of cursor mark: 20,000 point

Variety of cursor Mark: 19

Color of 7 stages

Cursor mark:

Event mark:

Line:

Storage capacity of event mark: Include in cursor mark

Variety of event mark: 3 kinds, (Two kinds can be switched.

/8 form to selection.)

Variety of external event mark: One kind, Monochrome

Color of 7 stage

Storage capacity of line: Include in cursor mark

Variety of line: Solid line, broken line, alternate long and short dash line

Coast line data:

Painting out:

External memory:

Destination and sea route:

Position compensation:

Coast line ROM card (Option) (ERC, JRC, C-Map NT+)

Selected one isoline can be displayed.

ON/OFF can be selected.

Memory card (Option)

Destination can be set up to 99 point.

Information of destination: Azimuth, distance and the time to required destination.

Setting of sea route: 10 sea routes. (10 destination for one sea route can be set.)

Alarm of sea route: Destination, Secession, Invetion,

Secession

Radar display synchronize range scale coast line by manual.

11

11─10

(3) Plotter (Option NDB-34A) (Synthesis mode)

Projection:

Scale:

Own ship trail:

Cursor mark:

Mercator projection (Latitude 85 degree or less.)

1/1,000 to 1/10,000,000 are continuously selected.

10 stage can be changed (Preset can be used)

Color of 7 stages.

Interval of storage: 3/5/10/30 sec, 1/3/5/10/30/60 min or every 0.1/0.2/0.3/0.5/1/3/5/10 nm and OFF

Storage capacity of own ship trail: 7,000 point

Color of 7 stages

Storage capacity of cursor mark: 20,000 point

Event mark:

Variety of cursor Mark: 19

Color of 7 stages

Storage capacity of event mark: Include in cursor mark

Variety of event mark: 3 kinds, (Two kinds can be switched.

/8 form to selection.)

Variety of external event mark: One kind, Monochrome

Color of 7 stage

Storage capacity of line: Include in cursor mark

Line:

Coast line data:

Painting out:

External memory:

Variety of line: Solid line, broken line, alternate long and short dash line

Coast line ROM card (Option)(ERC, JRC, C-Map NT+)

Selected one isoline can be displayed.

ON/OFF can be selected.

Memory card (Option)

Own ship trail, another ship trail, cursor mark, event mark, line, destination, sea route can be memorized.

Destination and sea route: Destination can be set up to 99 point.

Information of destination: Azimuth, distance and the time to required destination.

Setting of sea route: 10 sea routes. (10 destination for one sea route can be set.)

Alarm of sea route: Destination, Secession, Invetion,

Secession

11─11

11.10 KEYBOARD UNIT (NCE-7699A) yyy yyyy yyyy

11.10

KEYBOARD

(1) Structure

(2) Switch

Structure of keyboard unit is separate from processor unit.

Desk-Top

Correspond Flush mount

Gain (Transmit pulse width can be changed by PUSH-SW.)

SEA (AUTO/MANU can be changed by PUSH-SW.)

RAIN (AUTO/MANU can be changed by PUSH-SW.)

MULTI (Adjustment item can be changed by PUSH-SW)

EBL (Floating EBL ON/OFF can be changed by PUSH-SW.)

VRM

Trackball switch

STBY/OFF (Standby/Power off):

TX/OFF (Transmit start/Power off):

Stop transmit, Power off.

Start transmit, Power off

PANEL(Brightness of keyboard adjustment): Brightness of keyboard switch adjust.

ALARM ACK(Stop Alarm):

EBL1(EBL1):

EBL2(EBL2):

VRM1(VRM1):

VRM2(VRM2):

Acknowledge and stop alarm.

Selection display and non-display of EBL1.

Selection display and non-display of EBL2.

Selection display and non-display of VRM1.

Selection display and non-display of VRM2.

RANGE+(Increase display range):

RANGE-(decrease display range):

ACQ(acquisition):

TGT DATA(Numeric display):

TGT CNCL(Release of selection):

MOB(Marker):

ENT(Enter):

CLR/INFO(Release/Information):

MAP(Display mode):

AZI MODE(Display azimuth):

TM/RM(True/Relative Motion):

RR/HL(Fixed ring/Heading Line):

OFF CENT(Off Center):

AZ ALARM (Guard zone alarm):

Increase display range. decrease display range.

TT target acquisition

Numeric display of tracking target.

Release of selection of tracking target.

Turning on and release marker.

Left side button of trackball.

Right side of trackball.

Selection display and non-display of MAP(NAV

LINE, etc…).

Selection of Rader, Synthesis and Plotter mode.

Selection of North-up, Course-Up, Head-Up.

Selection true motion, relative motion.

Selection display and non-display of fixed ring and heading line.

Off center operation

Setting and release of automatic acquisition/activate zone.

VECT T/R (True/Relative motion vector): Selection of true motion and relative motion of

TRAILS (Trails): vector.

Selection display and non-display of trails.

Day/Night(Brightness of screen switch):

FUNC(Function):

USER KEY1(User key1):

USER KEY2(User key2):

RADAR MENU(Radar menu):

MARK(MARK):

TT MENU(TT menu):

Selection of screen arrangement of color.

Selection of signal processing.

User assignment key1.

User assignment key2.

Rader menu.

Selection display and non-display of mark.

TT menu.

11

11─12

11.11

PERFORMANCE MONITOR (NJU-85)

Height

×Width 149mm×Depth 70mm

(1) Dimensions

(2) Mass frequency

11.12

INPUT ENABLE SIGNAL

IEC61162-1/2

(2) Bearing signal:

Receive port NAV1/NAV2/GPS port

Receive capability sentence.

VBW

Day/Time information: ZDA

Rate of Turn : ROT

Rudder : RSA

GYRO-SYNC: 360X, 180X, 90X, 30X. (Require optional NSK unit NCT-4106A)

GYRO-STEP: 360X, 180X, 90X, 30X. (Require optional NSK unit NCT-4106A)

JRC-NSK format (JLR-10, JLR20/30)

38400bps:

(over 40Hz)

THS>HDT>HDG>HDM>VHW

∗ Can’t be use for target tracking.

(3) Speed signal: LOG-SYNC: 360X, 180X,90X, 30X. (Require optional NSK unit NCT-4106A)

LOG-PULSE: 800, 400, 200, 100. (Require optional NSK unit

NCT-4106A)

(4) External event mark:

(5) Depth:

(6) Water temperature:

(7) Tendency:

Contact input by way of terminal board.

DPT>DBK>DBT>DBS, JRC format

MTW, JRC format

(8) Direction of wind, velocity of wind: MWV, MWD

(9) AIS: IEC61162-2

VDM, VDO (Require optional AIS process unit NQA-2155)

11─13

11.13 OUTPUT ENABLE SIGNAL yyy yyyy yyyy

11.13

OUTPUT

(1) Slave video Radar video: TIY, VD, BP(2048p), BZ (Option)

(2) Navigation

Radar system data: RSD

Own ship data: OSD

Tracking target data: TTM, TLL, TTD, TLB

(3) External alarm

(4) External monitor

Bearing of destination: BOD

Latitude/Longitude data : GGA, GLL, RMC

Waypoint data : RMB, BWC

COG/SOG

Cross track error: XTE

Heading

:

HDT,

J5 (NSK/COMPASS connector) ⑥ALM+, ⑦ALM-

NCT-4106A (TB40) optional

Multi scan monitor, Analog RGB, HD15pin Connector (Option)

11.14

STANDARD

(1) Scanner

(2) Display unit

1

1 (Processor unit, LCD unit, Keyboard unit)

(3) Power cable CFQ-6911-5 (5m)

(4) Equipment reserve parts 1

(5) Instruction manual 1 (Japanese or English)

Note: An equipment cable is optional.

Purchase an equipment cable of desired length.

11

11─14

11.15

EQUIPMENT DISTANCE BETWEEN

OTHER INSTRUMENTS

Maximum

(1) LCD monitor to processor unit

(2) Keyboard unit to processor unit

(3) Scanner to display unit (10/25kw)

11.16

OTHERS

• Equipment cable

10/25 kW type (connectors on both ends)

Cable

10m CFQ-6912-10/15m CFQ-6912-15

• TT unit NCA-877A

• NSK unit NCT-4106A

• AIS unit NQA-2155

20m CFQ-6912-20/30m CFQ-6912-30

40m CFQ-6912-40/50m CFQ-6912-50

65m CFQ-6912-65

• Plotter unit NDB-34A

• X band performance monitor NJU-85

• Display stand MPBX42944

• Horizontal sun visor for NWZ-164 MPOL30369

• Vertical sun visor for NWZ-164 MPOL30370

• Simple ISW cable CFQ-5251 (5 m)

• Sub-monitor lead cable CFQ-5350 (7ZCRD1153)

• ISW/sub-operation unit lead cable CFQ-5351 (7ZCRD1152)

• NMEA lead cable CFQ-5352 (7ZCRD1212)

• NMEA lead cable 2 CFQ-5462 (2CH pair for transmission and receive)

• Cable between connected NMEA units CFQ-6560 (10 m)

• JLR-10 connection cable CFQ-6934 (10 m)

• JLR-20/30 connection cable CFQ-5469

• Keyboard extension cable CFQ-6999 (10 m)

• NDW-51 connection cable CFQ-7082

• Coast line ROM card

• Memory card

• Rectifier unit NBA-5111

5m

5m

65m

11─15

Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement